Fine Hvac En

FINE-HVAC

FINE HVAC Copyright 1991-2003 by 4M

In this User’s Guide the program’s functions are described at the moment that the User’s Guide was printed. Because this program is constantly being developed, possible modifications of the User’s Guide could be found into the CD of the program in PDF file format.

Preface The purpose of this User’s Guide is the easy understanding of the operation of FINE HVAC, the Fully INtegrated Environment for Heating, Ventilation and AirConditioning. FINE combines both designing and calculations in a uniform, integrated environment, consisting of two main components, CAD and Calculations:

• Concerning the CAD component, the user is able to select the designing environment, which can be either the autocad platform (AutoFINE) or the autonomous CAD engine (FINE) which includes IntelliCAD. Both designing programs have similar capabilities, same operation features and common file format (dwg). In both cases the CAD component thinks, suggests, designs, calculates and produces completely automatically the entire calculations issue for every HVAC project, as well as all the drawings in their final form.

• Concerning the Calculations component (called also as ADAPT/FCALC), it has been designed according to the latest technological standards and stands out for its unique user - friendliness, its methodological thoroughness of calculations and its in-depth presentation of the results. The HVAC Calculation Environment consists of 8 modules: Heating Loads, Single Pipe System, Twin Pipes System, Infloor System, Cooling Loads, Fan Coils, Air Ducts and Psychrometry. Each module acquires data directly from the drawings (automatically), thus resulting in significant time saving and maximum reliability of the project results. It can also be used independently, by typing data within the module spreadsheets.

Despite its numerous capabilities, FINE has been designed in order to be easy to learn. Indeed, the simplicity in the operation philosophy is realised very soon and all that the user has to do is to familiarise with the package. The present User’s Guide, divided in two parts, for CAD and Calculations respectively, helps the user to learn how to use these two components either separately or in combination, by guiding him step by step and utilising helpful examples, where needed. The first step is the software installation, following the procedure described in page one. Teba-4Μ support department is always by the user's side in order to make the learning phase as quick and effective as possible.

Preface..................................................................................................................................... Installation ............................................................................................................................ 1

PART I The CAD Component

1. Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 5

1.1 Overview................................................................................................................................. 5

1.2 Structure of the Part I ........................................................................................................... 6

1.3 Main menu.............................................................................................................................. 7

2. Drawing Principles ........................................................................................................... 9 2.1 General.................................................................................................................................... 9

2.2 Drawing aids......................................................................................................................... 10 2.2.1 Osnap ............................................................................................................................................ 10 2.2.2 Horizontal/Vertical drawing (Ortho)............................................................................................. 11 2.2.3 Grid ............................................................................................................................................... 12 2.2.4 Snap .............................................................................................................................................. 12

2.3 Drawing Coordinates........................................................................................................... 12

2.4 Drawing Basic Entities ........................................................................................................ 13 2.4.1 Line ............................................................................................................................................... 13 2.4.2 Arc ................................................................................................................................................ 13 2.4.3 Polyline ......................................................................................................................................... 13

2.5 Useful Commands ................................................................................................................ 13 2.5.1 Zoom............................................................................................................................................. 13 2.5.2 Pan ................................................................................................................................................ 15 2.5.3 Select............................................................................................................................................. 15 2.5.4 Move ............................................................................................................................................. 16 2.5.5. Copy............................................................................................................................................. 16 2.5.6 Erase ............................................................................................................................................. 16 2.5.7 DDInsert (Insert Drawing) ............................................................................................................ 16 2.5.8 Wblock.......................................................................................................................................... 16 2.5.9 Explode ......................................................................................................................................... 17

2.6 Grips...................................................................................................................................... 17 2.6.1 Stretch ........................................................................................................................................... 17 2.6.2 Move ............................................................................................................................................. 18 2.6.3 Rotate ............................................................................................................................................ 18 2.6.4 Scale (Up/Down) .......................................................................................................................... 19 2.6.5 Mirror............................................................................................................................................ 19

2.7 Print....................................................................................................................................... 20

3. AutoBUILD: Architectural Drawing............................................................................. 29 3.1 Building Definition............................................................................................................... 30

3.2 Layers Management ............................................................................................................ 32

3.3 Copy Building Level ............................................................................................................ 33

3.4 Typical Elements.................................................................................................................. 33

3.5 Attributes.............................................................................................................................. 35

3.6 North Direction .................................................................................................................... 40

3.7 Wall ....................................................................................................................................... 41 3.7.1 Wall Drawing................................................................................................................................ 41 3.7.2 Wall Data Editing ......................................................................................................................... 46 3.7.3 Full Drawing ................................................................................................................................. 48

3.8 Opening................................................................................................................................. 48

3.9 Column (Pillar) .................................................................................................................... 51

3.10 Floors-Ceilings (or Roofs) ................................................................................................. 52

3.11 Drawings - Symbols ........................................................................................................... 53

3.12 Definition of Plan view Elements...................................................................................... 53 3.12.1 Space Definition.......................................................................................................................... 53

3.13 Calculations ........................................................................................................................ 55 3.13.1 Thermal Losses ........................................................................................................................... 56 3.13.2 Update Spaces from Thermal Losses .......................................................................................... 56 3.13.3 Cooling loads .............................................................................................................................. 57

3.14 Libraries ............................................................................................................................. 57 3.14.1 Data Libraries.............................................................................................................................. 57 3.14.2 Drawing Libraries ....................................................................................................................... 57

3.15 Building Reconstruction.................................................................................................... 59

3.16 Plan View (2D) ................................................................................................................... 59

3.17 3D View............................................................................................................................... 59

3.18 Axonometric ....................................................................................................................... 60

3.19 Saving sections of the drawing in other drawings........................................................... 60 3.19.1 Command Wblock ...................................................................................................................... 60 3.19.2 Screen Drawing........................................................................................................................... 60

4. AutoNET: General Features......................................................................................... 63 4.1 Drawing Definition .............................................................................................................. 63

4.2 Applications Layers Management...................................................................................... 64

4.3 Copy network of Level......................................................................................................... 64

4.4 Select Application ................................................................................................................ 66

4.5 Network Drawing................................................................................................................. 68 4.5.1 Horizontal & Vertical Piping ........................................................................................................ 68 4.5.2 Column Drawing........................................................................................................................... 69 4.5.3 Vertical branches within the same floor........................................................................................ 70 4.5.4 Drawing of Curved Pipes.............................................................................................................. 72 4.5.5 Connecting network sections ........................................................................................................ 74 4.5.6 Special Commands for Pipe Construction .................................................................................... 77 4.5.7 Modifying an existing network ..................................................................................................... 80

4.6 Receptors .............................................................................................................................. 81

4.7 Accessories............................................................................................................................ 84

4.8 Symbols ................................................................................................................................. 87

4.9 General Symbols .................................................................................................................. 88

4.10 Network Recognition and Numbering ............................................................................. 88

4.11 Calculations ........................................................................................................................ 89

4.12 Drawing Update ................................................................................................................. 90

4.13 Legend................................................................................................................................. 90

4.14 Vertical Diagram................................................................................................................ 90

4.15 Library Management ........................................................................................................ 95

5. AutoNET: Network Installations ................................................................................... 99 5.1 Typical Example .................................................................................................................. 99

5.2 Single-Pipe System............................................................................................................. 107

5.3 Twin-Pipes System............................................................................................................. 115

5.4 Fan Coils ............................................................................................................................. 118

5.5 Air-Ducts............................................................................................................................. 120 5.5.1 Linear Drawing-Identification-Conversion into Two-dimensional............................................. 120 5.5.2 Two-dimensional Air-duct Drawing ........................................................................................... 124 5.5.3 3D Air-duct Drawing .................................................................................................................. 138

6. Plus Drawing Tools ...................................................................................................... 145 6.1 Text...................................................................................................................................... 146

6.1.1 Text Height ................................................................................................................................. 147 6.1.2 Select Style ................................................................................................................................. 147 6.1.3 Text ............................................................................................................................................. 147 6.1.4 Edit Paragraph (Ptext)................................................................................................................. 148 6.1.5 Arithmetic Progression (Sequence)............................................................................................. 148 6.1.6 Get Style (Styleset) ..................................................................................................................... 149 6.1.7 Text Edit (DDEDIT) ................................................................................................................... 149 6.1.8 DOS Text Edit (Etext) ................................................................................................................ 149 6.1.9 To DOS System .......................................................................................................................... 149 6.1.10 To Windows System ................................................................................................................. 149 6.1.11 Text Edit (Export/Edit) ............................................................................................................. 149 6.1.12 Change Style ............................................................................................................................. 149 6.1.13 Capital-Lower case (Upper_Lower) ......................................................................................... 150 6.1.14 Change Height (Τheight) .......................................................................................................... 150 6.1.15 Stretch ....................................................................................................................................... 150 6.1.16 Justify (Align) ........................................................................................................................... 150 6.1.17 Change Numeration (Angle_block) .......................................................................................... 150 6.1.18 Add (Append) ........................................................................................................................... 150 6.1.19 Replace...................................................................................................................................... 151 6.1.20 Search-Replace (Search_Repl).................................................................................................. 151

6.2 Text Frame ......................................................................................................................... 151 6.2.1 Orthogonal (Box_Txt) ................................................................................................................ 151 6.2.2 Circular (Circle_Txt) .................................................................................................................. 151 6.2.3 Elliptical (Elipse_Txt)................................................................................................................. 151 6.2.4 Polygonal (Polygon_Txt)............................................................................................................ 151

6.3 Comments ........................................................................................................................... 151 6.3.1 Arrow (Lead_A).......................................................................................................................... 151 6.3.2 Hard Arrow (Lead_W)................................................................................................................ 152 6.3.3 Dot (Lead_D).............................................................................................................................. 152 6.3.4 Lasso (Lead_L) ........................................................................................................................... 152 6.3.5 Large Lasso (Lead_LW) ............................................................................................................. 152

6.4 Lines .................................................................................................................................... 152 6.4.1 Continuous .................................................................................................................................. 152 6.4.2 Dotted (Hidden) .......................................................................................................................... 152 6.4.3 Dashed ........................................................................................................................................ 153 6.4.4 Dash-Dotted (Dashdot) ............................................................................................................... 153

6.4.5 Dash-Double-Dotted (Divide)..................................................................................................... 153 6.4.6 Dash-Triple-Dotted (3Dot) ......................................................................................................... 153 6.4.7 Dash-Spaced (Center) ................................................................................................................. 153 6.4.8 Double......................................................................................................................................... 153 6.4.9 Change Width ............................................................................................................................. 153 6.4.10 Change Length .......................................................................................................................... 153 6.4.11 MultipleTrim/Extend ................................................................................................................ 153 6.4.12 Clear.......................................................................................................................................... 154

6.5 Layers.................................................................................................................................. 154 6.5.1 Set Layer (Layset)....................................................................................................................... 154 6.5.2 Freeze (Layr_Frz) ....................................................................................................................... 154 6.5.3 Off (Layr_Off) ............................................................................................................................ 154 6.5.4 Lock (Layr_Lok)......................................................................................................................... 155 6.5.5 Unlock (Layr_Unl)...................................................................................................................... 155 6.5.6 Layer Info (Layr_see) ................................................................................................................. 155 6.5.7 Move to Current (MovCurNt)..................................................................................................... 155 6.5.8 Change (ChgLayr) ...................................................................................................................... 155 6.5.9 Delete (DelLayer) ....................................................................................................................... 155 6.5.10 Current Only (OnlyCurn).......................................................................................................... 155 6.5.11 Change Color ............................................................................................................................ 155

6.6 Blocks .................................................................................................................................. 155 6.6.1 Replace........................................................................................................................................ 156 6.6.2 Χplode......................................................................................................................................... 156 6.6.3 Scale Up-Scale Down (Cscale) ................................................................................................... 156 6.6.4 Scale XYZ (Bscale) .................................................................................................................... 156 6.6.5 Count........................................................................................................................................... 156 6.6.6 On Screen Appearance (Show) ................................................................................................... 156

6.7 Hatch................................................................................................................................... 157 6.7.1 Features....................................................................................................................................... 157 6.7.2 Hatch Polyline............................................................................................................................. 157 6.7.3 Point Hatch ................................................................................................................................. 157

6.8 Symbols Grid...................................................................................................................... 158 6.8.1 Parallelogram Grid...................................................................................................................... 158 6.8.2 Among two Symbols................................................................................................................... 159 6.8.3 Among Symbol and Point ........................................................................................................... 159

6.9 Optimise Size ...................................................................................................................... 159

6.10 Current Height................................................................................................................. 159

6.11 Restore Colors of Network.............................................................................................. 159

6.12 Delete Duplicate Pipes ..................................................................................................... 159

7. Examples ....................................................................................................................... 161 7.1 Example 1 ........................................................................................................................... 161

7.2 Example 2 ........................................................................................................................... 169

7.3 Example 3 ........................................................................................................................... 171

7.4 Example 4 ........................................................................................................................... 172

PART II

The Calculations Component

1. Introduction .................................................................................................................. 177 1.1 Overview............................................................................................................................. 177

1.2 General Principles of the Package.................................................................................... 179 1.2.1 Files............................................................................................................................................. 180 1.2.2 Options........................................................................................................................................ 190 1.2.3 View............................................................................................................................................ 191 1.2.4 Windows ..................................................................................................................................... 191

1.2.4.1a Calculation Sheet: General Philosophy ............................................................................. 193 1.2.4.1b Calculation Sheet: Editing Functions ................................................................................ 196 1.2.4.2 Bill of Materials -Costing.................................................................................................... 198 1.2.4.3 Technical Description ......................................................................................................... 200 1.2.4.4 Assumptions (of the project) ............................................................................................... 201 1.2.4.5 Cover Page (of the project issue) ........................................................................................ 202 1.2.4.6 Text Editing-Word Processor.............................................................................................. 203 1.2.4.7 Vertical Diagram................................................................................................................. 212 1.2.4.8 Network Drawing................................................................................................................ 214 1.2.4.9 Other result windows .......................................................................................................... 215

1.2.5 Libraries ...................................................................................................................................... 215 1.2.6 Help............................................................................................................................................. 217 1.2.7 ADAPT Manager ........................................................................................................................ 219

2. Heating.......................................................................................................................... 221 2.1 Thermal Losses .................................................................................................................. 223

2.1.1 Files............................................................................................................................................. 223 2.1.2 Options........................................................................................................................................ 225

2.1.2.1 Project Options.................................................................................................................... 225 2.1.2.2 Building Data ...................................................................................................................... 226 2.1.2.3 Typical Options ................................................................................................................... 227

2.1.3 View............................................................................................................................................ 229 2.1.4 Windows ..................................................................................................................................... 229

2.1.4.1 Thermal Losses Calculation Sheet ...................................................................................... 229 2.1.4.2 Circuits-Radiators-Properties .............................................................................................. 234 2.1.4.3 Overall Data of Losses ........................................................................................................ 234 2.1.4.4 Properties Thermal Losses .................................................................................................. 235 2.1.4.5 Assumptions........................................................................................................................ 235 2.1.4.6 Cover (of the project issue) ................................................................................................. 235 2.1.4.7 Energy Analysis .................................................................................................................. 236

2.1.5 Libraries ...................................................................................................................................... 236 2.1.5.1 Openings ............................................................................................................................. 236 2.1.5.2 External Walls ..................................................................................................................... 236 2.1.5.3 Inner Walls .......................................................................................................................... 237 2.1.5.4 Floors .................................................................................................................................. 237 2.1.5.5 Ceilings ............................................................................................................................... 238 2.1.5.6 Outside Winder Temperatures............................................................................................. 238 2.1.5.7 Recommended Winter Indoor Temperatures ...................................................................... 239

2.1.6 Help............................................................................................................................................. 239

2.2 Twin Pipes System ............................................................................................................. 241 2.2.1 Files............................................................................................................................................. 241 2.2.2 Options........................................................................................................................................ 242

2.2.2.1 Project Options.................................................................................................................... 242 2.2.2.2 Network Options ................................................................................................................. 242

2.2.3 View............................................................................................................................................ 244 2.2.4 Windows ..................................................................................................................................... 244

2.2.4.1 Calculation Sheet ................................................................................................................ 244 2.2.4.2 Boiler................................................................................................................................... 248 2.2.4.3 Burner – Fuel Tank ............................................................................................................. 248 2.2.4.4 Circulator ............................................................................................................................ 249 2.2.4.5 Expansion Tank and Chimney ............................................................................................ 253 2.2.4.6 Network Drawing................................................................................................................ 254 2.2.4.7 Vertical Diagram................................................................................................................. 254 2.2.4.8 Sections Friction Drop ........................................................................................................ 255 2.2.4.9 Bill of Materials - Costing................................................................................................... 255 2.2.4.10 Network Check.................................................................................................................. 256 2.2.4.11 Hot Water Storage Tank Calculations............................................................................... 256 2.2.4.12 Technical Description ....................................................................................................... 256 2.2.4.13 Assumptions...................................................................................................................... 257 2.2.4.14 Cover (of the project issue) ............................................................................................... 257

2.2.5 Libraries ...................................................................................................................................... 258 2.2.5.1 Pipes .................................................................................................................................... 258 2.2.5.2 Radiators ............................................................................................................................. 259 2.2.5.3 Fittings ................................................................................................................................ 259 2.2.5.4 Boilers ................................................................................................................................. 260 2.2.5.5 Burners ................................................................................................................................ 260 2.2.5.6 Circulators ........................................................................................................................... 260 2.2.5.7 Expansion Tanks ................................................................................................................. 261

2.2.6 Help............................................................................................................................................. 262

2.3 Single Pipe System ............................................................................................................. 263 2.3.1 Files............................................................................................................................................. 263 2.3.2 Options........................................................................................................................................ 264


2.3.3 View............................................................................................................................................ 267 2.3.4 Windows ..................................................................................................................................... 267

2.3.4.1 Calculation Sheet ................................................................................................................ 267 2.3.4.2 Boiler................................................................................................................................... 275 2.3.4.3 Burner – Fuel Tank ............................................................................................................. 275 2.3.4.4 Circulator ............................................................................................................................ 275 2.3.4.5 Expansion Tank-Chimney................................................................................................... 276 2.3.4.6 Vertical Diagram................................................................................................................. 276 2.3.4.7 Bill of Materials – Costing .................................................................................................. 277 2.3.4.8 Network Checks .................................................................................................................. 277 2.2.4.9 Hot Water Storage Tank Calculations................................................................................. 277 2.3.4.10 Technical Description ....................................................................................................... 278 2.3.4.11 Assumptions...................................................................................................................... 278 2.3.4.12 Cover................................................................................................................................. 278

2.3.5 Libraries ...................................................................................................................................... 278 2.3.5.1 Pipes .................................................................................................................................... 278 2.3.5.2 Radiators ............................................................................................................................. 278 2.3.5.3 Boilers ................................................................................................................................. 279 2.3.5.4 Burners ................................................................................................................................ 280 2.3.5.5 Circulators ........................................................................................................................... 280 2.3.5.6 Expansion Tanks ................................................................................................................. 280

2.3.6 Help............................................................................................................................................. 280

2.4 Infloor Heating System...................................................................................................... 281 2.4.1 Files............................................................................................................................................. 281 2.4.2 Options........................................................................................................................................ 282

2.4.2.1 Project Options.................................................................................................................... 282 2.4.2.2. Network Options ................................................................................................................ 282

2.4.3 View............................................................................................................................................ 283 2.4.4 Windows ..................................................................................................................................... 283

2.4.4.1 Calculation Sheet ................................................................................................................ 283 2.4.4.2 Boiler................................................................................................................................... 288

2.4.4.3 Burner-Fuel Tank ................................................................................................................ 288 2.4.4.4 Circulator ............................................................................................................................ 288 2.4.4.5 Expansion Tank-Chimney................................................................................................... 288 2.4.4.6 Vertical Diagram................................................................................................................. 288 2.4.4.7 Bill of Materials - Costing................................................................................................... 289 2.4.4.8 Technical Description ......................................................................................................... 289 2.4.4.9 Assumptions........................................................................................................................ 289 2.4.4.10 Cover................................................................................................................................. 289

2.4.5 Libraries ...................................................................................................................................... 289 2.4.6 Help............................................................................................................................................. 289

3.1 Cooling Loads..................................................................................................................... 293 3.1.1 Files............................................................................................................................................. 293 3.1.2 Options........................................................................................................................................ 295

3.1.2.1 Project Options.................................................................................................................... 295 3.1.2.2 Months ................................................................................................................................ 295 3.1.2.3 Indoor conditions ................................................................................................................ 295 3.1.2.4 Climatologic Data ............................................................................................................... 296 3.1.2.5 Building Data ...................................................................................................................... 296 3.1.2.6 Typical Options ................................................................................................................... 298 3.1.2.7 Coincidence Options ........................................................................................................... 299

3.1.3 View............................................................................................................................................ 299 3.1.4 Windows ..................................................................................................................................... 299

3.1.4.1 Calculation Sheet ................................................................................................................ 299 3.1.4.2 Temperature Differences..................................................................................................... 309 3.1.4.3 Building Loads Rundown.................................................................................................... 311 3.1.4.4 Building Loads Analysis ..................................................................................................... 311 3.1.4.5 Systems Loads Analysis...................................................................................................... 311 3.1.4.6 Diagram: Total Loads Without Ventilation......................................................................... 312 3.1.4.7 Diagram: Total Loads With Ventilation.............................................................................. 312 3.1.4.8 Systems Diagram ................................................................................................................ 312 3.1.4.9 Assumptions........................................................................................................................ 313 3.1.4.10 Cover (of the project issue) ............................................................................................... 313

3.1.5 Libraries ...................................................................................................................................... 313 3.1.5.1 Openings ............................................................................................................................. 313 3.1.5.2 External Walls ..................................................................................................................... 314 3.1.5.3 Inner Walls .......................................................................................................................... 314 3.1.5.4 Floors .................................................................................................................................. 314 3.1.5.5 Ceilings (or Roofs) .............................................................................................................. 315 3.1.5.6 Summer Climatologic Data ................................................................................................. 315 3.1.5.7 Recommended Indoor Temperatures .................................................................................. 316 3.1.5.8 Recommended Indoor Humidity Values ............................................................................. 316

3.1.6 Help............................................................................................................................................. 317

3.2 Fan Coils ............................................................................................................................. 319 3.2.1 Files............................................................................................................................................. 319 3.2.2 Options........................................................................................................................................ 320


3.2.3 View............................................................................................................................................ 321 3.2.4 Windows ..................................................................................................................................... 321

3.2.4.1 Calculation Sheet ................................................................................................................ 322 3.2.4.2 Cooling System ................................................................................................................... 325 3.2.4.3 Pump ................................................................................................................................... 326 3.2.4.4 Expansion Tank................................................................................................................... 326 3.2.4.5 Network Drawing................................................................................................................ 327 3.2.4.6 Vertical Diagram................................................................................................................. 327 3.2.4.7 Section friction Drop........................................................................................................... 327 3.2.4.8 Bill of Materials - Costing................................................................................................... 328 3.2.4.9 Technical Description ......................................................................................................... 328 3.2.4.10 Assumptions...................................................................................................................... 328

3.2.4.11 Cover (of the project issue) ............................................................................................... 329 3.2.5 Libraries ...................................................................................................................................... 329

3.2.5.1 Fittings ................................................................................................................................ 329 3.2.5.2 Pipes .................................................................................................................................... 329 3.2.5.3 Fan Coil Units ..................................................................................................................... 330 3.2.5.4 Cooling Engines .................................................................................................................. 330 3.2.5.5 Pumps.................................................................................................................................. 331 3.2.5.6 Expansion Tanks ................................................................................................................. 331

3.2.6 Help............................................................................................................................................. 332

3.3 Air-Ducts............................................................................................................................. 333 3.3.1 Files............................................................................................................................................. 333 3.3.2 Options........................................................................................................................................ 334


3.3.3 View............................................................................................................................................ 336 3.3.4 Windows ..................................................................................................................................... 336

3.3.4.1 Calculation Sheet ................................................................................................................ 337 3.3.4.2 Fans ..................................................................................................................................... 341 3.3.4.3 Network Drawing................................................................................................................ 342 3.3.4.4 Vertical Diagram................................................................................................................. 342 3.3.4.5 Section Friction Drop .......................................................................................................... 342 3.3.4.6 Bill of Materials - Costing................................................................................................... 342 3.3.4.7 Technical Description ......................................................................................................... 342 3.3.4.8 Assumptions........................................................................................................................ 343 3.3.4.9 Cover (of the project issue) ................................................................................................. 343

3.3.5 Libraries ...................................................................................................................................... 343 3.3.5.1 Fittings ................................................................................................................................ 343 3.3.5.2 Duct Materials ..................................................................................................................... 344 3.3.5.3 Grilles.................................................................................................................................. 344 3.3.5.4 Fans ..................................................................................................................................... 346

3.3.6 Help............................................................................................................................................. 346

3.4 Psychrometry ..................................................................................................................... 347 3.4.1 Files............................................................................................................................................. 347 3.4.2 Options........................................................................................................................................ 348

3.4.2.1 Project Options.................................................................................................................... 348 3.4.2.2 Calculation Parameters........................................................................................................ 348 3.4.2.3 Indoor Conditions................................................................................................................ 349 3.4.2.4 Outdoor Conditions ............................................................................................................. 349 3.4.2.5 Spaces.................................................................................................................................. 350

3.4.3 View............................................................................................................................................ 351 3.4.4 Windows ..................................................................................................................................... 351

3.4.4.1 Psychrometric Point Calculations ....................................................................................... 351 3.4.4.2 Systems ............................................................................................................................... 351

3.4.4.2.1 Cooling ........................................................................................................................ 352 3.4.4.2.2 Heating ........................................................................................................................ 355

3.4.4.3 Space Conditions - Cooling................................................................................................. 357 3.4.4.4 Space Conditions - Heating................................................................................................. 358 3.4.4.5 Systems Conditions - Cooling............................................................................................. 358 3.4.4.6 Systems Conditions - Heating ............................................................................................. 358 3.4.4.7 Air-conditioning units ......................................................................................................... 358 3.4.4.8 Assumptions........................................................................................................................ 358 3.4.4.9 Cover................................................................................................................................... 358

3.4.5 Help............................................................................................................................................. 359

FINE – HVAC - 1 -

InstallationFor installing FINE HVAC, followthe instructions given below:Insert the CD of FINE HVAC intothe CD-ROM drive (e.g. D:, E:),then the 4M Installation programappears on screen. Then:1. Select “FINE-HVAC” (by

pressing the button) and then alicense agreement is displayed.

2. By accepting the licenseagreement, the program asks forthe drive where the package isgoing to be installed.

3. In the “Application Selection”window, which appearsafterwards, select all themodules, as well as the libraries tobe installed (if you reinstall anymodule it is not necessary toreinstall the libraries). Then pressOK and data are transferred to thehard disk drive selected in theprevious step.

4. After the installation is completed,

all the group of FINE HVAC icons iscreated. The user can run FINE by calling itfrom the program list, or by clicking theprogram icon (see part I, chapter 1). He canalso call any application module if he wantsto use it separately (see part II, chapter 1).

Attention! Be sure that the hasp is plugged to the parallel port of your PC anytimeyou run the program. To make sure that the program can actually “see” the hasp, run thehdd32.exe program from the 4Μ directory. After the HASP program is loaded a relevantmessage will appear. Right after, Windows should be restarted.

FINE – HVAC - 3 -

PART I

The CAD Component

- 4 - FINE - HVAC

FINE – HVAC - 5 -

1. Introduction

1.1 Overview FINE HVAC is a powerful Workstation of Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning Projects, which automatically performs all the HVAC calculations directly from the drawings, producing all the Project results (Calculation issue, technical descriptions, full-scale drawings, Bills of materials etc). FINE HVAC automates the HVAC designing processes, suggesting specific installation designing solutions to the user. This first Part (Part I) of the user's guide describe the operation of the CAD component of FINE HVAC. As mentioned in the preface, the designing environment can be either the autocad platform (AutoFINE) or the autonomous CAD engine (FINE). The latter is based on IntelliCAD technology, including IntelliCAD (and of cource its licence since 4M is a member of IntelliCAD Consortium ITC- see www.intellicad.org). Both designing programs have similar capabilities, same operation features and common file format (dwg), aspects which are explained in this first part of the user's guide. For this reason the CAD component of the package is often called FINE. Regarding technical aspects, it should be mentioned that the package follows a completely object oriented philosophy (OOP). This practically means that the package considers the building and the HVAC installations as logical entities which consist of individual objects clearly related to each other and with accurately defined characteristics. These intelligently structured “information” of the building and the HVAC installations combined with the advanced technology (C++) that was utilised for its development, provide the package with an experienced behaviour, resulting in an Intelligent Workstation, that is an invaluable helping hand to every Designer. Concerning the package structure, FINE includes 2 main modules, which co-operate closely and give the Designer the impression he virtually works on the building: It is about a) the AutoBUILD (or AutoBLD) that is used to load-identify the building and b) the AutoNET that is used to design and identify the network installations. Those two subsystems are supported by a third one, with the name PLUS, which includes many useful designing facilities. More specifically:

- 6 - FINE - HVAC

AutoBUILD, which is actually the "Architectural" subsystem of the package, covers the designing input and "identification" of the project building in an extremely intelligent and effective way. In particular, the designer who is using the AutoBUILD commands, can easily "input" the building, either by designing the building with the assistance of specialised commands such as "Wall", "Opening" etc, or by "loading" an already existing building from a file and by giving "entity" to its structural elements. The procedures of giving entity do not stop at the structural elements, also advance to more complex concepts, such as "Space". Because of this logical configuration of the building "information", the geometrical and the quality data are inserted automatically into the calculation sheets related to the building surrounding, thermal losses and cooling loads. AutoΝΕΤ, the second main subsystem of the package, covers on the other hand the designing input and "identification" of the E/M installation of the building. By utilising the AutoΝΕΤ specialised commands, the user can easily design the installation networks, which are thereupon "identified" and they update the calculation sheets of the corresponding applications (heating pipelines, plumbing, electrical wiring etc). The AutoNET automatically carries out all the necessary checks, indicating the possible designing errors to the user. Finally, the PLUS subsystem covers a series of designing commands which mainly aim to the further process of the project drawings for the final presentation. Each of the subsystems presented above constitutes a separate chapter of this guide, the structure of which will be described in the next section.

1.2 Structure of the Part I As mentioned above, this Part I of the user's guide deals with the CAD component of FINE HVAC. For the best understanding of this package capabilities, it is carefully divided into 7 chapters, which are divided into sections: The present chapter 1 describes the general philosophy of the CAD component of FINE HVAC and its operation principles. Chapter 2 refers to certain basic designing principles which are necessary especially to those who are not familiar with designing packages. This chapter can be run over, or even skipped, by those who are familiar with Autocad or IntelliCAD. Chapter 3 describes in detail the operation of AutoBUILD, the Architectural subsystem of the package, as well as the way of utilising its commands throughout their extend. Chapter 4 indicates the basic operation principles of AutoNET, accompanied by corresponding explaining examples, where needed. Chapter 5 presents a typical example of pipeline installation, which is used as reference for the operation description of each HVAC installation. Chapter 6 describes the designing facilities of the PLUS subsystem which are especially useful for further processing of the project drawings, as mentioned above. Finally, chapter 7 presents specific project examples produced by the package so that the user understands in practise everything mentioned in the previous chapters.

FINE – HVAC - 7 -

1.3 Main menu As soon as the program is loaded, the main menu screen appears for the first time:

Among the commands of the designing environment, we notice the following main options of the package: 1. Project files management options (New Project, Open Project and Project

Information) which are located into the options group FILE. 2. Option Group with the name AutoBLD, which includes all the commands

required for the Architectural designing and the calculations which are related to the building surrounding (heating insulation, thermal losses, cooling loads etc).

3. Option group with the name AutoΝΕΤ, which includes all the commands required for the designing and calculation of the application (Single-pipe system, Twin-pipe System, Electrical Wiring etc).

4. Auxiliary option group with the name PLUS, which contains a series of designing facilities for the user.

To start creating a project with FINE, a new project should be defined by utilising the corresponding option in the project FILE management menu mentioned above. In case that "NEW PROJECT" is selected, a window appears on the screen where the name of the Project should be typed. In order to "load" an existing project, that is a project which has been created with the program and you want to further edit it or just view it, then you should select "Select Project", and a list with the existing projects in the hard drive will be displayed on the screen.

- 8 - FINE - HVAC

At first, the list displays all the projects that exist in the FINE directory, but with the use of the mouse or the keyboard and acting correspondingly, you can transfer to any other directory, viewing at the same time the existing projects. It is noted that the projects are included into directories with the extension BLD. If an existing project is selected, it is loaded and displayed on the screen. No matter if a new project is created or a saved one loaded, you can now begin working with the use of the subsystem commands described above. Let us remind you again, that a detailed description of these commands is available in the sections of chapters 3-6, which follow. Before this detailed description, a short reference of the basic designing principles featured in the designing environment of the package is recommended, in chapter 2 that follows next. If you are familiar with the use of Autocad or IntelliCAD, you may page through or even skip chapter 2, while if you are not you should read it carefully.

Note: Project is the directory where the project drawings and the calculation files are saved (e.g. heat-insulation etc). The program performs an automatic management of the drawing files (based on the main DWG file that has the same name with the project directory) as well as the calculation files. If the user wishes, he may decline from the standard used above and use his own names for each project drawing (e.g. water supply). This can be accomplished with the “Save As” command and the file will be saved in the project directory (there is no restriction about the number or the type of the characters used for the names of the files). Of course the files defined by the user may be loaded and edited by using the “Open” command. Let us remind you that the “Select Project” command brings up the primary project file which, as mentioned above, has the same name with the project directory.

FINE – HVAC - 9 -

2. Drawing Principles

2.1 General A great advantage of the package is that the structure and the features of the drawing environment are the same, whether you use FINE. In particular, the available working space is as follows:

cursor

Screen Menu

Pull-down Menus

Toolbars

GRAPHICSAREA

Command Line

Status Bar

Status Bar

As shown in the above figure, the screen is divided into the following "areas":

• Command line: The command line is the area where commands are entered and the command messages appear.

• Graphics area: The largest area of the screen, where drawings are created and edited.

- 10 - FINE - HVAC

• Graphics cursor: The cursor is used for drawing, selecting objects and running commands from the menus or the dialog boxes. Depending on the current command or action, the cursor may appear as a graphics cursor (crosshairs), a selection box, a graphics cursor with a selection box etc.

• Pull-down menus: These menus appear by placing the cursor on the Status line.

• Screen menu: It concerns all the pull-down menus and submenus which are displayed on the right side of the screen (the screen menu can be activated and deactivated using the AutoCAD option "Preference").

• Status Line: It is the line on the top of the screen where the current layer (slide), the drawing status and the current cursor coordinates are displayed.

• Cursor menu: This menu appears when the cursor is in the graphics area and you press either the middle mouse button or <SHIFT> and the right mouse button simultaneously.

Please note that each mouse button performs a specific function. The functions of the mouse buttons are the following: Left button: Selection of a command, point or object. Right button: Enter Middle button: "Osnap" command (see section 2.2).

Note: In case your mouse has only two buttons (or it has three buttons, but the mouse driver has not been properly installed for the middle button to function), the first two functions are executed as described while the third one can be substituted by the combination of the "Shift" key and the right mouse button (right click while <Shift> is pressed down).

2.2 Drawing aids This section describes the basic drawing aids available to the user. These are the commands Osnap (object snap), Ortho (vertical/horizontal drawing), Grid and Snap (movement increment)

2.2.1 Osnap The "Osnap" command is a very useful drawing tool: It forces the cursor to select a snap point of an object, which is within the Pick box outline. The snap points are certain characteristic geometric points of one or more objects, like the midpoint or one of the endpoints of a segment or arc, the center point of a circle or arc etc. If you have specified a snap point and move the cursor close to it, the program will identify it with a frame. The "Osnap" command can be activated either by holding down the "SHIFT" key and right clicking the mouse or by clicking the middle mouse button (if there is one available and active) or through the additional toolbar (version for Windows). The following menu will appear:

FINE – HVAC - 11 -

From: Selects an existing point of the drawing in order to specify a new one by entering the coordinates. Endpoint: Selects one of the two endpoints of an object (the one closer to the selection point). Midpoint: Selects the middle point of a segment or an arc. Intersection: Selects the intersection point of two objects. Apparent intersect: Selects the apparent intersection point of two objects (when projected). Center: Selects the center point of arcs or circles. Quadrant: Selects one of the quadrants of a circle or arc. Perpendicular: Selects the point of an object that forms a perpendicular alignment with the last point created. Tangent: Selects the tangent point on a circle or arc. Node: Selects a point. Insert: Selects the insertion point of a block or text. Nearest: Selects the object point closest to the graphics cursor. Quick: Selects the most recently drawn point (not the closest one). It has to be accompanied by one or more snap points in the fixed selection. None: Deselects the object snap points, which have been defined for the fixed selection.

Notes: 1. These snap points are not selected independently but are specified when another program command requires so. Any desired snap point may be permanently activated, if selected through the "OSNAP" command in the "SET" menu. 2. Apart from the above mentioned snap points, FINE provides also the "Connection Point" snap point, which is used for snapping the E/M receptors (e.g. radiators, hydraulic receptors etc.) joining points (e.g. switches, batteries etc).

2.2.2 Horizontal/Vertical drawing (Ortho) The "Ortho" feature restricts the cursor to horizontal or vertical movement. The status bar shows whether the "Ortho" command is activated by displaying "ORTHO" in black characters (in AutoCAD 12, the indication "O" also appears on the top left side of the screen).The command is activated or deactivated by clicking the corresponding button-icon or by pressing F8.

- 12 - FINE - HVAC

2.2.3 Grid The screen grid is a pattern of vertical and horizontal dots, which are placed at the axes intersection points of an imaginary grid. The grid distance may be different on the X and on the Y axis. The grid can be activated or deactivated by clicking the corresponding button-icon or by pressing F7 (If the grid is active, it appears on the Status Bar). Grid is a visual drawing aid that appears only on the screen and is not printed. If you want the grid to be printed, you should draw it yourself.

2.2.4 Snap The graphics cursor position coordinates appear in the middle of the upper part of the graphics area. If "Snap" is selected, the graphics cursor movement may not be continuous but follow a specific increment (minimum movement distance). When "Snap" is on, the cursor seems to adhere, or "snap", to an invisible grid. "Snap" can be turned on and off either by clicking the corresponding button/icon or by pressing F9. (If it is activated, it appears on the Status Bar). If the command is active, the "S" indication also appears in the top left corner of the screen. The default Snap setting is 0.05 m for both axes (X and Y).

2.3 Drawing Coordinates When you need to determine a point, you can either use the mouse (by seeing the coordinates in the status bar or using the snap utilities), or enter the coordinates directly in the command line. Moreover, you can use either Cartesian or polar coordinates, either absolute or relative values, in each method (relative coordinates are usually more convenient). Relative coordinates: Enter the @ symbol (which indicates relative coordinates) and then the x,y,z coordinates (Cartesian system) or the r<θ<φ coordinates (polar system) in the command line. The system used (Cartesian or polar) is defined by the “,” or “<” symbol. If you do not insert a value for z or φ, it will be automatically taken as zero. For example, if you are prompted to locate the second (right) endpoint of a 2m horizontal line, you should enter: @2,0 if you use the Cartesian coordinates (which means that the distance of the second point from the first is 2 m on the x axis and 0 m on the y axis), or @2<0 if you use the polar coordinates [which means that the second point is at a distance of 2m (r=2) and an angle of 0 degrees (θ=0) from the first]. Absolute coordinates: These are specified like the relative coordinates, but without using the @ symbol. The absolute coordinates are specified in relation with the 0,0 point of the drawing. The measurement system can be activated, deactivated or changed with the F6 key.


2.4 Drawing Basic Entities 2.4.1 Line "Line" option is used for drawing segments. When you select "Line" from the menu or type "Line" in the command line, you will be prompted to specify a start point (by left clicking or by entering the point coordinates – relative or absolute – in the command line) and an endpoint (determined in the same way).

2.4.2 Arc The "Arc" command is used for drawing arcs. An arc can be drawn in different ways: The default method is to specify three points of the arc ("3-Points"). Alternatively, you can specify the start point and endpoint of the arc as well as the center of the circle where it belongs (St, C, End). The user will not find it difficult to understand and become familiar with the various methods of drawing an arc.

2.4.3 Polyline This command allows you to draw polylines, which are connected sequences of line or arc segments created as single objects. The command is executed by either using the menu or typing "pline" in the command line. You will be prompted to specify a start point and an endpoint (by right clicking the mouse or by entering the point coordinates – relative or absolute – in the command line). Then, the command options will appear (Arc, Close, Length etc). Select A to switch to Arc mode, L to return to Line mode and C to close the polyline.

2.5 Useful Commands This section includes brief descriptions of the basic program commands, which will be very useful to the user. These are the commands "Zoom", "Pan", "Select", "Move", "Copy" and "Erase".

2.5.1 Zoom "Zoom" increases or decreases the apparent size of the image displayed, allowing the user to have a "closer" or "further" view of the drawing. There are different zooming methods, the most functional of which is the real-time zooming ("lens / ±" button). You can use the mouse to zoom in real time – that is to zoom in and out by moving the cursor. Within the zoom command, click and hold down the left mouse button and move the cursor up and to the right to zoom in or down and to the left to zoom out. There are a number of helpful zoom options which become available by selecting "Zoom" in the "View" menu or by typing "Zoom" (or just "Z") in the command line. These options are:

- 14 - FINE - HVAC

All/Center/Dynamic/Extents/Left/Previous/Vmax/window/<Scale(X/XP)> Each of these options zooms in a different way. The most common is the "Window" sub-option, which magnifies a part the drawing, included in a (user defined) imaginary rectangle. In order to define the rectangular zoom window, left click to specify the two opposite apexes of the rectangle. The other "Zoom" options function as follows: Αll: Displays the whole view, based on the drawing limits. If the drawn objects extend beyond the drawing limits, it displays the drawn objects. Extents: Displays a whole drawing aspect, that is the drawing fits exactly in the screen. Unlike the "All" option, when "Extents" is selected the drawing limits are ignored. Previous: Restores the previous drawing view. If "Zoom –>Previous" is selected repeatedly, up to 10 prior views can be restored. Center: Moves a specific point of the drawing (Center Point) to the center of the graphics area, while the screen height is determined by the user. Insert only a number to determine the height in Drawing Units. However, if you insert a number accompanied by the Latin character "x", the screen view is considered as the current view magnified by the inserted number. Of course, if the number followed by "x" is smaller than 1, you get a zoom-out effect. Left: This has the same effect as the "Center" option, but here you define the bottom left end of the new view (and not the center). Vmax: Provides an overall view of the drawing and the surrounding area, in order to make the selection of a window easier. The grid extends only within the drawing limits. Dynamic: This option shows three frames. The first frame (with the continuous bold line) marks the drawing limits, the second one (with the green dotted line) shows the current view (before "Dynamic zoom") and the third one (with the "X" in the middle) follows the mouse movements and defines the new view which will appear when you press <Εnter>. However: If, instead of pressing <Enter>, you left click in a new area of the drawing, you can also change (besides the position) the size of the window-frame that will appear on the screen. The appearance of the new window-frame will change, the "X" will disappear and an arrow will appear on the right side. Move the mouse to the right or left to change the size of the window.


The left side of the window is the left limit. When you get the desired size, press <Enter> and the new view (position and size) will appear on the screen. Furthermore, if you left click again, instead of pressing <Enter>, you can continue modifying the position of the frame etc, until you get the desired size and position. Scale: Insert a dimensionless number and the view will be scaled precisely. This command zooms in if the number you enter is bigger than one and out if the number is smaller than 1. The change of the drawing size is related to the area defined by the drawing limits. Scale (x): In this option, the number should be followed by the Latin character "x". It has the same effect as "Scale" but changes the size in relation to the area defined by the current view and not by the drawing limits. Besides the above mentioned keyboard options, the "Zoom" command has also the following menu options: Limits: Shows the drawing limits. In executes automatically the "Scale (x)" command with a 2x factor ("lens/+" icon) while Out executes the same command with a 0.5x factor ("lens/–" icon).

2.5.2 Pan "Pan" ("hand" icon) moves the position of the visible part of the drawing, so that you can view a new (previously not visible) part. The visible part of the screen moves towards the desired area and to the desired extent.

2.5.3 Select This command selects one or more objects (or the whole drawing), in order to execute a specific task (erase, copy etc.). Select is also used by other AutoCAD commands (for example, if you use the "Erase" command, "Select" will be automatically activated in order to select the area that will be erased). Moreover, "marking" an object with the left mouse button activates the "Select" command. The "Select" command function is quite simple: select the desired object(s) (by left clicking and watching the object outline becoming a dotted line) and finally right click to verify your selections and terminate the procedure. Alternatively, instead of the selective marking described above, you can define a window (as in the "Zoom" command). In this case, everything included in the window will be selected (if the window is created moving the cursor from the bottom left to the top right side of the screen) or everything "crossed" by the window will be selected (if the window is created moving the cursor from the top right to the bottom left side of the screen).

- 16 - FINE - HVAC

If you activate "Select" and type "All" in the command line when prompted, the entire drawing will be selected. Finally, before right clicking, you can deselect one or more of the selected objects by running the "Remove" command.

2.5.4 Move This command allows moving of objects from one location to another. When the "Move" command is activated, the "Select" command is also activated so that the object(s) the user wants to move (in the way described in the previous paragraph) can be selected. After you have selected the desired object(s), you are prompted to specify the base point (using the snap options), which is a fixed point of the drawing. When you are prompted to specify the position where the base point will be moved, use either the mouse or the snap options. After you have completed this procedure, the selected object(s) will move to the new position. Please note that the base and the new location points can be also specified with the use of coordinates (absolute or relative, see related paragraph).

2.5.5. Copy The "Copy" option allows the copying of objects from one location to another. The "Copy" procedure is similar to the "Move" procedure and the only difference is that the copied object remains at its original location in the drawing.

Note: The Windows "Copy" and "Paste" options can also be used (as in text editing) to copy and paste parts of the drawing.

2.5.6 Erase Choose this option to delete objects. The procedure is simple: Select the objects you wish to erase (as described above), type "E" in the command line and press <Enter>. Alternatively, you may first type "E" in the command line, then select the object(s) by left clicking and finally right click to erase the object(s).

Attention! The "Erase" command should not be used for objects when there is a specific "delete" command within the application, (e.g. Delete wall).

2.5.7 DDInsert (Insert Drawing) This command allows the user to insert another drawing (DWG file) or block in the drawing. When this command is selected, a window appears in which you should select block or file and then select the corresponding block or file from disk. Then you are prompted to specify the insertion point, the scale factor etc, so that the selected drawing is properly inserted.

2.5.8 Wblock The "Wblock" command allows us to save part of a drawing or the entire drawing in a file, as a block. When this command is selected, you are prompted to enter the file name and then you should select the drawing or the part of the drawing you wish to save. The use of this command is similar to the "Screen Drawing" command, which will be described in a following section. In order to insert a block in a drawing, you should use the "ddinsert" command described above.


2.5.9 Explode The "Explode" command converts a block in a number of lines so that you can edit it in that form. If it is selected, the program will prompt you to select the block ("Select object") you wish to explode.

2.6 Grips This paragraph describes Grips, a very useful way to edit objects. Grips are some characteristic points of an object which appear after it is selected (by placing the graphics cursor with the selection box on the object and left clicking). Then object is displayed with grips (small blue squares), which mark control locations and are powerful editing tools. When you click a grip, it turns red and the following prompt appears in the command line: **STRETCH** <stretch to point> /Base point /copy/ undo/ exit. If you press <Enter> (or right click), the first characters of the corresponding word are entered, e.g. “sc and enter” for the "Scale" command). When a command is executed, grips disappear and the objects are deselected. If the command is an editing command (correction or copy), which can be preselected, the objects take part in the execution of the command automatically. In this case, the command overrides the "Select objects" prompt and proceeds. To deselect grips and objects you should press <Esc> twice. Once to deselect the objects and twice to deactivate the grips. In each object the positions of the grips are different. Namely, for a point the grip is the point itself, for a segment the grips are the midpoint and the two endpoints, for an arc the midpoint and the two endpoints, for a circle the center and the quadrants, for a polyline the endpoints of the line and arc segments and the midpoints points of the arc segments, for a spline the spline points, for a block the insertion point, for text the insertion point etc. Following is the description of the Stretch, Move, Rotate, Scale and Mirror commands.

2.6.1 Stretch When selecting a grip you initiate the procedure of executing this command. More specifically, the following message appears: **STRETCH** <Stretch to point>/Base point/Copy/Undo/Exit: These options are listed below: Strech to point: Specifies the new position of the grip (with the use of the mouse or keyboard). The object will be stretched (or shortened) to this point.

- 18 - FINE - HVAC

b and enter: Corresponds to the Base point option. The previous option (stretch to point) chooses automatically the selected grip as base point. This option allows us to specify a different base point for stretching or shortening the object. c and enter: Equivalent of the "Copy" command. This option allows multiple executions of the command, together with creation of new objects (copy), stretched or shortened, depending on the specified points. u and enter: Equivalent of the "Undo" command, which cancels the more recent action. x and enter: Equivalent of the "Exit" option. Completes the function and deselects the selected grip. However, the object remains selected and the grips visible. Enter: You are transferred to the next command ("Move").

2.6.2 Move This command, similar to the “Move” command found above, allows for easy movement of the selected objects. The displayed message is as follows: **Move** <Move to point>/Base point/Copy/Undo/Exit: The options of this feature are as follows: Move to: Locate the new handle position which is also the new position where the selected objects will be moved. b and enter: It corresponds to the “Base point” option. It allows you to define another base point for object movement. c and enter: It corresponds to the “Copy” option. This option allows multiple function execution, creating simultaneously new objects (copy) in positions related to the points defined. u and enter: It corresponds to the “Undo” option. x and enter: It corresponds to the “Exit” option. It completes the operation and deselects the selected handle. However, the object remains selected and the handles are still visible. Enter: You are transferred to the next command, i.e. “Rotate”.

2.6.3 Rotate It allows rotation of the selected objects. The displayed message is as follows: **Rotate** <Rotation angle>/Base point/Copy/Undo/Reference/Exit: The options of this feature are as follows: Rotation angle: Define with a second point, related to the handle, the rotation angle of the selected objects. b and enter: It corresponds to the “Base point” option. It allows you to define another base point for the rotation of the object.


c and enter: It corresponds to the “Copy” option. This option allows multiple function execution, creating simultaneously new objects (copy) in locations related to the points defined. u and enter: It corresponds to the “Undo” option. r and enter: It corresponds to the “Reference” option. It allows you to define rotation as a relationship between two other angles. The first one is the new reference angle and the second one is the final position angle of the objects. x and enter: It corresponds to the “Exit” option. It completes the operation and deselects the selected handle. However, the object remains selected and the handles are still visible. Enter: You are transferred to the next command, i.e. “Scale”.

2.6.4 Scale (Up/Down) This option allows us to scale up or down selected objects: **Scale** <Scale factor>/Base point/Copy/Undo/Reference/Exit: The options of this feature are listed below: Scale factor: Define the scale (magnification or scale-down) of the selected objects with a second point, related to the grip. b and enter: It corresponds to the “Base point” option. It allows you to define another base point for the object magnification or scale-down. c and enter: It corresponds to the “Copy” option. This option allows multiple function execution, creating simultaneously new objects (copy) in positions and with sizes related to the points defined. u and enter: It corresponds to the “Undo” option. r and enter: It corresponds to the “Reference” option. It allows definition of scaling up or down as a relationship between two other lengths. x and enter: It corresponds to the “Exit” option. It completes the operation and deselects the selected handle. However, the object remains selected and the handles are still visible. Enter: You are transferred to the next command, i.e. “Mirror”.

2.6.5 Mirror This option allows you to mirror objects, i.e. to draw selected objects, symmetrically to a given axis: **MIRROR** <Second point>/Base point/Copy/Undo/exit: The options of this feature are as follows: Second point: Define a second point which together with the handle position determines the axis of symmetry for drawing the symmetricals of the selected objects. With this option, original objects are erased. If you want original objects unerased, you should use the option "Copy".

- 20 - FINE - HVAC

b and enter: It corresponds to the “Base point” option. It allows you to define another base point, other than handle, which will be the first definition point of the objects axis of symmetry. c and enter: It corresponds to the “Copy” option. This option allows multiple function execution, creating simultaneously new objects (copy) in positions and with sizes related to the points defined. u and enter: It corresponds to the “Undo” option. x and enter: It corresponds to the “Exit” option. It completes the operation and deselects the selected handle. However, the object remains selected and the handles are still visible. Enter: You are transferred to the next command, i.e. “Stretch”.

2.7 Print This section may be read after the user has created a drawing and wants to print it. Any drawing can be printed using a printer or plotter or to a file. Printing is performed using "PRINT" (or "PLOT") command, selected either from the "FILE" menu or typing it in the command line, provided there is a drawing already loaded. More specifically, the user can print on any printer or plotter and can also control many printing aspects, such as:

• Select the drawing area printed.

• Magnify the drawing to be printed.

• Relate the screen colors to the colors and the line width of the output device.

• Open Plot Configuration Files (PCP).

• Define data as headers or footers, such as printing date and time, your name as well as your Company name or other information that you wish to appear on the top or at the bottom of the printing paper.

• Define the origin of the printing coordinates.

• Preview print.

• Modify the printing presetting, such as paper size and printing orientation.


Previewing the printing 1. Perform one of the following:

• Select File> Print Preview.

• In the toolbar select the icon ( ).

• Type ppreview and press Enter. 2. After checking the print preview, perform one of the following:

• In order to print the drawing, select ‘’Print Settings’’ for the print dialogue window to appear.

• In order to return to the drawing select ‘’Close’’.

A. Click to zoom in. B. Click to zoom out. If the magnification is selected several times before, in order to return to the original drawing you need to minimize as many times as you maximized. C. Click for the print dialogue window to appear. D. Click to print the drawing. E. Click to exit the print preview and return to the drawing.

- 22 - FINE - HVAC

Printing a drawing The print dialogue window is organized in three parts: ‘’Scale/View’’, ‘’Color/Width Map’’ and the part ‘’Advanced’’. The selections of the print settings mentioned in each one of these parts are described in the following sections.

Note: A shaded image cannot be printed directly on a printer. In order to print a shaded image, you should first export it in a different form [either a bitmap (.bmp) file or a Postscript (.ps) file or a TIFF (.tif)) file] and then print it from another graphics program. For further information see Chapter 14, in the section: "Creating shaded images’’.

Printing a drawing 1. Perform one of the following:

• Select File > Print. • In the toolbar select the icon ( ). In this case the print dialogue window does

not appear. The drawing will be sent directly to the selected printer.

• Type print and press Enter. 2. From the print dialogue window select the desired settings. 3. Press "Print"

Note: Τhe FINE saves the print settings each time you print. In order to restore the default settings, press ‘’Reset’’ in the print dialogue window.

Defining print scale and view The whole drawing or part of it can be printed on a printer or a plotter. This depends on which settings will be selected in the field ‘’Scale/View’’ in the print dialogue window. You can choose to print what is visible on your screen or to define an area of the drawing to be printed. The drawing position on the paper can be defined by setting the origin of the print area coordinates, the position of the lowest left top of the area to be printed, in relation to the lowest left top of the paper. The origin of the coordinates is usually the point 0,0 that sets the lowest left top of the area to be printed as close as possible to the lowest left top of the paper, as this is allowed by the printer or the plotter. A different point can be set as an origin of the coordinates, by setting different coordinates. When you draw a plan, you draw usually entities in actual sizes. But when you print a drawing, you can set the print scale of the final drawing or allow the program to adjust the drawing size to the print paper. In order to print a drawing in a specific scale, define the scale as the ratio of the drawing units to the printing units. Setting the scale automatically to the drawing to be printed 1. Perform one of the following:

• Select File > Print. • Type print and press Enter. 2. In the print dialogue window, select the field ‘’Scale/View’’.


3. In order to set a scale to your drawing, so that it fits in a print page, check the ‘’Fit print area to size of paper’’ box.

Setting the print scale 1. Perform one of the following:

• Select File > Print. • Type print and press Enter. 2. In the print dialogue window, select the field ‘’Scale/View’’. 3. Make sure that the box ‘’Fit print area to size of paper’’ is not checked. 4. Under the field ‘’User Defined Scale’’, type the ratio of the printing units

(inches or millimeters) to the drawing units. 5. Select ‘’Inches’’ or ‘’Millimeters’’ to define the printing units. Defining a drawing part to be printed 1. Perform one of the following:

• Select File > Print. • Type print and press Enter. 2. In the print dialogue window, select the field ‘’Scale/View’’. 3. Below the word field ‘’Print Area’’, check one of the following:

• ‘’Current View’’ – Prints the screen view.

• ‘’Saved View’’ – Prints the selected saved views.

• ‘’Extents’’ – Prints the whole extent that entities occupy on the drawing.

• ‘’Limits’’ – Prints the area within the drawing borders that you have defined.

• ‘’Window’’ – Prints the part of the drawing included in a particular window while maintaining the ratio aspect of the area in the window and the drawing.

If you select ‘’Window’’, you should specify the window. Below the word field ‘’Windowed Print Area’’ type the x and y diagonal coordinates of the window or select the screen area. In order to print only the area within the window without taking into account if there is more space on the screen, check the box ‘’Print Only Area Within Specified Window’’. 4. Below the word field ‘’Entities To Print’’, check one of the following:

• ‘’All Entities Within Print Area’’ – Prints all the entities included within the specified print area.

• ‘’Selected Entities Within Print Area’’ – Prints only the selected entities included within the specified print area.

- 24 - FINE - HVAC

A. Click to select the drawing area you wish to print. B. Type the x and y coordinates of the two opposite apexes of a certain rectangular area you wish to print. To define coordinates on your screen, select ‘’Select Print Area’’. C. Check for printing only the entities included within the selected rectangular area of the drawing you specified. D. Select to define the units and the paper size either in inches or in millimeters. E. Define the scale for the print area, by typing the ratio of the drawing units to the printed inches or millimeters. F. Select this option to fit the print area to the print paper (to automatically set the best fitting scale of the drawing in the print paper). G. Click to print the selected entities within the selected window. H. Click to print all the entities within the selected window. Defining a header and a footer 1. Perform one of the following:

• Select File > Print. • Type print and press Enter. 2. Select the field ‘’Advanced’’. 3. In the fields ‘’Header’’ and ‘’Footer’’, type the desired comments. Defining the origin of the coordinates of the print area 1. Perform one of the following:

• Select File > Print. • Type print and press Enter.


2. Select the field "Advanced’’. 3. Below the field ‘’Origin Of Print Area’’, check one of the following:

• In order to identify the center of the print area as the print paper, check the ‘’Center On Page’’ box.

• In order to define a coordinates origin for the print area, type the x and y coordinates, or click in the field ‘’Select Origin’’ and select a point in the drawing.

Using the print configuration files The print configuration files store the print information that you create for specific drawings and eliminate the need for re-configuring the print settings each time you print a drawing. FINE supports files under the form (PCP) that are used by Autodesk AutoCAD. This feature enables the use of the already stored PCP files that have been created by AutoCAD, as if you had created those files using FINE.

Note: You are enabled to convert an AutoCAD PC2 file into PCP form, using the option ‘’Device And Default’’ from the AutoCAD print dialogue window.

Opening or saving a PCP file 1. Perform one of the following:

• Select File > Print. • Type print and press Enter. 2. Select the field ‘’Advanced’’. 3. Below the field ‘’Configuration File’’, select ‘’Open’’ to open a PCP file or

‘’Save’’ to save the current print settings in a new PCP file.

A. Type the header and footer contents or select from the directories. B. Click to open a PCP file. C. Click to save the current print settings in a PCP file.

- 26 - FINE - HVAC

D. Select to define a point as an origin of the print coordinates, specifying a point on the drawing. E. Type the x and y coordinates to define the origin of the print coordinates. F. Check to identify the center of the drawing as the center of the print paper. Corresponding colors and line widths You can correspond the colors that appear on your screen with the colors you wish to use during the print. For example, you can correspond the yellow color that appears on your screen with the red color, so that all entities that appear yellow on your screen are printed red and with the line width that you define. Much further than corresponding pens to plotters, FINE supports every printing device, even raster printers. Converting an output color 1. Perform one of the following:

• Select File > Print. • Type print and press Enter. 2. Select the field ‘’Color/Width Map’’. 3. In the column ‘’Output Color’’, click the color you wish to modify. The output

color corresponds to the color that appears on the screen in the same row. 4. From the color palette select the new output colors and press Enter. 5. Confirm or modify the settings below the field ‘’Map Properties’’.

Note: In order to modify more than one screen colors to a specific output color, first select the screen colors from the column ‘’Screen Colors’’ and then select the output color.

Modifying line width 1. Perform one of the following:

• Select File > Print. • Type print And press Enter. 2. Select the field ‘’Color/Width Map’’. 3. From the column ‘’Line Width’’, select the line width you wish to modify. The

line width corresponds to the color that appears on screen in the same row. 4. Type the new value for the line width. 5. Confirm or modify the settings under the field ‘’Map Properties’’.

Note: When you specify a line width, make sure you have studied the limitations of the printing device.

Converting all screen colors into black output color 1. Perform one of the following:

• Select File > Print.


• Type print and press Enter. 2. Select the field ‘’Color/Width Map’’. 3. In the column ‘’Screen Colors’’, select all colors. To achieve that, first select

the first color, move the scroll bar to the lowest point and on the last color press ‘’Shift" while clicking.

4. Below the field ‘’Map Properties’’, press the key ‘’Output Color’’ and then press ‘’ΟΚ’’. Alternatively, in the column ‘’Output Color’’ select the black color (screen color 250).

5. Confirm or modify the settings under the field ‘’Map Properties’’.

Note: FINE saves the settings every time you print. To restore the default settings, click ‘’Reset’ in the print dialogue window.

A. The color as appears on the screen. B. Click an output color in order to modify it. C. Click the line width in order to modify it. D. Confirm or modify your settings. Selecting Printer or Plotter Before printing on a printer or a plotter, make sure you have selected the appropriate device. To select printer or plotter: 1. Perform one of the following:

• Select File > Print Setup.

• Type print, press Enter and select ‘’Print Setup’’ 2. From the list in the field ‘’Name’’, select the printer or the plotter you wish.

- 28 - FINE - HVAC

Note: If the user wishes to learn more about the environment and the commands of AutoCAD or IntelliCAD, he can consult the various books that exist in the bookshops concerning those two designing packages. Keep in mind that AutoCAD is an Autodesk product while 4M-IntelliCAD is a product of the IntelliCAD organization, which is developed and supported by 4Μ.


3. AutoBUILD: Architectural Drawing

The AutoBUILD option group, as we will see in detail below, includes all the facilities required to insert a building, that is to create an Architectural drawing. As it is shown in the corresponding AutoBLD menu, the various options are divided into sub-groups.

Generally, the first sub-group includes commands for the definition of the project parameters, the second sub-group includes drawing commands, the third sub-group includes commands for linking to the calculations, the fourth sub-group includes management options for the AutoBLD libraries and the fifth sub-group includes commands for the building supervision. In the following sections, the options reported above are described one by one, beginning with the "Building Definition" option.

- 30 - FINE - HVAC

3.1 Building Definition First of all you should press <Enter> in the "BUILDING DEFINITION" option and the floor management menu will appear.

On this screen the floors of the project building are defined, which means that you should determine the level and the corresponding architectural drawing (ground plan) (DWG file) of each building floor (only in case you use a drawing that was created by another architectural designing program). More specifically: In the "Level" field, define the Level (floor) number. In the "Elevation" field, define the height of the floor level. The user may define manually a benchmark for level measurement (e.g. the pavement). You may also define negative levels (e.g. -3 m). In the "File" field, define the path and the name of the relevant DWG drawing-file, only if you refer to an already existing drawing (which means that you do not intend to draw the ground plan from the start). If there is no DWG architectural drawing available, leave the filename blank. In case there is no DWG file but a DXF file instead (in case ground plans were created by programs other than AutoCAD), you should first convert it into a DWG file, running the AutoCAD DXFIN command, and then insert this DWG file using the option mentioned above. The insertion and the management of ground plans are performed with use of the AutoCAD xref command. You should note that, in order to insert files properly, there should be no problem when you "Open" it using AutoCAD (e.g. fonts or menus that cannot be found). At the bottom of the dialog box there are three functions available which are actually used to manage the floor files. More specifically:

• Press the “New” button to save a new floor or the changes in the data of a floor (e.g. level, DWG drawing).

• Use the "Current" option to select the ground plan/file you want to work on each time.


• Select the "Delete" option to delete the floor you want to (after you have clicked it). The "Delete" command removes the ground plan of the relevant floor in the project without deleting the original architectural DWG file. If you have designed the Architectural on your own using AutoBLD, its elements are not deleted but are simply rendered inactive. If you want to delete them, you should have previously used the AutoCAD "Delete" command.

• The “OK” command closes the dialog box (does not save the floor data). This can be managed with the “New” command).

Note: It has to be noted that your architectural drawing should have been designed in a 1:1 scale, which is 1 drawing unit corresponding to 1 m, in order to have accurate calculations, accurate bill of materials etc. In case the architectural drawing is not in the scale mentioned above, the user should adjust it appropriately by using the "Scale" command.

It is also obvious that there should be a common base point for the different ground plans, so that the network column pass through the actual points relatively to the ground plans. Otherwise, the user should move the ground plans appropriately, by using the "Move" command, so that the base point in all ground plans should have the same absolute co-ordinates. Thus, the user may imaginary define a base point (e.g. an internal angle of the elevator shaft or the external angle of a staircase) and then go to all floors and run "move", select a ground plan when prompted to "Select Objects", define the same base point for all ground plans when prompted for a "Base Point of Displacement" and then enter the co-ordinates of the first ground plan (e.g. 0,0) when prompted for a "Second Point of Displacement". As you will see below, among the commands for wall and opening drawing, there are certain commands that support copying of ground plans created by other architectural programs, in order to achieve time saving during setting the structural elements parameters, according to the standardisation used by FINE. (This procedure is required only for the Thermal Losses, the Cooling Loads and the Heating Insulation applications, as long as auto-identification from the ground plan is desired).

Note: Furthermore, FINE enables the use of a “scanned” ground plan, which is a ground plan in a bitmap file created by a scanner. In this particular situation follow the steps below:

• From Insert->Raster Image press “attach” and select the scanned file (of a floor). Do the same for the other floors drawings. It is strongly recommended to ask for or scan drawing files in PCX format because of their smaller size.

• After you have inserted them, measure a distance on the scanned drawing (e.g. the dimension of a wall) and compare it to the recorded dimension. Run the "Scale" command for the drawing according to the ratio (Recorded Dimension)/(Measured Dimension). For example, if you measure 5 m and the recorded dimension reads 2.5 m, run scale, using a factor equal to 2.5/5=0.5

- 32 - FINE - HVAC

• Select a base point in order to line-up your drawings. This point should be a fixed point, e.g. the external angle of a pillar that exists in all floors. Transfer this fixed point for all floors to a fixed location with the "Move" command. For example, run the "Move" command and select the fixed point (pillar angle) as a base point and in the second point of displacement provide a number for the base point e.g.10.5.

The user should be aware of the following, very useful commands:

• The “Tools->Display Order->Send to Back” command places the ground plan behind any object drawn on the screen. If the ground plan is not in the background, some of the drawing lines will not be visible.

• The "Modify-> Object-> Image Clip" command is used to alter the outline of the scanned file. The new outline may be rectangular or polygonal.

• The "Modify-> Object-> Image Frame" command defines if the scanned file outline will be visible or not. If the outline is not enabled, you cannot edit or alter the file.

• The "Modify-> Object-> Image Transparency" command defines whether the scanned file will be transparent or not. The user is advised to set this option “On” (which means that the black parts are transparent).

3.2 Layers Management This option enables the user to define in a quick and very practical way (during working) the logical minor drawings of the ground plans (layers). More specifically, by selecting "Layers Management", the following screen appears:


If the user wishes, he may disable any element group, by simply clicking inside the indicator-box of the corresponding group. When the box is checked, the corresponding group is enabled. As shown on the screen, the layers, which can be modified by the user (disabled or enabled), are those of the basic elements (Walls, Columns (Pillars), Beams etc), the auxiliary elements (Dimensions, hatch) and information about specifying exposures, spaces, uses. Besides, the Plan View & 3D View indications which cannot appear at the same time at the bottom left part of the screen, assist the user to manage the layers either in Plan view or in 3D view, displaying the appropriate indication at the bottom at the same time. With one or two tests the user may easily understand the usefulness of this command. For those who are familiar with AutoCAD the above option enables the user to avoid the AutoCAD "Set Layer" command, which can also be used, but has proved very unhandy because of the large number of layers (in conjunction with the floors). The second option sub-group that follows, refers to organising and selecting the structural elements previous to Drawing.

3.3 Copy Building Level This option is used when the architectural data of a floor should be copied to another one, which happens in the case of typical floors. If the option above is activated, you will be asked to specify the parts of the "current" ground plan you want to be copied on another floor (there is also the option to copy the whole ground plan or a part of it). Then right click (which means that the specification of the parts is complete) and insert the floor serial number at the bottom of the screen where it is asked for. After you have completed the actions described above, you can see a new floor ground plan created on the screen.

3.4 Typical Elements First of all you should press <Enter> from the "TYPICAL ELEMENTS" option, and then a list with the structural elements which are going to be used in this project will appear. At first, this list contains only a few elements and the user should use it to select the elements he wants to use in his project. The typical elements should be organised before you begin to draw, and, as you will discover later, this is particularly useful for linking to the calculation environment. It should be noted that the typical data of the pre-drawing are transferred to the calculation data, which builds and simplifies the whole procedure. More specifically, five types of structural elements are included in the typical data:

• OPENINGS

• OUTER WALLS

• INNER WALLS

• FLOORS

• ROOFS Each category contains (by default) a list with specific structural elements chosen from the libraries. The user may be based on them, but of course he may modify or add new ones by selecting them from the libraries.

- 34 - FINE - HVAC

This can be done by pressing <Enter> on a row of the list and the corresponding library element list will appear.

Move, using the arrows, on the element you want and press <Enter> for a second time for the library element to be automatically transferred to the typical data sheet. The analytical information about these features are presented and described in the libraries chapter. What should be noted here is the fact that, regarding the walls in particular, other than the characteristic average thermal conductivity coefficients k, you can specify the accurate thermal conductivity coefficients as well, by assigning a specific heat-insulating sheet to those walls. This can be done by clicking the corresponding key when in the typical walls list window. As a result, the heat insulating sheet library list appears.


Move, using the arrows, and press <Enter> to associate the selected heat-insulating sheet with the wall that is displayed in the left window. At the same time this information is displayed on the typical walls list with the indication F1, F2, F3 etc depending on the corresponding heat-insulating sheet. As you will see right below, this dual characterisation of a wall relatively to k is the key to the simultaneous design of a heating and heat-insulating project.

3.5 Attributes Typical data are the basis of the structural elements, which will be used, in a specific project. You can pick any "Typical Elements" out of the "ATTRIBUTES" and then draw it. By using the "Attributes" you can define the current situation for each of the following options such as "Wall", "Opening" etc. So, if you draw a structural element, it will automatically obtain all the features, which have been defined in "Attributes". The "Attributes" options available are the following: Outer wall: Use this option to select the type of the current wall, by pressing <Enter> in the "Type" option. Depending on the selected wall type, the relevant features appear in the window (Coefficient k, wall colour, weight and type according to Ashrae). Furthermore, the user may define in the same window the current values for the wall height and width.

Inner wall: All the above apply here too, plus there is an additional option in which the user may define the wall type, whether it is "Inner Wall" (which means it is adjacent to a heated space) or "Inner Wall to a not heated space". Window: You can specify the window type and then its features will be automatically defined according to k, the glass coefficient and the frame type. You can also specify the window height (the height of the opening of the window) and the distance between the bottom of the window and the base of the wall. You can also specify, in the "Pattern" option, the type of the window pattern. Whether the window is internal or external is automatically taken into account, depending on the wall type it will be placed upon.

- 36 - FINE - HVAC

Sliding W/D (Window/Door): The same with the window section apply here too.

Door: You can define the height of the door as well as the jointing point (hinge) and the direction the door opens. You can also select the door pattern from the corresponding slide screen.


Opening: The same with the window section apply here too. Floor: The "Floor" features concern, first of all, the type which can be selected from "Typical Elements" with the use of the "Type" button-command (consequently you can see the coefficient k, the colour and the weight, which are features that are used by heating and air-conditioning). You can also select one of the three floor types, "To the Ground", "To a Not Heated Space" and "To a Heated Space". These information are used as well by the Insulation-Heating-Cooling applications.

Roof: Similar to "Floor", "Roof" concern first the type which is selected from "Typical Elements" with the use of the "Type" command-button, while you can at the same time select one of the four types "To Outer Environment", "To a Not Heated Space", "To Pilotis" and "To a Heated Space".

- 38 - FINE - HVAC

Dimensioning Parameters: This command leads to a dialog box that is shown below, which assists the user in controlling the best presentation of the dimensions (text distance from dimensional lines, text position, height, arrows, dimension and line colours etc). The following “Change Dimensioning” command is used to modify the features of an existing dimension in the drawing a posteriori.

Note: The "Attributes" => "View" option purpose is to enable the user to specify the "angle" from which he wishes to view the 3D image. In other words the "3D View" command at the bottom of the AutoSTAT option group, "obeys" the viewing features that have been specified in this option. In order to specify the viewing angles, simply define the two angles displayed on the screen:


You can specify these angles in the above window either by typing the corresponding values or by "moving" the mouse directly on the graphical readings and right clicking the desired point. Space Text Style: This command leads to the following window, where the user may easily specify the font type and the text height (in mm of printed text) which is used in various label texts in the ground plans:

Moreover, the user may specify different font types and heights to name the spaces in Heating and Air-conditioning from those used in Fire Protection and the Legend etc. General: The “General” option leads to a dialog window with check boxes:

- 40 - FINE - HVAC

Dialog box to appear before drawing: When this checkbox is selected (with a checkmark), the features of each structural element appear before drawing. For example, the window features screen appears when you select to draw a window (thus by clicking "OK" you proceed to drawing). Current Layer = Building: This checkbox enables the user to define the building user layer as current (e.g. Build_floor1_user) or the user layer of the application you are working on (e.g. Υdre_floor1_user, Apox_floor2_user etc). For example, provided that you are working on an application, e.g. Drainage, and you want to type a comment on the Drainage installation, the above checkbox should have been inactivated, so that the building user layer is not considered as current (otherwise, this comment will appear in every installation). Display Parameters on Status bar: This checkbox enables the user to define the appearance of parameters on status bar such us Version, Current Level, Current Application, and Pipe Kind.

3.6 North Direction Select this option to define the position of north in your drawing. More specifically, by calling this option, the symbol of north appears, in order to be placed on your drawing. Before placement, all the capabilities of AutoCAD, involving rotation, can be used. If you want to turn the symbol of north a posteriori (e.g. building rotation), use the "Rotate" command of AutoCAD.


Notes: 1. The symbol of North is always placed on the WCS. If the user changes the reference system afterwards, the symbol is ignored. 2. You can define your own symbol (file NORTH.DWG). The arrow of the symbol should point to 0 degrees, during its construction. 3. The symbol should be inserted using the corresponding AutoBUILD command and not the AutoCAD “Insert” command (In this case, it is ignored). 4. If the option "North Direction" is selected while one has already been placed, then the old one is deleted. 5. If there is no symbol of north, then 0 degrees is automatically considered as the direction of north.

The next sub-group includes the commands for drawing structural elements, which are described in detail later on.

3.7 Wall Using the “Wall” option, which is in the second sub-group of the AutoBLD options category, you can draw or edit walls (or wall outline). This option includes the sub-group of options "Outer Wall", "Internal Wall", "Outline" and "Circular Wall" as well as the sub-group of options "Modify", "Delete", "Extend", "Break", "Join", "Trim" and "Move". The first sub-group involves the drawing of walls, whereas the second their further processing after they have been drawn. Finally, there also exists the option “Full Drawing”, which, as you will see, affects the structure of the drawing. In the next sections, a more detailed description of each sub-group follows.

3.7.1 Wall Drawing The type of wall that will be drawn using the corresponding command is the one you chose earlier through the option “Wall Parameters”. The fact that the commands “Wall Parameters” and ”Wall Drawing” coexist in the same menu on the right side of the screen provides easy and quick selection and drawing of different walls during the drawing procedure. More specifically, the wall drawing commands function as follows: External Wall: After you have activated the command (by pressing <Enter> in the menu), you are required to successively provide: i) the starting point of the wall (the application message in the command prompt is: "1st point\Relative to wall")

- 42 - FINE - HVAC

ii) the ending point of the wall (the application message in the command prompt is "2nd point\Relative to wall") iii) the direction towards which the wall will “grow”, by providing any point on one of the two half planes defined by the wall line (the application message in the command prompt is "Side Point").

After the above actions, you can see that the wall has been drawn and that you can continue drawing another wall starting from the ending point you defined earlier, unless you right click, which means that you want to stop. During drawing, one can come to the conclusion that the ability of drawing consecutive walls is very convenient, since it saves the user from making many moves. As mentioned earlier, in the “Element Parameters” section, the thickness of the wall, its height and its level relative to the floor (when the level is 0, the wall starts from the floor), will carry the values stored in the “Element Parameters” for the wall. By providing proper values for the wall height and level, any possible case of walls of unequal height can be dealt with. Next, the techniques for constructing walls and all the relevant capabilities of the application are described in detail: a) Simple Wall: After you have defined the first point of a wall and as you are moving to define the second point, in the coordinates system, you can view the length of the wall being drawn as well as the angle towards which it is drawn. The user can provide a number for the size of the wall he/she draws, either in cartesian or polar coordinates, the same as in AutoCAD. For example, if you want to draw a horizontal wall that is 2 metres long, in the command prompt: "Insert Wall End Point " type: @2<0


whereas, if you know the point where the end of the wall lies with respect to the initial point (relative distances ∆x and ∆y), you can type: @2,3 (which means that the distance of the second point is 2m along the x-axis and 3m along the y-axis with respect to the first point). b) Join with another wall: If you want to join a wall with another wall, you can do it using the special snap features ("osnap") provided by AutoCAD. This way, you can activate osnap by pressing the middle button of a 3-button mouse (or by holding <Shift> down and pressing the right button of a 2-button mouse) and either select the end or the middle of a wall or bring the wall in a position vertical to another one or provide the nearest point etc. For example, if you activate the “Wall” command and then define the starting point of the wall so that it falls exactly upon the end of the previous one (using osnap) and following that, executing corresponding with (b) and (c) actions, you can see two joined walls. It is easily established that the programme automatically ”clears” the wall joint in any possible case. Furthermore, it should be pointed out that the programme performs the join even if you do not ”capture” a point using "osnap" but one of the points (starting or ending) simply lies within another wall. c) Constructing a wall in a position relative to another wall: There exists the option of viewing the distance from the end of the wall, with which another wall will be joined. More specifically, provided that the ”Wall” option is selected and ”R” (for "relative") pressed, you are asked to move with the mouse and select an existing wall (either from inside or outside and towards the left or the right side). As soon as this happens, the cross automatically acquires the direction of the wall and the coordinates on the top of the screen indicate the distance from the end of the wall you previously selected. Moreover, the 0 coordinate (that is, the point where the value for distance is zero) is exactly that end of the wall lying towards the side you selected the wall. This way, the newly constructed wall can have the exact relative distance you want with respect to the other one, with no effort at all. Apparently, this option (viewing the relative distances you want on the screen during drawing) is extremely useful and similar variations are applied during drawing internal walls or of openings on walls. Inner Wall: The command is similar to the command “Outer Wall". During drawing an internal wall, the option mentioned above, regarding outer walls, is also helpful. Frame: This option enables the user to define more than one walls simultaneously or an outlined area (or outline). Begin by providing the start and the end of each wall (consecutively) and then the side (outside or inside) towards which you want the walls to ”grow”. If you want to close the frame (outline), just type ”c” (letter c) in the command line of AutoCAD (at the bottom of the screen), in which case you will see the outline closing on the screen (that is, the last line is automatically drawn) and there is only one action left, to define (with a single point) the side towards which you want the walls to “grow”.

- 44 - FINE - HVAC

Outer Wall Frame (Snap-Intersect): This option helps the user easily define the outline of a building and consequently the building outer walls, in case you are drawing over a drawing that has been created using another architectural application and has been selected in ”Building Definition”. By executing the command, successive points of the outer outline are required, while, at the same time, an automatic snap of the wall edges (intersections) is performed, so that the plotting of the existing drawing becomes easy.


When the successive definition of the points is complete, right click and you will see the wall with its current parameters being drawn over the existing architectural drawing.

Inner Wall Frame (Snap-Intersect): This command is similar to the previous one, using an inner outline in this case. These two commands, along with the ”Opening” command which will be discussed later on, constitute a group of “Drawing Identification” commands, that is they support “recognizing" sections of the ground plan, so that the time of redefining (entity providing) an Architectural Ground Plan created with another architectural drawing package (other than IDEA or FINE) is minimized. By snapping corner points of external and internal walls (and openings, as you will later see), the user can easily and with the minimum number of moves, ”copy” the structural elements of the existing ground plan, providing them with entity, that is giving them as parameters the current parameters of the structural elements of AutoBLD. Arcwall: This command enables the user to draw circular walls, meaning walls defined by any arc of a circle. For flexibility reasons, the wall is defined on an existing arc of a circle, which can be created using the command ”Wall Arc” or any other relevant command of AutoCAD. After you have selected the corresponding command for an external or internal circular wall, the application prompts you to select the corresponding arc and following that, two values referring to the minimum lengths of the segments connecting the two ends (you can accept the values which are automatically suggested by the application). The wall is then drawn on the screen. The command ”Circular Wall” includes the following sub-commands: Outer Arcwall: An Outer Arcwall (carrying the current parameters of the Outer wall) is drawn, pointing to the wall arc that you have previously defined.

- 46 - FINE - HVAC

• Inner Arcwall: Similar to the previous command but the Wall being drawn is an Inner one (carrying the current parametes of the Inner wall).

• Change Arcwall: By selecting a circular wall you can modify its parameters through the window that appears.

• Delete Arcwall: The selected Circular Wall is deleted.

• Arc: An arc is drawn, which will be used to draw a Circular Wall (Outer or Inner).

3.7.2 Wall Data Editing The commands you can use to edit wall data are the following: Delete: This command enables the user to delete a wall, in which case the joints with the rest of the walls will automatically be restored. The command prompt is “Select Wall". You can also delete one or more walls using AutoCAD "Erase" command, but in this case, in order for the joints of the walls to be restored, you should additionally use the “Building Reconstruction” command, which can prove to be time consuming for large drawings. Change: Using this command you can view the parameters of existing walls or even modify them if you want to. As soon as you activate the command, you only need to move to the wall in question. Then, a window with the wall parameters will appear.

These parameters are exactly the same with the ones appearing in the ”Attributes” window, mentioned earlier, with two additional lengths for the wall (the outer and the inner length). The user can modify the height and the thickness of the wall as well as the type of the wall (selecting another wall from the libraries), in which case the parameters ”coefficient k”, color, weight etc also change.


Multiple Change (simultaneously): If you select more than one wall, you can modify one of their common parameter (e.g. their height) through the corresponding window that appears. This way, the required moves are minimised when more than one walls are to be modified simultaneously (e.g. modify the height of every wall on level 1). Move Wall: This option enables the user to move an existing wall. The application will automatically create the new required joints. The command prompts are: Select Wall: Select the wall you want to move. Enter new wall Location: Provide the new position of the wall. Extend Wall: Using this option you can extend an existing wall. The application will automatically create the new required joints, if the wall is extended to fall upon another wall. The command prompts are: Select Wall:Select the wall you want to extend. Select Point/Wall:Select the point where you want the wall to be extended to. However, if the user wants to extend it to another wall, then type ”W” in the command prompt (Select Point\Wall), in which casethe prompt ”Select Wall to Extend To” appears. Then, select the wall you want the previously selected wall to be extended to. Trim Wall: This option enables us to erase part of the edge of a wall (similar to the TRIM command of AutoCAD). In this case, the application will create the new required joints as well. The command prompts are: Select Wall: Select the wall you want to ”trim". It should be pointed out that the wall is selected with respect to the edge you want to trim. Select Point\Wall: Select the point, with respect to which you want to trim the edge. However, if you want to trim a wall with respect to another one, then in the command prompt (Select Point\Wall) Type ”W”. The prompts “Select Boundary Wall”-“Select Wall” then appear. Hence, select the wall with respect to which the trimming of the previously selected wall will take place. Break Wall: This option enables us to erase part of a wall (similar to the BREAK command in AutoCAD). The command prompts are:

- 48 - FINE - HVAC

Select Wall: Select the wall you want to “cut". Select Point\Wall: Select the first break point for the wall. Select Point\Wall: Select the second break point for the wall. If you do not want to cut a piece of the wall, but cut the wall in two pieces, you should simply select the first and second points to be exactly the same point (that is, two mouse clicks) ). If you want the break to be performed with respect to another wall, then in the command prompt ”Select Point\Wall”, type “W”. Then the prompt ”Select Boundary Wall”-”Select Wall” appears, in which case you select the reference wall. Merge Walls: This option enables us to compose two collinear walls into one: The command prompts are: Select Wall: Select the first wall and immediately afterwards the second one. If the walls are not collinear, and therefore can not logically be composed into one, a message appears on the screen reading that ”the walls are not collinear”.

Attention! It should be stressed out that any wall data processing should be performed strictly on the basis of the above commands, since the walls are objects and the commands have been specifically designed for their proper processing. Therefore, using the commands COPY, STRETCH etc. of AutoCAD is forbidden, because it might lead to undesirable results.

3.7.3 Full Drawing This option is optional and specifies if you want the 3D drawing, or just the 2D drawing, to be automatically created, while you draw in two dimensions. 3D drawing is quite ”heavy” and there is no need to activate it if you do not intend to use it. It can be activated any time, in which case the 3D drawing will be automatically created. Alternatively, you can use the ”Save As” command (of AutoCAD) and save the 2D drawing as another drawing and build the 3D drawing in that file.

Note: In the example of section 7.2 the command “Full Drawing” has been used in the ground plans of the corresponding project.

3.8 Opening If the command "Opening" is activated, a second option menu is displayed where you can either select among various opening types (window, sliding door, door etc.) to draw or use one of the "Delete", "Modify" or "Move" commands for an opening that has already been drawn. Drawing an opening leads to the following options:


Window: The option "Window" demands that you select the wall on which the opening will be placed and then define the beginning and the end of the opening (all these actions are carried out using the mouse and pressing <Enter> each time). The window will automatically obtain the data that are predefined in the “Attributes”, namely the corresponding values for the height, the rize, the coefficient k etc). Of course, you can draw the window from the ground plan as well as in the three-dimensional (3D) view. During drawing a window, it is very helpful to the user the fact that, after the wall where the window will be automatically placed is selected, the distance from the wall edge is displayed in the coordinates position on the top of the screen, while the crosshair is transferred parallel to the wall for supervision reasons. The measurement starting point (distance 0) as well as the side (internal or external) are defined by which one of the two edges is closer and which side was "grabbed" during the wall selection.

Note: If during the opening placement you select the wall and the message “No wall selected ” is displayed, this means that in the selected spot there is another line underneath (e.g. a line of the architectural drawing which you called in the "Building Definition", the floor or the roof outline). In order to be able to select the wall, run the command "Display Order" and select the option "Send to back" to send the walls behind the obstructive elements.

Sliding w/d (window/door): This is the same as for the window, the second inserted point defines the side where the sliding door wall is. Regarding the distance measurement from the wall edge, the instructions given in the window case apply here as well. Door: If the option "Door" is selected, you should “show” the wall where you want the door placed, define the beginning and the end of the door (the beginning defines also the axis where the door opens) and finally show (with a point) the side in which it opens. In the side figure you can see the order in which the points 1, 2 and 3 are defined. The first point is provided according to either the screen coordinates or the relative coordinates (e.g. with @2.5,0 the door axis will be placed 2.5 meters from the wall edge). The second point determines the door width and in case it is shorter than the length defined in the "Door Parameters" it obtains this value. Finally, the third point is inserted freely either on the one side of the wall or the other, after you have just defined the level side to which the door is placed. Regarding measuring the distances from the wall edge, the same instructions referring to the window apply. Opening: Here stand exactly the same instructions as for the window (see above) with only difference its drawn image. For measuring the distances from the wall edge, the same instructions referring to the window apply. Window of Arcwall: A window is placed on an arcwall following actions similar to those of the window placement on a normal wall.

- 50 - FINE - HVAC

Door of Arcwall: A door is placed on an arcwall following actions similar to those of the door placement on a normal wall. Window from Xref: Primarily you are asked to determine the wall and then the two window edges. Snapping is made automatically and the window is placed on the wall creating an architectural xref window entity (see following screen):

Sliding w/d (window/door), Door and Opening from Xref: For the Xref Door, Opening or Sliding door, the process is completely similar to the one discussed above regarding the Window. The options "Window from Xref", "Sliding window/door from Xref", "Door from Xref" and "Opening from Xref", help establishing an opening entity from a ground plan which was created by another architectural package, as mentioned above. Finally, the opening management options are divided into the following: Delete: Use this option to delete an opening. Specifically, once you have selected "Delete", select the opening you wish to delete. After you have deleted the opening, the wall is automatically restored. Change: Use this option to modify the features of any desired opening. Once you have activated this command, you are asked to select the opening and then define through the appearing screen (displaying the opening parameters) the new height, the new rize or the new type you desire.


Center: Use this option to centre any opening on the wall on which it is placed, by pointing the opening and the corresponding wall with the mouse. Move: Use this option to change the position of any desired opening. Once you have activated the command, you are asked to select the opening and to define first the base point and then the new location to which it (the base point) will be transferred. During transfer, the distance from the original point is shown in the coordinates position. Note that the transfer may be performed on either the 2D ground plan or the 3D image.

3.9 Column (Pillar) If “Column Placement” is selected, the following dialogue is displayed, with all the necessary features of the column or the prop you are going to draw.

- 52 - FINE - HVAC

Generally, the column definition may be performed with either points or polylines. If the column cross section is rectangular, activate the box that is placed lower and define width, thickness and angle. If the column cross section is circular, activate the lower box with the pillar radius. The values for the level and height of the pillar are lower while on the right you have the ability to define the pillar “Filling” with 3 alternative options: Empty, Solid or Hatch. In the last case you can define scale (density) and angle, by updating the corresponding values that are displayed in the window. If any Column is defined, e.g. Rectangular, by pressing “OK” it is inserted in the drawing for the user to place. With the snap points you can place the edge of the pillar to any characteristic point (e.g. to a wall edge) and then you can turn it to place it the way you want. Once you have placed the pillar, if it is placed on a wall, you can hide the unwanted lines by running the AutoCAD "Hide" command (see example). At the same time the wall preserves its entity (it does not brake in two parts).

Note: A column deletion is carried out using the AutoCAD "Erase" command. COPY of a column is allowed using the respective AutoCAD command or even the "Array" command in case you want to draw grid from columns. Moreover, the copies (that were created using COPY) of an original column will all obtain the new changes that will take place to the original column or to any other copy.

Change: Use this option to modify the Type, the Level, the Height, the Hatch, the scale (hatch density) and the hatch angle of an existing column the window which appears when a column selected.

3.10 Floors-Ceilings (or Roofs) The “Floor”, “Change” as well as the “Ceiling” and “Change” commands are used to facilitate drawing (or modification respectively) of Floors and Ceilings (Roofs) that contact the surroundings. The reason for their use is simply the for linking to the Heat Insulation, Thermal Losses and Cooling Loads calculations while the area, the thermal conductivity coefficient and the corresponding heat-insulation sheet F update the above calculation sheets properly. Floor or Ceiling Drawing: Once you have selected a type from the “Attributes”, define the floor or the Ceiling (or roof) on the boundaries of the floor surface (or of the part where floor or ceiling (or roof) exists). The definition is carried out by drawing an outline exactly as a polyline. It is clarified that more than one Floors or Ceilings may have been defined on a floor (e.g. on the ground level, a marble Floor above the ground, a wooden Floor above a non-heated space, a wooden Floor above the ground etc). Floor or Ceiling Change: If you want to change some parameters of a Floor or a Ceiling that you have already drawn (e.g. different type or kind of contact to the surroundings), use the options “Change” and select the corresponding feature with the mouse. The relative window with the Floor or Ceiling parameters is displayed.


3.11 Drawings - Symbols This option enables the user to select among a series of drawings and symbols to place within his/her drawing. These drawings and symbols are grouped in 9 sub-categories. 1. General 2. Bedroom Furniture 3. Living-room Furniture 4. Dining-room Furniture 5. Kitchen Furniture 6. Office Furniture 7. Plumps 8. Accessorial Furniture 9. Circumambient Space (trees, plants, cars, etc) These drawings are nothing more than the FINE Architectural Libraries drawings, which can be enhanced or updated by the user, according to what is mentioned under the corresponding command "Libraries-Drawings", which is described below. The “General” category is the more useful since it contains set signs and paper outlines with signs, which will help you estimate the proper paper size for your drawing, depending on the used scale. In order to place a symbol in your drawing, you should first select the library category where it belongs and then select the specific symbol. Specifically, by selecting one of the aforementioned library categories, a screen appears with the slides of the specific library category, where the user can select the desired symbol to be placed on the ground plan. Placement is carried out through the known capabilities of AutoCAD, and especially: In the selected library symbol or drawing screen, press <Enter> on the symbol you desire and then press "OK" (or, alternatively, double click it). During insertion, the program asks only for the position of the drawing placement as well as the placement angle. Furthermore, once the indication "scale xy" (on the top left) is activated, you can magnify (or diminish) the correspondent symbol by x and y during the symbol placement. This is done easier by moving the mouse, immediately after you have placed the selected symbol on the drawing.

3.12 Definition of Plan view Elements 3.12.1 Space Definition This option enables the user to define one or more spaces providing him/her with two alternative ways:

• by defining the walls surrounding each space

• by defining an internal point of the space

- 54 - FINE - HVAC

Space definition by walls: In this case you are asked to select the walls that surround the space. This can be done in various ways, either by selecting the walls one by one or by selecting a wall group and enclosing them in a selection window. If you draw the selection window from left to right, you will select the walls that are completely included in the window. If you draw the selection window from right to left, you will select the walls that are included or intersected by the selection window (the user can make tests viewing, in each case, the selected walls represented by a discontinuous line). Once you have selected the walls that surround the space, press <Enter> and the space name is required at the bottom of the screen. By typing the space name, the program "recognises" the space (so it can enter the space data to the thermal losses and cooling loads calculation sheet). Then you can see the space name and its area written (approximately in the space center) on the screen while an outline, following the axis of the selected walls, is displayed at the same time.

Of course, in each case the selected walls must form only one closed space (you cannot define a non-closed space). Otherwise, the program displays the relative error message, displaying most of the times the point where the error is made as well. Space definition by point: This command is simpler than the previous one since only the definition of an internal point of the space you wish to define is required. Once you have moved the crosshair to an internal point and pressed the left mouse button, all you have to do is "show" the wall you wish to define. This is easily done by moving the mouse so that the line-rubber that is formed intersects a space wall, as shown in the following figure:


By pressing once more the left mouse button, the program "indicates" (by discontinuous outline) the defined space and asks for the space name. By entering the name the space definition is completed and its features are indicated just like in the previous case (definition by walls).

Note: If a message reading that the space is open appears during space definition, it means that some of the walls that form the outline are not joined to each other. The space name as well as its outline is in layer BUILD_FLOOR1_SPACES for level 1 and respectively for the others (only the serial number of the floor changes). So, the user is able to activate (THAW) or deactivate (FREEZE) the correspondent layers using the AutoCAD "Layer Control" command. The font colour definition is performed through the command "Layer Control", through the layer BUILD_SPACE_INFO. You can also FREEZE lines. The colour definition as well as the line type for the space outline are defined by the colour and the line type of the layer BUILD_SPACE_LINES.

If the user has defined a space and wishes to redefine (or to correct) the space name without re-determining the space, he can do so with the help of the command series "TEXT", "Attributes", "EDIT" that are under the option of the AutoCAD "DRAW" option. If you wish to cancel or delete a space, just select the space name and use the AutoCAD option "Delete". Note that the space definition is preserved (its data are automatically updated), e.g. by changing or adding openings, the space data are automatically updated without having to redefine the space.

3.13 Calculations The command "Calculations" leads to the calculations related to the building surrounding (Thermal losses, Cooling loads) as well as to applications of calculations indirectly depending on this (Psychrometry). The calculations of each application are described in detail in the calculations manual. The following sections summarise the actions required to transfer the user to each calculation subsystem and back to the drawing environment.

- 56 - FINE - HVAC

3.13.1 Thermal Losses If "Thermal Losses" is selected, the program asks if you want to update the calculation files, that is to transfer the ground plan data in the calculation sheets, according to the way that you have defined spaces using the option "Insert Space". If "YES" is selected, you are transferred in the calculating subsystem of the "Thermal Losses" application. In case you do not want the ground plan data to be transferred in the calculations (e.g. you want to keep the previous data), select "NO". In order to update the calculation sheets of the "Thermal Losses" application (ADAPT/FCALC), you should select "Update from Drawing" (in the option group under "Files") in the "Thermal Losses" menu. As soon as data are transferred, the program prompts "Calculate?". If "Yes" is selected, all calculation sheets are updated automatically with the data existing in the drawing application.

3.13.2 Update Spaces from Thermal Losses With this command the space thermal losses which were calculated by the program (after entering the calculation sheets and then returning to the ground plan) are shown within the spaces (under their name) to be thoroughly supervised.


3.13.3 Cooling loads If "Cooling Loads" is selected, the program asks if you want to update the calculation files, that is to transfer the ground plan data in the calculation sheets, as in the "Thermal Losses" application. If "YES" is selected, you are transferred in the calculating subsystem of the "Cooling Loads" application. As far as the co-operation between the Drawing and the Calculating application is concerned, everything mentioned above regarding the thermal losses apply here as well.

3.14 Libraries The sub-group "Libraries" includes two libraries, the Data Libraries and the Drawing Libraries which are described in the next two sections:

3.14.1 Data Libraries These Libraries include a series of data which are divided in two categories: - structural elements - climatologic data They include parameters concerning the structural elements (walls, openings, etc), according to Chapter 3 of the Fine-M Guide.

3.14.2 Drawing Libraries The Drawing Libraries include a series of existing drawings which may be needed during the creation of the Architectural drawing. Drawings can be managed through all the existing capabilities of the library manager with which any existing drawing can be easily inserted.

- 58 - FINE - HVAC

In order to insert a new drawing in the libraries, you should, first of all, select the desired symbol category (e.g. category 5) by selecting it with the mouse from the libraries list of the package (the libraries list "opens" by pressing the arrow in the top right corner). Then, having selected the category, select the location where you want to place the symbol or the drawing, within the category in question. Use the right and the left arrow to move on the various symbol locations. You can see the serial number of the symbol (on the left) and the corresponding screen (on the right). Move to a blank location and use the arrows appearing below to enter the new symbol. More specifically: Press the button "Select Object(s)" to select the drawing (object) you want to insert. Select the object using the mouse exactly as you select an object to be deleted, moved etc. When you have selected the object and pressed the left mouse button, the above window appears again automatically (dialog box). Use the insertion point to define the base point (reference point), according to which the drawing will be inserted whenever you call it from the library. Press the button " Slide Screen" to enter the drawing in order to determine the "image" of the object that you want to appear on the slides (screens) of the libraries. The definition is easy to carry out through a window (just like zoom). After the image definition, the above window (dialog box) appears again. Select the "Enter Slide" option to update the corresponding slide. Select "Enter" to save the name typed above, in the field Symbol Name. Provided that you have run the commands mentioned above and most of all you have selected an object, select "Enter Drawing" (which is automatically activated - it gets black - when an object is selected) and the object is finally saved into a file. The last option group of AutoBLD concerns the different ways the user can monitor the building and it is described in the next sections.

Note: Apart from the drawings installed on the hard disk with the program installation, there are many additional symbols and details for E/M installations within the master CD (which is usually integrated in the FINE CD). The user can select these symbols directly from the CD.


3.15 Building Reconstruction This option concerns the reformation of the building drawing. This is necessary in the case of changes in the architectural drawing (e.g. wall deletion) which result in undesirable situations (e.g. lines, garbage) in the drawing. Select the "Building Reconstruction" option (rebuild) to have the whole drawing drawn clearly again and more specifically: Total: Examines the whole building and corrects eventual errors but is takes longer than the local reconstruction. Local: Examines the section selected by the user (select), so it is much more faster.

3.16 Plan View (2D) It is the main supervising way, with which you work, during drawing the building as well as the installations. You should always be in the ground plan when drawing walls so that you have better supervision and the wall "joints" are created correctly. The program automatically generates and uses a two-dimensional plan view.

3.17 3D View This command provides a quick solution for three-dimensional supervision of the ground plan of the current floor (with given viewing angles). In this case, it is possible to hide certain elements by running the command HIDE. Of course, the user is able to use the AutoCAD command "setview" in order to view the building from wherever he desires.

- 60 - FINE - HVAC

3.18 Axonometric This command provides three-dimensional supervision of the whole building (for all floors), with the given viewing angles as they have been selected in "Viewing Features".

3.19 Saving sections of the drawing in other drawings 3.19.1 Command Wblock The command "Screen Drawing" enables saving any section of the drawing (e.g. a ground plan, an axonometric with an E/M installation etc) in a file (DWG). Run from the command line "Wblock" and then insert the file name in which the section of your drawing will be saved. In the prompt “Block name” press <Enter>, determine the “Insertion point” and select the objects to be saved.

3.19.2 Screen Drawing The command "Screen Drawing" enables saving any section of the drawing (e.g. a ground plan, an axonometric with an E/M installation etc) in a file (DWG). It is similar to the AutoCAD command "Wblock", which can also be used for the same purpose. In comparison with the AutoCAD command "Save As", their advantage is the small size of the files they create. The use of the command “Screen Drawing” is easy: After selecting it for execution, the program asks to select which section of the drawing appearing on the screen you want to save in a file. Of course, you can select the whole drawing (by typing "ALL" in the command line) or any section, with the usual way of AutoCAD ("select" command). After selecting is complete, the program asks you to wait for a while and then asks for the name of the file into which you want to save the drawing (Attention! Do not insert the same name as the project).


Entering the file name, the program creates the file in the directory BLD of the project. If the entered name already exists, the program prompts if you want to replace the older file. Then the program transfers you automatically within the created drawing, so as to view and edit it (if you want). In order to return to the drawing of the project in which you were before the execution of the command, you should “Open” the file of your project or select the project again running "Open Project". This way you return to the point you were before the creation of the screen drawing.

Note: The command "wblock" splits all blocks as well as xrefs into single entities. If a section of your drawing cannot be converted into “Screen Drawing”, it means that one of the above entities cannot be split. In this case use the command "wblock". Attention! After running the command “Screen Drawing”, the variables of the drawing may have changed, resulting in a failure of some commands of the program. The problem can be resolved by inserting the command "Allowinit" (in the command line) and by selecting the project again, so that the inactivated commands are loaded.


4. AutoNET: General Features

The option group AutoNET includes every facility the designer needs in order to draw and calculate the Electrical-Mechanical (E/M) installations, as it will be described in detail hereunder. Note that you should first "Identify Building" by using the respective AutoBUILD command (first command), which, in practice, means that you should specify the floors of the project building. More specifically, you should determine the level and the corresponding architectural ground plan (DWG file) of each building floor. Moreover, note that there should be a common base point in the various ground plans so that network columns pass through real points in relation to the ground plans. Otherwise, the user should move, using the respective command, the ground plans accordingly so that the base point has the same absolute co-ordinates in all ground plans. Regardless of the application or the installation type, AutoNET general features are described below, that is the commands concerning installation networks, which are included in the AutoNET group, in the order found in the menu. After the user has understood AutoNET main principles, he can then consult Chapter 5, where the special features of each application are described, which means that the general features are analysed and the special features applying to each installation network are emphasised.

4.1 Drawing Definition Provided that the building has been identified according to the procedure described above, some further information can be defined, regarding organising the drawing data. In particular, if "Drawing Definition" is selected, the following screen appears, which univocally corresponds the type and the colour of the line that will be used automatically to each application and network type:

- 64 - FINE - HVAC

The command "Color" is used to assign the desired colour to each network while the command "Linetype" is used to select the desired line type. The options "Color" and "Linetype" are deactivated (in grey) if you have not selected a line from the list. Example: Suppose you want to alter the Single-pipe circuit line from cyan and

continuous (by default) to red and dotted. In order to accomplish that, select row "Single-pipe Circuit" so that it is highlighted, as shown in the following screen. Then click "Color" key at the bottom left side of

the dialog

screen. A new

window will appear enabling color selection. Select the second row (red color) or type the color code in the field "Code", according to the AutoCAD colors. Pressing "OK" updates the previous window where the circuit colour appears now red. If you click "Line Type" and follow a similar procedure you can alter the continuous line to dotted.

4.2 Applications Layers Management This command leads to the adjacent dialog screen, where you can activate more than one installations and monitor those which are possibly overlapping (e.g. the adjacent dialog box shows that Twin-pipes System and Electrical Installations are overlapping). Note that the programme automatically manages the layers of the various installations, that is, if you select an installation, the respective layer appears while the others disappear. This feature can be skipped through the above command "Project Layers Management" where the user (de-)selects the installations he wants to view simultaneously. In this way, possible design errors can be avoided.

4.3 Copy network of Level ΑutoNET enables copying of typical (installation) plan views and pasting them on other floors through the special command "COPY NETWORK OF LEVEL’’, which exists just for this purpose. It functions similarly to the homonymous AutoBLD option, which pertained to architectural ground plans.


If the " Copy Network of Level" AutoNET command is activated, you are prompted to select (AutoCAD "Select") the network branch(es) which you want pasted on the other floor. Then you are prompted to provide the floor where you want the network pasted and the network is pasted on the new floor which is automatically activated. Example: Suppose you want to paste the heating installation of floor 1 to floor 2.

First of all, make sure you have defined a second floor by selecting the "Building Definition" option and viewing the floor management screen. In case there is no second floor, you should define one.

- 66 - FINE - HVAC

If you select the "Copy Network of Level" command, the programme will ask you to determine what you want copied (through the "Select Objects" prompt). If you want the whole installation copied, type "ALL" (or select the whole ground plan in a window) and press <Enter>. The whole ground plan is "highlighted".

Right click (which means that the selection is complete) and the programme will inform you of the selected objects number (18 in this case) and ask you where you would like the selected ground plan pasted. Type (in the command line) number 2 and press <Enter>. Then the installation is pasted. In order to view the ground plan of floor 2, how it has been pasted, you should activate floor 2.

Note: There is no problem if the columns are also selected from the ground plan, because the programme "understands" that they exist and does not copy them again.

4.4 Select Application This option enables selection of the desired application (e.g. Twin-Pipe Heating System, Fan Coils etc). Depending on the selected application, the section of the following AutoNET menu will be configured accordingly.


Example: The "Air Ducts" Application is selected and the AutoNET menu includes the following options:

These are the designing options of a water supply installation (Circuit Pipe, Supply Pipe, Return Pipe, Double Pipe, Main Pipes (Build.), Start Point, Radiators, Automatic Radiator Placement, Fittings, Chimney, Symbols, General Symbols, Net Recognition, Calculations, Drawing Update, Label, Vertical Diagram, Libraries Management). As shown, these options are grouped, in a way. The grouping method is rather simple:

- 68 - FINE - HVAC

• The first group (Pipes and Columns) pertains to the drawing of the single pipe network piping.

• The second group includes various materials and symbols from which the user can select during the drawing of the installation.

• The "Net Recognition" and "Calculations" commands perform specific jobs regarding the logical procession of the drawing while the commands under "Libraries Management" concern the updating procedure of the program libraries (with numerical and drawing data).

As mentioned above, the "Select Application" command enables selecting the application you want to work on and the AutoNET menu section, which supports the drawing of the respective application installation, will be configured accordingly. The typical Single Pipe System application was described above while there is correspondence with all applications. In Chapter 5 each application is described in detail separately.

Note: Apart from the options presented in the AutoNET menu, in each application, an additional toolbar appears, which includes the icons corresponding to this particular application. For example, in the Single-Pipe System, the toolbar displayed in the adjacent window appears. Clicking an icon triggers the execution of the respective command. However, if an icon is selected and the left mouse key is kept pressed, a vertical toolbar, with additional icons-commands, appears (pull-down menus). With the left mouse key kept pressed, the selected icon (that is the one where the cursor is when the left mouse key is released) triggers the execution of the respective command. Moreover, this icon remains in the menu (this means that it replaces the main icon in the horizontal toolbar). The user can very easily familiarise with these pull-down menus as he will find out that their use provides great convenience.

4.5 Network Drawing The installation network drawing is carried out with a single line, by drawing lines and connecting them to each other, exactly as the network is connected in fact. The user should keep in mind some general principles regarding drawing and connecting between straight or curved, horizontal or vertical network branches.

4.5.1 Horizontal & Vertical Piping In any case, the piping drawing is carried out exactly as the line drawing in AutoCAD. The user is able to draw horizontal or vertical network branches. Note that vertical branches are different from columns, which will be described below, as they are within the borders of the active floor and do not "cross" floors like columns. Drawing of horizontal piping is performed by selecting cold or hot water pipe for inlet or return for the Twin-Pipes System, cable for Electrical Installations (or the respective items of the other installations).


The pipe installation elevation is the current elevation. Modification of the pipe installation elevation is possible through the command "elev". If you type "elev" (in the command line), you are prompted to determine the new current elevation. Press <Enter> if it is 0 or type 0 if there is another value but 0. At this point it should be emphasised that, if a horizontal piping which is found on a specific level is drawn and it is connected to another piping or a contact point (receptor), the program automatically "elevates" or "lowers" the pipe so that connecting to the other pipe or receptor, respectively, is possible. In this way, the programme facilitates the drawing of piping in three dimensions while the designer is actually working in a two-dimension environment.

Attention! In case a horizontal branch is connected to a vertical one, "perpendicular" snap should be used so that there will be no more vertical branches created which would possibly complicate identification.

In any case of a network design, all facilities provided by AutoCAD can be utilised through relative co-ordinates. Example: Suppose you want to draw a horizontal network branch at the floor level which will be parallel to the wall (elevation 0). After selecting "Pipe", use the mouse to define the first endpoint. Activate AutoCAD "ortho" to enable horizontal movements, as this facilitates the drawing of this example.

Move to the other side of the pipe and left click to define the second endpoint. Right click to terminate the function of this command.

4.5.2 Column Drawing Drawing vertical branches which cross floors (one or more) is possible through the option "(Building) Column". When the respective option is selected from the menu, the programme asks for the column position ("Enter xy Location") and then for the height of the starting point ("Enter Height for First Point") as well as the height of the ending point ("Enter Height for Second Point"). Example: Suppose you want to draw a vertical branch (column) from 0 to 3. If you insert the location point (XY) and then the numbers 0 and 3 successively, the symbol for direction change appears on the ground plan.

- 70 - FINE - HVAC

If "3D View" is selected, the column is displayed in 3 dimensions, exactly as drawn:

The programme automatically draws the symbol for a vertical column at the column trace, as shown in the image.

Note: The symbol is "block" with the name Mark1. After the symbol is placed, the user can modify it, draw any other symbol he wishes or "Replace Block".

4.5.3 Vertical branches within the same floor If you want to elevate or lower a pipe within the same floor without having the elevation-lowering symbol inserted (Mark1), you can use the command "Pipe".


Example: Suppose you want to elevate by 2.5 m from the free end of the pipe shown in the adjacent screen, to continue over and along the window and finally descend by 1.5 m. Run the command "Pipe" and select the pipe end through "Endpoint" snap. After that, in the prompt "Enter next point" insert @0,0,2.5 which means that the next pipe end is found at the same co-ordinates x, y (relative co-ordinates 0,0) and height (z) 2.5 m.

Then you can continue drawing the piping, using the mouse to move towards the lower part of the window and "descend" from that point by typing @0,0,-1.5 as next end. This means that there will be a lowering of 1.5 m. Right clicking terminates the drawing of the piping. For better monitoring of the drawing, run "3D View" command and the following screen appears:

- 72 - FINE - HVAC

Note that you can draw piping in 3 dimensions very easily, if you use the above drawing mode.

4.5.4 Drawing of Curved Pipes Draw curved pipes by inserting the points from which the curved pipe is to pass. The respective command prompts for the following: First point: Insert the starting point of the pipe. Next point: Insert next point, the one after that and so on (successively), defining the pipe routing in this way. The user can easily modify curved pipes using AutoCAD "grips" (see Chapter 2). As soon as the pipe is selected, grips appear which you can move, altering this way the pipe routing. In the Bill of Materials and the Calculations phase, the program will measure the pipe length precisely. Example: Suppose you want to draw a curved section from the collector to the radiator shown in the following figure. As soon as "Curved Pipe" is selected, the snap points are activated. You are transferred to one of the three collector supply points through a "connection point". You should left click there. Then use the mouse to move around and define a second point, a third point etc, as shown in the following screen:


Once you have provided the last point (through "connection point" snap) on the radiator switch and right clicked, the curved pipe is formed, as shown in the following screen.

In case you want to move slightly the above curved pipe, left click to select it -the characteristic small squares (grips) appear- and drag (using the left mouse key) any of these squares. The curved section moves accordingly.

- 74 - FINE - HVAC

Right click to make the final pipe location permanent.

4.5.5 Connecting network sections Connections between network sections (horizontal, vertical or both) as well as between network parts and receptors can be easily executed by using the AutoCAD "Snap" commands. Example 1: Suppose that the two horizontal parts of the ground plan below, which are placed in different heights, have to be connected.

If you start by "grabbing" the "upper" pipe end and then end up at the "lower" pipe end, the result in the three dimension representation will be as follows:


On the other hand, if the pipe is drawn by using the "lower" pipe as the first end and the "upper" pipe as the second end, the result will be as follows:

Example 2: Suppose the radiator of the ground plan below has to be connected to the bordering column.

- 76 - FINE - HVAC

With the connection point as the first end (using a "connection point" snap), the second end in between and the third end on the column (using a "base point" snap) the section shown below is created:

In the vectograph, the result will be as follows:


Attention! If an "endpoint" or "nearest" snap had been used for the column (in the ground plan above), the connection would not have been properly executed. It would have also been possible to work in 3 dimensions and enter a "perpendicular" snap by showing the column and therefore achieve a proper connection.

4.5.6 Special Commands for Pipe Construction This is actually a set of commands aiming at the facilitated drawing of the installation piping. More specifically, there are two basic commands: Double Pipe ->Supply-Return: A double pipe (e.g. supply-return) can be drawn, when the in between distance is known, by simply defining the routing. Pipe parallel to Wall: A pipe parallel to the wall (walls) marked by the user is drawn, with a given distance from the wall, in printing mm (which depends on the printing scale as well). The program asks for the first point and afterwards the wall or the walls (successively) parallel to which (in a certain fixed distance) the pipe is to be drawn. For instance, if the connection point of the tub is inserted as the first point in the ground plan detail shown below and then the three walls of the room are "marked", a pipe parallel to these walls will be constructed.

- 78 - FINE - HVAC

The reason for that is that the program draws a vertical line from the first point to the parallel line defined by the other two points. Pipe parallel to Points: A pipe is drawn parallel to the points defined by the user (supported by automatic snap), with a given distance from the crooked line defined by these points. The program asks for the first point and then for the other points (successively) parallel to which it is desired to have the pipe drawn. When all points are inserted (and you right click), the distance will be requested. Pipe parallel to Wall (or Points) and Receptor Connection: This is a particularly useful command

similar to the two commands above "Pipe parallel to wall" and "Pipe parallel to points", which, however, enable selecting the receptors to be connected on the routing (piping or wiring) which will be drawn parallel to the walls or the points. Therefore, it is possible to connect a whole set of radiators to the nearest vertical column, or grills to the

corresponding Air-duct, or multiple illuminators to the main panel, with 2-3 moves.


For better understanding of the command function, assume that in a given bathroom with its receptors it is desired to install a pipe parallel to the wall and connect the receptors to this line. Select the "Cold water pipe parallel to points and receptor connection" command and the following options will appear:

• Select receptors: Select the receptors to be connected to the pipe applied in a parallel arrangement against the wall by defining certain points on the wall.

• Enter the 1st point & Enter the next point: Provide the points parallel to which you want to install the pipe. The points are shown on the drawing with an X.

• Distance from a point <1.00>: Provide the distance in printing mm where the pipe is going to be drawn starting from the inserted points.

The program draws the pipe and connects it to the receptors. Connecting receptors to an existing line: This command enables you to select

the receptors to be connected to an already existing routing (piping or wiring). This command requires you to select the receptors and the line to which they will be connected. The program draws network sections from the receptor connection point vertically on the existing line. Suppose that the sprinklers have been placed on the ground plan and you want to have them connected to a central supply pipe. Select the command "Connect

receptors to an existing pipe" and the following options will appear:

• Select receptors: Select the receptors you want to have connected to the existing line.

• Select a pipe: Select the pipe to which it is desired to have them connected. Following these the program will automatically connect the receptors to the central pipe. Multiple pipes: This command supports drawing multiple parallel, inlet or return, hot or cold water pipes etc. The above commands are applicable to almost all the applications which are related to network installation. Moreover there are more specific commands depending upon the application (e.g. Fuel) which are described and analysed in the respective section of each application.

- 80 - FINE - HVAC

4.5.7 Modifying an existing network The user can modify an existing network by using AutoCAD commands and the program will continue identifying this network. Thus, it is allowed to copy, move or erase etc a network section. The usefulness provided by the AutoCAD or IntellCAD "grips" utility should be underlined (e.g. to move the mutual junction point of two pipes etc). During drawing the rules below should be followed: Pipes supplying the receptors (radiators/ grills/ electr. devices) should be connected to the touch points of these receptors. Obviously only one pipe can be connected to a touch point. The connection with the touch points which appear as "stars" in the ground plan can be executed with the AutoCAD "snap" function which can be activated by clicking the middle mouse button (for a 3-button mouse) or by pressing Shift and the right mouse button (for a 2-button mouse). Therefore, if you press the middle button while drawing a pipe, the screen shown next will appear, where the "touch point" is selected (NODE option for an English menu). If the receptor is equipped with more than one touch points, as in the water supply for example (hot and cold water), then each touch point is used for the respective network (e.g. hot and cold water network regarding the water supply), regardless of which of the two touch points will be selected (the network automatically defines the touch point, that is the point where the hot water pipe ends up and this touch point automatically becomes the receptor hot water supply). Piping can be branched to one another and extend in any way as long as they do not form loops, something which does not apply to reality anyway. If however a mistake occurs, the program (during the identification procedure) will perform all checks and indicate the mistake and its location to the user. A necessary step before the "identification" is defining the point (a) where the network starts, that is the supply point (a). In reality, this point corresponds to the water supply gauge-s, to the heating circulator, to the main electrical panel and so on. This point appears on the screen as a square symbol (see figure). In the case of two different networks (e.g. hot and cold water network in the water supply) the respective supply points, bearing a different symbolism, should be defined for each network. Especially for water supply, the hot water supply points to heaters or boilers should be defined. Generally, in every application, the menu includes exactly the options of the specific application, so that the user can be easily guided when drawing any installation. Although there are no limitations regarding the order of actions followed in drawing an installation, the following order is suggested: 1. Receptor Placement (radiators, hydraulic receptors, grills etc) 2. Drawing the piping columns 3. Drawing the horizontal sections 4. Defining the Supply point(s) 5. Network Identification


The program senses the receptor supplies (hydraulic receptors, electrical receptors, gas devices etc) by their features within the numeric libraries. Also, in the case of heating and air-conditioning it automatically senses the load of each space and allocates it equally over the respective radiators or units (for FCUs), or grills (for air-ducts). This allocation may change through the calculating environment, as the user desires.

4.6 Receptors The "Receptors" selection shows the screen including the receptors of each installation (radiators in the Single-pipe and Twin-pipe system, Electrical Receptors in the Electrical Wirings and so on) in the form of slides. Since the receptors of an installation can not usually fit to a screen, it is possible to move to following pages where additional receptors appear. Example: In the ‘’One Pipe System’’, the "Receptors" selection leads to the screen below, where the user selects the Radiator which is desired to be placed in the ground plan.

Placing a receptor can be done simply through the following steps: 1. In the receptor (radiator) screen select a receptor (radiator), press <Enter> and

then press "OK" (or alternatively double click). Then it can be observed that the receptor moves on the ground plan with the graphic cursor.

2. If you move the mouse properly, the receptor can be carried in such a way that its base point (which coincides with the cross of the graphic cursor) can be placed in the desired point. Right click to confirm your selection.

3. If you move the mouse again, the receptor will rotate around the base point. Thus, if you confirm the angle in which you desire to have the receptor placed (again by right clicking), the receptor "freezes" in its final position.

The above procedure is exactly the same as the block insertion procedure in AutoCAD (or IntelliCAD), except that it is not required to zoom in or zoom out the drawing.

- 82 - FINE - HVAC

It should be emphasised that you can insert and place either the whole receptor or only its touch points in the ground plan. This is significant when an existing ground plan includes drawn hydraulic receptors and there is no need to redraw them, but just move the touch points so that the information for the respective supplies will be available. Selecting the whole receptor or the touch points only is facilitated by the correspondent indications on the upper side of the receptor screen, which should be activated by using the mouse properly.

Note: Since names might be "cut" in the receptor slides, on the upper part of the dialogue box exists the indication "Current symbol" with the full name of the selected receptor next to it.

Regarding the installation height of a receptor, it should be pointed out that receptors are always installed in the current height. The current height can be changed with the "Change Height" command. Example: Suppose that a grill has to be installed in 2.85 m height from the floor. After selecting "Change Height" or executing the "elev" command by typing it in the command line and inserting value 2.85, press <Enter> in the receptor screen "on" a grill and afterwards press "OK" (or alternatively double click). Then you can see the grill moving on the ground plan together with the graphic cursor.

If the mouse is moved properly the grill can be carried in such a way that its base point (which coincides with the cross of the graphic cursor) will be placed in the respective point.


It can now be observed that if the mouse is moved, the grill rotates around the base point. Thus, if you confirm the angle in which you desire to install the receptor, the grill can be seen in its final position.

It is possible not to install the whole receptor if it already exists in the architectural ground plan (if it has been drawn by the Architect), but activate the "Touch Points Only" indication in the upper side of the receptor selection window, so that only the receptor touch point will be selected in order to install it in the appropriate position.

- 84 - FINE - HVAC

Installing a receptor has been mentioned above. There are also two extensions of this command which are described below: Installing many receptors in grid: In certain applications (Air-ducts, Electrical) it is also possible to draw grids from grills, illuminators etc, thus producing detailed ground plan draws with limited moves. The same task can be executed by the "Symbols grid" command in the "Plus" menu but, in this case, the receptor should be inserted in the drawing in advance. Automatic receptor installation: In certain applications it is possible to install the receptors automatically in the ground plan and more specifically to install radiators or fan coils in the spaces, grills or illuminators in the centre of the spaces. The program installs automatically the respective receptors and then the user can proceed to any modifications (e.g. move, erase etc).

4.7 Accessories The "Accessories" command selects the accessories to be also inserted in the drawings, which applies exactly the same to the receptors. Example: In the Twin Pipes System application, the accessories screen is as follows:

It should be pointed out that accessories have "touch points" upon which the piping will be connected so that the network can be identified. A symbol may also have more than one touch points (e.g. a collector), in which case the accessory will be numbered as a junction point in the "Net Recognition". The fact that the program provides the capability of cutting off the line automatically when a symbol is inserted on the line, exactly where the accessory interjects is of extreme significance. This capability is defined by the indication of the accessories box "Brake Pipe". If this option is activated, then the program will automatically "Brakes" the pipe when the accessory is placed.


Moreover, the "Move Symbol" indication is in the same box, which defines whether the accessory will be moved in relation to the position it was initially placed (so that it will be placed parallel and on top of the pipe) or the pipe will be moved (so that the accessory can be attached). After a few tests the user can easily understand the function and usefulness of these utilities. Example: Suppose that a valve has to be inserted in a cold water pipe. First of all, in the accessories screen activate the options "Brake Pipe" and "Move Symbol" which can be found in the upper part.

After that, select the faucet in the corresponding position with the mouse and press "OK". As it is shown in the following screen, the program requires you to indicate, by using the mouse through the appearing frame, the pipe on which you want to place the symbol (the point where the pipe will be "touched" is not important).

- 86 - FINE - HVAC

If the pipe is defined, the following screen will appear, where the selected accessory can be seen on the graphic cursor, while the program requires you to confirm the accessory position on the pipe (it is not necessary to be on or near the pipe, but simply in the "height" you desire to have the accessory placed).

Right click to see the result of the following screen with the accessory placed and the pipe "interrupted" between the touch points of the accessory.

Note: The program identifies the angles and the tees automatically according to the piping direction (and the calculating environment is automatically updated), therefore it is not necessary to insert angles and tees unless you want them to appear in the drawing.


4.8 Symbols "Symbols" include various general symbols, configurations (e.g. boiler-spaces, high-pressure units) and other drawings that can be used in the corresponding installation. Example. Selection of a high-pressure unit for Water supply. From the option "Symbols" and by choosing "Details", the following "Details" screen appears.

By choosing the first (Boiler-Chiller-Cooling Tower) detail, the following screen appears:

- 88 - FINE - HVAC

4.9 General Symbols The "General Symbols" option "opens" the general symbol library, which includes sub-libraries in which the user can save (and recall) various useful drawings. The difference between these libraries and the other program libraries is that there is no link to numerical data here, but they contain only drawings. Example. Supposing that you want to take a look at the up-down arrows. For this purpose enter library 1 of the general symbols named "arrows" and then view on the screen the corresponding symbols that exist in the library (use the buttons <Next> and <Back> to observe all the "pages" of the library).

4.10 Network Recognition and Numbering Since the network has been drawn according to the current rules and the supply point has been determined, the "Net Recognition" option converts the network in the required standard pattern and updates appropriately the calculation sheets. During updating, junction points and receptors are numbered on the ground plan.

Notes: 1. If a receptor is not numbered, that means that the receptor is not connected to the network. 2. If a network section has a different colour, it cannot be connected to the network. Connect it or select "Break at selected point" at the connection point with the previous pipe. 3. Junction points are numbered with font 4MS1 by the programme. If you want to change the character size and the font type, you will have to open the NODE.DWG file from the AutoCAD and modify the attributes of the block. 4. If the user wants to move the number of a junction point or a receptor, he can do it with the gribs facility from AutoCAD. If he wants to turn the number, he can do it with the AutoCAD DDATTDEF command, if only one number is concerned.


However, turning numbers can be even easier with the CNA command (or from the PLUS menu, in the Text sub-options). Thus, if you want to change the angle of the numbering text for some receptors or accessories, run the command "Text -> Change Numbering" in PLUS and the program will prompt you to select the "Characters Size" for the numbering of the receptors or the accessories, that you will select later on (e.g. (CNA45 ) for a 45º turn). Following, the programme asks you to select the receptors or the accessories in which you want to change the numbering character size. If you want to select all the receptors and the accessories, insert ALL in the "select objects" prompt. We should point out that, if the numbering angle is changed, this will be retained even if the identification procedure is repeated.

4.11 Calculations The "Calculations" option leads you in the corresponding calculating environment (ADAPT/FCALC), which means that the window of the current application «opens» automatically (e.g. for the Twin-pipe the following window is shown), while FINE always remains "open".

In order to transfer the data from the drawings, you should select "Update from Drawing" in the menu "Files" of the corresponding calculating application (In order to carry out the corresponding calculations, answer "Yes" to the question "Calculate" that appears). From now on, apply all the capabilities mentioned in the ADAPT/FCALC User's Guide for the respective application. It has to be noticed that the numbering of the sections, the lengths of the network sections, the receptors with their supplies and the accessories (from the piping routing) are transferred in the calculation sheets. Especially for Heating and Cooling, the loads (thermal or cooling loads respectively) of radiators (or fan-coils – grills, in air-conditioning) are automatically transferred. In this last case, since there are more than one radiators (fan coils / grills) in the same space, the loads are distributed equally (e.g. if there are two radiators and space losses equal to 2000 kcal/h, each radiator will automatically undertake 1000kcal/h). Of course, if the user wants to, he can intervene in the calculations in order to make any modifications.

- 90 - FINE - HVAC

Example: Having identified a water supply network ground plan, "Calculations" leads you to the corresponding calculating environment of the following screen:

4.12 Drawing Update This option is used for the automatic updating of the ground plans with the required sizes (pipe diameter, types-outputs of radiators/FCU and grills etc.) according to the calculations. This information is saved automatically in a determined layer in which the user can intervene, according to the above-described overall layer management. Note: The layer that is installed has as first synthetic the name of the application (e.g. MSOL for Single Pipe System), as second synthetic the floor (e.g. FL001 for the first floor, FL002 for the second, etc.), and as third synthetic the "DIMENSIONS". Thus, the dimensions of the pipes for the Single Pipe System and for the first floor, are in the layer "MSOL_FL001_DIMENSIONS". Thus, by intervening in the above layer you can change its colour, character style, etc. Example: Updating the above mentioned drainage network ground plan will automatically update the dimensions of the pipes with the results of the corresponding calculation column for each section.

4.13 Legend The "Legend" option creates a legend with all the symbols that have been used in this specific project. By selecting it, the program asks for the location where the Legend is going to be inserted. Use the mouse to define the location and the legend will appear automatically on your screen, exactly under the location point.

4.14 Vertical Diagram This option is used for the automatic creation of the vertical diagram of the installation and in its appearance on the screen, within few seconds. In case there is already a vertical diagram, the program asks if you want to update it. It is obvious that, in order for the vertical diagram to be created, you should draw and identify a network and enter the calculation sheets, so that the program knows all the data needed for the vertical diagram creation (pipe dimensions, junction points numbering, etc). By the “creation” command the window of the vertical diagrams manager appears on screen:


This window is composed of two parts: - The part with the network tree - The part with the vertical diagram The user can intervene on the output of the diagram, through the following icons (commands):

Enables or disables various branches of the network

Changes the order of the columns of subnetworks in the vertical diagram

Changes the subnetworks direction connection on the vertical colums (right or left)

Reads the information of each node

Describes the subnetworks

The changes done in the vertical diagram with thehelp of the above icons are displayed in real time, in the second part of the window. On the upper side of this window there are also icons for processing the diagram:

By keeping the button pressed, a yellow arrow appears on the selected node of the drawing

Real time pan.

Real time zoom.

- 92 - FINE - HVAC

Zoom window.

Zoom extends.

In addition, in the upper-left side there are some other icons having to do with the appearance of the screen. More specifically:

Hides the left part of the window

The network tree is displayed on the left side (being editable) and the diagram drawing on the right side.

The level names are displayed on the left with their heights which can be edited and the diagram on the right.

The various subnetworks are shown on the left (with their description and location with respect to the vertical column) and the diagram on the right.

The serial numbers of the receptors appear on the left and the diagram on the right

The layers appear on the left with their attributes and the diagram on the right

We are “transferred” to any node of the network tree

Finally there are some options for the initialization of the vertical diagram, its recreation and the definition of the drawing parameters. In particular, these parameters depend on the application and include the following options: Layers:

The user can define the drawing scale, the colours corresponding to the various layers and the height of the texts (in mm drawn on paper) placed on the vertical diagram. Drawing dimensions:


The drawing dimensions that will be considered on the creation of the diagram, are also defined on mm drawn on paper. Blocks:

There can be defined on each application different network starting points and type of tables. The user can choose from a set of dwg drawings. Others:

- 94 - FINE - HVAC

A set of attributes concerning the form of the vertical diagram is defined, such as: • Condensation of the columns

• The number of branches over whom the node is considered as collector.

• Whether the z height information will be considered in the diagram creation

• Whether the subnetworks pipes on the vertical diagram will be placed over or under the receiptors

Finally, it should be mentioned that during the editing procedure concerning the vertical diagram manager, if there are mistakes the program displays the proper messages and warnings. Library Symbols The drawing information of the library symbols is stored into the drawings as blocks. Thus, the existence of a block can inform us about the type of the symbol or about the location of some elements on the drawing, according the the following table:


ORIO In a drawing there must be at least 2 ORIO blocks. GRD This block gives us the reference axe “y”, that is all the symbols of a

level will be placed in such a way that the GRD will be identified as long as “y” with the height of the level.

PK Cold water flow. PZ Hot water flow. PTOUT

Water exit.

PTIN Water entrance. LAYERS SYMBOLS Receptors symbols PIPES_1 Pipes of primary network PIPES_2 Pipes of secondary network ATTRIBS Diameters (or sizes). NUMBERS Network numeration LEVEL_LINES Line of levels LEVEL_TEXTS Text of levels SPACE_LINES Lines of space description names. SPACE_TEXTS Space description names. Note: The names of the vertical diagram drawing files, are defined automatically by the program in the following way: Name of Project + XV + . + DWG, where X is a character depending on the application. For example TEST1DV.DWG means the vertical diagram of the twin pipe application (D) of the project TEST1.bld.

4.15 Library Management The "Application Library Management" option leads to a submenu including the options "Numerical data" and "Drawing data". The first option leads to the libraries with all the numerical data of the materials and the organization of the FINE or ADAPT libraries (see the chapter concerning "Libraries" in the volume of the ADAPT-FCALC calculations). The "Drawings" option leads to a dialog box where the following data can be seen, regarding each application:

- 96 - FINE - HVAC

Kind of Symbol: This the category type where the symbol belongs to (e.g. accessory, receptors, high-pressure unit, configurations etc). Location of Symbol: It refers to the position of the symbol, which you want to view or insert in the library, in the drawings as well as in the numerical data library. Symbol name: This is registered in the "numerical data" libraries. There is a set of commands on the right side of the screen, which enable the insertion of a slide in a position within the library. More specifically: Slide screen: The slide screen provides a dynamic zoom in the drawing. It initially carries out "zoom all" in the whole drawing. Afterwards it is possible to define the screen desired to be saved as a slide by using the zoom. This capability is particularly useful in case it is desired to insert a lot of symbols at the same time. Enter Slide: This option enables saving the current screen as a slide. On the left side, a set of commands helps you to define a block and insert it in the library. It consists of the following commands which should be followed in the order given. Node Number: Determine the position where the numbering of the receptor should be shown, as well as the font type and height (or simply press <Enter> twice after providing the receptor location).


Touch point: Insert and place the receptor touch points (connection points).

Attention! If you do not want to have the touch points printed in the final drawings, the "touchpoints" layer should be de-activated (select "Freeze") in the AutoCAD "Layer Manager".

Insertion point: Determine the point according to which the drawing will be inserted. Select Object(s): Select which entities of your drawing will comprise the Block. It should be pointed out that, in case the symbol type stands for a receptor or an accessory, the receptor tpoints (touch points) as well as the receptor attributes should be also determined. Enter drawing: Run this command to save the selected block in the respective library directory.

Note: The drawing libraries of the Χ application are in the directory \AFINE14\LIBS\DWG\DBX. For example, in the Single-Pipe System application (as well as in the Twin-Pipe System application), where Χ=C, drawings are saved in the directory \AFINE14\LIBS\DWG\DBC and they have the following names: GC1_a??.DWG, for the drawings of accessories 1,2,3,..,?? etc. GC3_a??.DWG, for the drawings of radiators 1,2,3,..,?? etc. GC3_c??.DWG, for the connection points of the receptors 1,2,3,..,?? etc. By the way, note that the numerical data libraries of the X application are in the directory \4M\LIBS\DATAF\DBX*.*, e.g. the numerical data libraries of the Single-Pipe System application are in the directory \4M\LIBS\DATAF\DBC*.* and so on.

The option "General Symbols" leads to submenus with groups of existing drawings, where every management capability mentioned above is available, except for the touch point. Furthermore, the user can directly define the symbol name by entering the respective position in the menu (in contrast with the application libraries where the name is read in the numerical data sheet).

Note: Apart from the symbols for receptors and accessories, each application includes some details as well (see secondary option "Details”). However, if every available detail of FINE was loaded on the PC during the installation of the programme, the hard disc would be loaded with a huge number of files. To avoid that, only the more fundamental details are initially loaded. Therefore, the user of the package can look through all the details saved in the programme CD, select the ones needed for the applications he works on and incorporate them himself. In particular, in the directory "leptomer" there are more than 200 details, which correspond to an equal number of DWG files. The user can view them on the screen (by directly selecting "Open" while working on the CD) and follow the above described procedures in case he wants to save some of them in the program libraries on his PC


5. AutoNET: Network Installations

In the previous chapter the AutoNET option group was described in general as all the relevant commands and facilities concerning the drawing and calculation of the Mechanical installations were presented. In this chapter AutoNET commands are described in relation to the special features of each application, which means that the general features are analysed and the special features applying to each installation network are pointed out. Naturally, as already mentioned in the previous chapter, AutoNET adopts a uniform general drawing method, which helps the user significantly in learning as well as in using the package. However, it is rather obvious that each installation has certain characteristics which could not possibly be included in a general frame (e.g. single-pipe system circuits, two/three-dimensional drawing of air-ducts, siphons in drainage etc). These particular characteristics are described in this section. However, in order to fully comprehend them, you should first study the general AutoNET features presented in Chapter 4. Therefore, the special characteristics of each application are presented in the following sections according to the order the respective applications are located in the AutoNET application menu. First of all, it is useful to present a particular example, which will be utilised as reference.

5.1 Typical Example The typical example presented in this section helps the user comprehend in practice the contents of Chapter 4 and familiarise faster with whatever is going to be mentioned in the following sections. Note that, in order to simplify the example, only the simpler pipe commands are used. The user, however, can try later on the more complex (but more precise) commands, such as "parallel to wall", "parallel to points" etc. This particular example concerns a simple piping installation of the following ground plan:

- 100 - FINE - HVAC

Suppose that this is the ground plan of the first floor of a two-storeyed building, for which the values are 0,00 and 3.00 m, have been inserted in "Building Definition". If you run the command "elev" and type 0.15 as current height in the command line, you will be transferred to level 0.15 m. Then select from the Receptor list two radiators and install them according to Chapter 5. Type 1.10 in the command line, run "elev" once more and select another radiator (for the bathroom). So far the receptors have been installed at the appropriate levels.

Carry on to draw the piping. Before selecting the command "Pipe", run the command "elev" and insert value 2.30 as height to start drawing.


Type @0,0,2.30 in the command line to "elevate" to level 2.30 m and continue vertically and parallel to the wall (it is useful to activate "ortho"). As soon as you reach the radiator connection point and left click to terminate the horizontal section, activate "Connection point" snap and left click again aiming at the star - the connection point of the appliance. Finally, right click to stop the drawing of the piping, since the pipe ends at the radiator.

Run the command "Pipe" again (the last command can be repeated using the right mouse key, so there is no need to select it from the menu) and draw the section from the main pipe to the room Then, run the command ‘’Pipe’’ from the radiator connection point (with snap) to the horizontal pipe (with "perpendicular" snap). Now remains the other radiator into the room.

- 102 - FINE - HVAC

To facilitate snap, you can zoom in at the same time.

Select "Zoom/Previous" to return to the previous screen and continue drawing the piping parallel to the walls until you end up at the connection point to the next radiator. After all this, the created ground plan is shown below:


If you run the "3D View" command, and after the layer "Walls-Pillars" is deactivated through the "Layer Management" command, monitoring becomes better since the walls are removed and the displayed screen is as follows:

In order to complete the installation, the only thing required is to define a supply point so that the network identification is later possible. If you run the command "Supply Point" and point at the respective endpoint of the pipe with "Endpoint" snap, you will see the symbol for the supply point (small square) inserted on the pipe endpoint, which indicates that a supply point has been determined. The installation for the one Apartment has been drawn. In the same way, the other Apartments installations can be drawn, starting from a different gauge. Suppose there is an identical installation on the second floor (e.g. typical apartment). Run the AutoNET command "Copy Floor" and select the whole installation (by typing "ALL"). The installation of floor 1 will be automatically transferred to floor 2. (You can easily find that out by activating floor 2 through the "Building Definition" option and then return to floor 1.) Floor copying regards only networks and is carried out whether there is an architectural ground plan of floor 2 or not (as in this particular example).

- 104 - FINE - HVAC

Starting from floor 1 you can draw a new horizontal section, parallel to the existing one, so that the floor 2 gauge can be placed. After that, starting from the second endpoint of the pipe, you can draw the column which will rise up to floor 2. Use the option "Column" and in the prompt "Enter First Height" type value 0 (this is the absolute level where the pipe endpoint is, i.e. if floor 1 was on level 1.5 m and the horizontal pipe at floor level 0, you should type 1.5) and in "Enter Second Height" the value (3+2.8). Then the arrow symbol for the column appears.

Move to floor 2 (by activating it through the command "Building Definition"). Then you can see that the column is actually passing through floor 2. After all this, select "Net Recognition" so that the network is automatically numbered.


Attention! In order to make sure that identification has actually taken place, check if the junction points and the receptors are numbered. Otherwise, you should check the piping connections, starting from the point where there are no numbers. If there are no numbers at all, the supply point (network starting point) is not connected properly. In this case, you should delete it (using "Erase") and set it again at the network "Endpoint" using the respective command.

Note: In case a network branch or branches do not have the colour they had prior to the identification and instead of this they are white, this means that the connection to the rest of the network has not been established correctly. In particular, this means that the pipe which is white either is not connected to the supplying pipe at all or it is connected but the supply pipe is not cut at the connection point. In this case break the pipe at the connection point ("Break at selected point").

Provided the network is numbered, you can enter the calculation sheet and make sure that the identified building has been transferred in the respective sheets of the Fuel Gas application (following the above numbering) so that it can be calculated.

Attention! In order to carry out the calculations, you should define at least one parameter in the network data (e.g. pipe type selection), even by typing again the same value (to "force" the programme perform the calculations).

If you return to the drawing, the command "Update Ground Plan" transfers the calculated pipe cross sections to your ground plans. Using the auxiliary grips described in Chapter 2, you can easily move any overlapping numbers. Naturally, you can use any other AutoCAD or IntelliCAD command to edit the above data since they are considered as "text".

Finally, the secondary option "Vertical Diagram" -> "New" creates the vertical chart of the installation.

- 106 - FINE - HVAC

You can see that numbering is retained in the vertical chart and corresponds fully to the numbering in ground plans and calculations. In addition, you can use the grips or even move whole sections (using the command "Move"), in order to "round up" the various sections of the vertical chart if you think that they are "overspread". In order to return to the ground plan, run the relevant command under the option "Drawings".

Note: The Vertical Chart is saved as a separate drawing (DWG) and is found in the project directory. The name of this file results from the name of the application, its type and the letter V (for Vertical). .

A simple example concerning the drawing of a Fuel Gas installation in two apartments on two floors was examined above. Following the same methodology, the designer can work with more apartments per floor and more floors. In the following sections the above example is utilised as a reference prototype whereas the necessary additions or modifications are presented for each application.


5.2 Single-Pipe System The general AutoNET principles apply in the Single-Pipe System application as well. However, there are several variations which result from the fact that the standardisation applied in the Single-Pipe System application differs from the others significantly. In general, a Single-Pipe Heating System network is drawn following the order described below:

• Install radiators on the ground plans (automatically or manually)

• Radiators are installed on the ground plans either by running the "Radiators" command and selecting from the appearing dialog box the type which will be used (size will be estimated in the calculating environment) or by running the "Automatic radiator installation" command and selecting the spaces where automatic installation will take place (on the condition that spaces are defined on the ground plan and their thermal losses are calculated).

• Draw induction and return columns • Define the location where the vertical columns will end as well as their starting

and ending points. Note that column heights should be provided in relation to the heights determined for the building floors.

• Install collectors on the ground plans Install the induction and return collectors which are found on the various building floors on the ground plan. Collector installation is carried out by running the "Accessories" command and selecting the respective desired collectors from the appearing dialog box. The collector connection points are just drawing symbols, so you can connect more than one circuit pipes to each connection point.

• Draw horizontal sections from collectors to columns Draw the network branch connecting the induction collector to the induction column as an induction pipe. Regarding the pipe drawing, select the first point through collector "Connection point" snap and then "Perpendicular" snap at the column. Column is not represented by the arrow but by the dot displayed in the middle of the arrow (this is the projection of the vertical column on the ground plan).

• Draw circuits, starting from the induction collector and moving towards the first radiator, where you should stop (you can then see the circuit curved section forming until the first radiator), continuing from the first radiator to the second and so on until the last curved section ending at the return collector has been drawn, for each circuit. Circuits can be drawn using either straight or curved pipes.

• Define the induction and return point of the installation Define the induction and return points by using the option “Start Point” and selecting the endpoint of the respective pipe through “End Point” snap.

- 108 - FINE - HVAC

• Net Recognition If the command “Net Recognition” is activated, the programme identifies the circuits as well as the radiator locations in the spaces and prepares linking files to the calculation sheets.

• Calculations Select the option “Calculations” to call the calculation programme of the Single-Pipe application, where data are transferred to the calculation sheet when the option "Update from Drawing", under "Files", is selected.

• Update Drawings If this option is selected, the calculated radiator types and loads as well as the circuit data are transferred to the ground plan. If the ground plan has been updated before, the programme prompts you to update the ground plan erasing the old data.

• Insert arrows on circuits Run this command to insert arrows automatically on the circuits, following the direction from the induction collector to the return collector.

• Create Vertical Diagram The vertical chart is created according to the DXF file, generated by the calculation programme.

Note: The criteria for the automatic radiator installation are as follows:

• In each space at least one radiator is installed or more in case the space losses exceed a minimum limit which can be determined by the user (the default space losses limit is 2000 cal).

• Radiators are installed under windows (provided, of course, there are any) and their type is such that their height is shorter than the window rize.

Regarding the Single-Pipe System application, the above actions are performed through the AutoNET options as well as the respective toolbar with the icon pull-down menus, which are displayed in the right window and were described in section 4.3. The following example helps you to understand the methodology for drawing a Single-Pipe System installation using Fine. Example 1 (with automated Circuit drawing): With respect to the example of the following screen, where three radiators and two collectors are installed, the circuit can be drawn very easily. You should mark the location of the induction collector first, then the radiators (one-by-one, successively) and finally the location of the return collector. This way, the Single-Pipe System circuit is created automatically (see screen):


In each pipe section (e.g. between two radiators) that will be created, the command considers by default two intermediate auxiliary points, that is points which you can use later in order to modify straight routes, as shown in the following example screen.

If you want, you can insert more than 2 auxiliary points during circuit creation.

- 110 - FINE - HVAC

Example 2 (with simple, non-automated circuit drawing): Suppose you want to draw a Single-Pipe System circuit which will supply the two following radiators, through the respective induction and return collectors shown at the bottom left side.

Run the command "Circuit Curve pipe". Start from a connection (supply) point of the lower collector (suppose the induction collector) through "Connection point" snap and end at the connection point of the first radiator. You can then see the first section of the circuit drawn.

The remaining sections are drawn similarly until you reach a connection point of the return collector.


As mentioned in both examples, only one of the radiator connection points is used. The following standard steps should be followed next: Supposing we are still in example 2, there is still the connection of the collector to the column to be established and the induction and return points to be determined. First place the columns. Run the command "Supply Main Pipe", providing heights 0 and 3 m for the induction column, and the command "Return Main Pipe", also inserting heights 0 and 3 m.

- 112 - FINE - HVAC

Then connect the collectors to the columns. For the "Supply Main Pipe” select "Supply Pipe" and activate a "Perpendicular" snap from the "Connection Point" of the Induction Collector to the "Supply Main Pipe". For the "Return Main Pipe" select "Return Pipe" and activate a "Perpendicular" snap from the "Connection Point" of the Return Collector to the "Return Main Pipe".

Determine the horizontal sections which supply the columns and come from the Boiler-room. Activate "Perpendicular" snap and select "Supply Pipe" to connect them to the "Supply Main Pipe" and "Return Pipe" to connect them to the "Return Main Pipe". Determine the "End Point" of the induction pipe exiting the Boiler-room as "Start Point" and the "Endpoint" of the return pipe entering the Boiler-room as "End Point". After all this, you can identify the Single-Pipe System Network by selecting the "Net Recognition" command in the AutoNET menu.


Apart from the main features, which were presented in the above example, the user should also be aware of the following:

• The space loads are allocated equally over the radiators installed in the space. After that, the user may intervene within the calculating environment and allocate the total load over radiators exactly as he desires.

• The programme considers as space load the respective, (probably) modified, value in the Thermal Losses sheet and not the one which the programme had initially "read" from the ground plan.

• Up to 7 radiators may correspond to a single circuit, whereas no more than 15 circuits are allowed for each floor/column.

• In case the radiators, to be connected with a curved pipe, are on the same level, the pipe should be placed on the level of the first radiator. For the second radiator to be connected, a circuit straight pipe should be used so that elevation or lowering to the second radiator is possible. If there is no connection, a message will automatically appear indicating the point where the problem is located with a symbol of a circle with radii. In case you remedy the problem at this point, run the "Erase" command to delete the symbol.

• In any case, vertical columns (induction-return) should be drawn (only in the Single-pipe System), even if they do not actually exist, so that the collectors can be connected on them.

• In order to create the vertical chart, export the vertical chart file to a DXF file by selecting the option "New DXF file" within the calculating environment and while the window "Vertical Diagram" is active (this applies only to the Single-pipe System application).

Finally, for the user's convenience, the programme displays a series of error messages in the following cases: - If the pipes are not connected to each other (the point is highlighted) - The message "WRONG SYMBOL" appears in case:

• induction or/and return pipes end at a radiator (only circuits should end there)

• more or less than 2 circuit pipes end at a radiator or an accessory (there should be two circuit pipes, one coming and one leaving)

- The message "WRONG CONNECTION" appears and the programme highlights the exact point where the error has occurred in the following cases:

• induction and return pipes end at an accessory at the same time

• pipes of different types (induction, return, circuit) end at the same point

• more or less than 2 circuit pipes end at the same point

- 114 - FINE - HVAC

Note: The automated commands (e.g. radiator installation) are based on a number of criteria which are "open" to the user's preferences to an extent. For example, the user might want to have more than one radiators automatically installed in one space provided the space load is greater than 2000 Kcal/h. The value 2000 should be inserted in the respective position of the "Autofine.ini" file which is in the directory \FINE…. As you can see as soon as the "ini" file is opened, among the other applications, there is a section regarding the Single-pipe System: [Single-pipe System] RadiatorThermalOutput=2000 RadiatorSelection=9,10,11,12 ;Distance between radiator type text and radiator in printing mm SymbolToTextDy=5 ;Radiator type text height in printing mm TextHeight=2 ; Distance between pipes in printing mm PipeDistance=1 ; Pipe distance from wall or points in printing mm PipeDistanceFromWall=1 Arrows1=6,1,5 Arrows2=14,13,17 NodeBlockName=Node The user can modify the "logical" parameters by editing the above text through Wordpad. Note that the items which can be determined by the user (parametrically) are the following: Radiator Thermal Output: Provides the output limit above which a second radiator should be selected. Radiator Selection: Provides the preference order which will be used for the selection of a radiator type from the library (the first radiator or the first radiator that fits under the window is selected) Symbol Text: Insert the distance between the location of the text (containing the radiator type) and the radiator. Text Height Insert the height of the text where the radiator type will be shown. Arrows: Provide the arrow type for the induction and return columns (arrows1, arrows2) of the first, the intermediate and the last building floor.


5.3 Twin-Pipes System The basic AutoNET drawing principles apply here as well and there are many similarities to the example of section 5.1. Generally, a typical twin-pipe heating system network (parallel induction-return networks) is drawn according to the following procedure:

• Install radiators on the ground plans (automatically or manually)

• Draw induction columns (simply or parallel to walls, points etc)

• Draw horizontal induction sections (connection of columns to radiators)

• Install accessories (optional)

• Select network starting point (induction point)

• Network identification

• Calculations (pipe lengths and the respective accessory number will be automatically inserted in double in the calculation sheets)

• Ground plan update including transfer of calculated types, radiator loads and pipe dimensions

• Vertical Chart Creation In case that the induction is not parallel to the return network (or if they are parallel and the user wants to draw them), then two independent networks should be drawn (one for the induction and one for the return) as well as two points in the network (induction point and return point). After identification, two networks will be transferred in the calculation sheets (induction with "." and return with "-") according to the valid standardisation required from the calculating environment (see Twin-Pipe System calculating environment). Example: In the following screen appears a section of a Twin-Pipe installation, where we have drawn only the induction section, which however is enough for the analytical calculation of the installation:

- 116 - FINE - HVAC

In the above example radiators are connected to the columns through small horizontal sections. However, there is the possibility of numerous variations, as for example the "umbrella" type system of the following screen, where we have many "upward and downward sections":

The user is absolutely free to draw horizontal and vertical sections as well as columns, according to the example in section 5.1. The network starting point is provided with the command “Induction Point” (Boiler), while a return point is required only if there is a return network.

Apart from the above general functions, the user should also be aware of the following:

• The space loads are distributed equally over the radiators installed within the space. From this point on, the user is able to interfere in the calculating environment in order to distribute the total load over the radiators, exactly as it is desired.

• The program recognises as space load the modified (perhaps) space load which exists in the "Thermal Losses" and not the one which the program had initially “read" from the ground plan.


The program shows error messages in the following cases: - The message “There is a short circuit in the network” appears when there are

closed routes in the induction (or the return) network. - The message “WRONG CONNECTION” appears regarding the point where

pipes of different cases (induction, return) end up. - The message “WRONG SYMBOL” appears in the following cases and the

location where this takes place is pointed out with a circle:

• If more than 2 pipes end up at a radiator connection point

• If 2 similar pipes (e.g. 2 induction pipes) end up at a radiator

• If different pipes (induction and return) end up at an accessory

Attention! Note that if during the “Network Identification” network sections have not the same colour with that they had before, but they are white, it means that these sections are either not connected to the network at all (therefore, they should be connected) or already connected but not cut at the connection point or at the supply pipe. In the last case, break the pipe at the connection point ("Break at selected point").

Note: Here also applies everything mentioned about the parametric definition of criteria in the case of a Single-Pipe System. Parameters are defined in the "Autofine.ini" file which is located in the directory \FINE…, in the folder under the name "Twin-Pipe System". The user can modify the "logical" parameters, interfering in the corresponding text (e.g. with Wordpad) in order to define the output limit over which a second radiator is to be selected, the desired order of radiator types from the library, the text location (with the radiator type) in relation to the radiator, the height of the text where the radiator type will be shown etc. RadiatorThermalOutput=2000 RadiatorSelection=9,10,11,12 ;Distance of radiator type text from the radiator in printing mm SymbolToTextDy=5 ;Height of radiator type text in printing mm TextHeight=2 ; Distance between pipes in printing mm PipeDistance=1 ; Distance of pipes from wall or points in printing mm PipeDistanceFromWall=1 Arrows1=6,1,5 Arrows2=14,13,17 NodeBlockName=Nodedot

- 118 - FINE - HVAC

5.4 Fan Coils There are two different ways to draw a Fan Coil installation. In the first case, induction and return pipes run in parallel routes, high on the walls or suspended ceilings. Therefore, everything mentioned above about the Twin-Pipe network, regarding the installation drawing using the program, applies here as well. In the second case, central pipes are guided to a collector and from there, each Fan Coil is supplied independently through an in-floor pipe. Therefore, the user should install collectors (selection from the accessory library) and connect pipes to FCUs starting from there (through straight or curved sections). Besides, in order to transfer the calculated cooling loads, the user should enter the "FILES" menu (in the Air-conditioning Loads program) and press <Enter> on the option "Fan coils". There he can also select whether he wants to transfer the "Total Loads" (e.g. in case only FCUs are used for cooling) or the "Space Loads" (e.g. in case there is a FCU and a central air-conditioning unit which precools the air induced in the space) or the "Ventilation Loads" (rare case). Otherwise, the user has to enter manually the load which corresponds to each FCU in the calculation sheet. Apparently, in the case of more than one FCU units, the space loads are distributed equally over the FCU units installed within the particular space. From this point on, the user is able to interfere in the calculating environment in order to distribute the total load over the FCUs, exactly as it is desired. Furthermore, the user should also be aware of the following:

• The space loads are distributed equally over the Fan Coils installed within the particular space. From this point on, the user is able to interfere in the calculating environment in order to distribute the total load over the FCUs, exactly as it is desired.

• The program recognises as space load the modified (perhaps) space load which exists in the "Cooling Losses" and not the one which the program had initially “read" from the ground plan.

The program shows error messages in the following cases:

• If there are closed routes in the induction (or the return) network.

• The message “WRONG CONNECTION” appears regarding the point where pipes of different cases (induction, return) end up.

• The message “WRONG SYMBOL” appears in case: - more than 2 pipes end up at a FCU unit connection point - 2 similar pipes (e.g. 2 induction pipes) end up at a FCU - different pipes (induction and return) end up at an accessory


Note: The logical parameters - drawing commands are determined within the "Autofine.ini" file (in the directory \FINE...), in the text section referring to Fan Coils: [Fan Coils] SymbolToWalldX=5 ;mm SymbolToWalldY=5 ;mm ; Distance between pipes in printing mm PipeDistance=1 ; Pipe distance from walls or points in printing mm PipeDistanceFromWall=1 Arrows1=6,1,5 Arrows2=14,13,17 NodeBlockName=Nodedot Note that you should run the "SymboltoWallx" command to determine the fan coil unit distance from the wall by x for the automatic installation in the space (through the corresponding command). The command "SymboltoWally" is similar to the previous one but for the distance by y. The command "NodeBlockName" determines the block which will be used in the network identification.

- 120 - FINE - HVAC

5.5 Air-Ducts An air-duct network can be drawn in one dimension so that it can be identified and transferred to the calculation sheet automatically. Moreover, there is also the possibility to draw in two or three dimensions for detailed and complete air-duct ground plan drawings. These three possibilities can be used independently as well as in combination with each other. The greater interest lies within the automatic creation of a two-dimensional drawing starting from a linear (one-dimensional) one. First draw the linear (one-dimensional) figure, proceed to the network identification, carry out the calculations and update the ground plan with the calculation results (air-duct and grill dimensions). Then run the command "Convert linear into two-dimensional" to receive the two-dimensional drawing of the air-ducts, completely automatically, on the basis of the calculation results. Of course, the user can also use the various commands of "two-dimensional drawing", provided by the program, independently, assisted by the linear network and the calculated dimensions displayed on a different layer on the ground plan. Independently (and only this way) he/she can also use the three-dimensional drawing commands. For more details about the linear, two-dimensional and three-dimensional air-duct drawing consult the next two sections.

5.5.1 Linear Drawing-Identification-Conversion into Two-dimensional The above mentioned regarding the linear network apply here as well. More specifically, a linear air-duct network, either induction or outlet, is drawn according to the following procedure:

• Install grilles on the ground plans (automatically or manually)

• Draw vertical ducts

• Draw horizontal ducts (connection to grills)

• Define the network starting point (induction or outlet point)

• Net Recognition

• Calculations

• Update ground plans concerning transfer of the calculated dimensions The above procedure should be followed separately for the induction network as well as for the outlet network. Example: In the following ground plan grilles are installed on the ceiling, the induction ducts are drawn in one dimension and the induction point (fan) is located, so the induction network is ready for identification.


Suppose that there is an outlet network as well (e.g. with two circular grilles). The above ground plan would look like this:

Note that, in all connections, the branch which runs from the duct to the grilles should be clearly shown (even through a very small section), even if these are practically placed on the duct. The program shows error messages in the following cases:

• The message “WRONG CONNECTION” appears regarding the point where pipes of different cases (induction, outlet) end up.

• The message “WRONG SYMBOL” appears in case: - more than 2 pipes end up at a grill - different pipes (induction and return) end up at an accessory

- 122 - FINE - HVAC

In conclusion, it is pointed out again that in case that there are grills along a duct, these should be connected to the duct, even through very small sections. Yet, they should never be on the duct, because this way they cannot be identified (the program considers a different junction point for the grill and another one for the "grill branch" point on the duct). Regarding network identification and the loads distributed to each grill, everything mentioned for the FCUs applies as well: In order to transfer the calculated cooling loads, the user should enter the "FILES" menu (in the Air-conditioning Loads program) and press <Enter> on the option "Air-ducts". There he can also select whether he wants to transfer the "Total Loads" or the "Space Loads" or the "Ventilation Loads". Otherwise, the user has to enter manually the load that corresponds to each grill in the calculations sheet. The loads and, by extension, the air supplies in the various spaces, are distributed equally over the grills installed in the space. From this point on, the user is able to interfere in the calculating environment in order to distribute the total load over the grills, exactly as it is desired. As long as the linear network has been identified and the ground plans have been updated, run the command "Convert Linear into Two-dimensional" so that the already drawn (and identified) linear air-duct network is automatically converted into a two-dimensional one (taking into account a series of parameters which will be analysed below). Example: The identified air-duct network displayed in the following screen:

will be converted (according to the parameters of the "AutoFine.ini" file which will be described below) into the two-dimensional network shown below:


Note: The logical parameters - drawing commands are determined within the "Autofine.ini" file (in the directory \FINE…), in the text section referring to Air-ducts.

As shown in the following example, in the air-duct text section, the parameter values determine the drawing logic of the two-dimensional drawing: [Air-ducts] ; Angle type to convert single line to 2Dl.

- 124 - FINE - HVAC

AutoCurve=2 ; Ratio of the angle curvature radius to the air-duct width. InnerRadiusToWidth=0.5 CenteredPipeLengthFactor=2.5 WhichPipeToNarrow=Min WhichPipeToWiden=Max ;WhichPipeToNarrow=Max Min Max MostLeft MostRight ;WhichPipeToWiden=Max Min Max MostLeft MostRight ; Curvature radius of the flexible air-ducts route FlexCurve=1 ; Distance between block of flexible ducts FlexBlockDist=0.1 ; Minimum length of flexible duct at their ends. FlexEdgeDist=0.2 NodeBlockName=Node

5.5.2 Two-dimensional Air-duct Drawing Apart from the automatic conversion of the linear network into two-dimensional, the program enables the independent two-dimensional air-duct drawing on the ground plans, even if calculations and ground plan updating have not been previously performed. This is attained with the help of the "Two-dimensional drawing" option, which leads the user to a series of slides, each one of which is linked to an integrated drawing routine. This way, if the user selects a straight duct section, for example, the corresponding drawing routine will prompt for the duct length and width as well as its direction. Respectively, if the user selects an elbow, the corresponding drawing routine will ask for information about the starting point and the size of the respective angle. Moreover, all these procedures can be carried out in a sequence, that is the user can draw the network consecutively and each section or accessory is installed automatically at the point where the previous one ends. Furthermore, the linear network with all the dimensional data is shown on the ground plan. Summing all the above up, it is obvious that drawing air-ducts can be carried out easily and quickly, eliminating possible errors. Before the drawing commands-routines, which correspond to each slide of the two-dimensional drawing menu, are described one by one, the two general principles of the two-dimensional drawing should be summarised: Each air-duct section can be constructed in two different ways: a) As an independent section: In this case the user should provide all the data (e.g. initial width, direction, length etc)


b) Consecutively to an already drawn section: In this case the program reads from the previous section the direction and the initial width of the accessory. Apparently, this procedure offers great convenience, since the majority of the sections are installed consecutively to others. For this reason the default value for the air-duct drawing is the option "Line", that is drawing on the basis of the edge of another air-duct section.

Note: The main lines are placed automatically onto the layer BUILD_FLOORx_BODIES and the auxiliary lines onto the layer BUILD_FLOORx_LIMITS, so that they can be drawn with different line widths (as they are placed by layer).

The two-dimensional drawing commands are described below one by one as well as the way they are applied by the user, with all the required details (the name of the command is noted in brackets, which can be typed in the command line).

• Straight Air-duct (AERE) The AERE command is used to draw straight air-ducts. The program, during drawing, will prompt for the width, the direction and the length of the air-duct. As mentioned above, there are two ways of constructing an air-duct. The first way is as a succession of another air-duct section, so the program "understands" the

starting width and the direction of the construction. In case it is constructed separately, it is obvious that you should provide all data. More specifically, the options the previous command includes, are shown below: Select air-duct endpoint Points/<Line>: Select the endpoint of an already drawn air-duct section. Air-duct length: Insert the air-duct length, either by typing it or using the mouse. But if you want to draw an air-duct separately, you should follow the procedure described below: Select air-duct endpoint Points/<Line>: Type "P" which means that you will insert the Starting Points of the air-duct in detail. First width point: Define the first point of one of the air-duct endpoints Second width point: Define the second point of the air-duct endpoint (width)

• Contractions (AERL, AERR, AERM) These commands are used for air-duct contraction drawing. More specifically, there are three drawing routines available:

Contraction to the left (AERL command)

- 126 - FINE - HVAC

Contraction to the right (AERR command)

Contraction to the middle (AERM command)

The options for this command are: Select air-duct endpoint Points/<Line>: Select the endpoint of the existing air-duct section Ending air-duct width: Insert the ending air-duct width, either by typing it or by using the mouse. The ending width is provided in m. Air-duct length: Provide the contraction length in m. Indicate air-duct direction: Indicate the drawing direction for the air-duct. Air-duct length: Define the air-duct length, either by typing it or by using the mouse. The program suggests the minimum required contraction length. To be precise, the formulas used are shown below: One-sided Contraction, C=(Α-Β)x4 Double-sided Contraction, C=(Α-Β)x2.5 Where C= contraction length, Α= starting width, Β= ending width However, if you want to draw the contraction separately, follow the procedure shown below: Select air-duct endpoint Points/<Line>: Type "P" which means that you will insert the Starting Points of the air-duct in detail First width point: Define the first point of the width of one of the air-duct endpoints. Second width point: Define the second point of the air-duct endpoint (width). Indicate air-duct direction: Define the direction of the air-duct. Air-duct length: Define the air-duct length, either by typing it or by using the mouse. Ending air-duct width: Define the ending width in m.


• Curve (AERC)

If this command is selected, you are able to draw a curved section of an air-duct. In order for the curve to be drawn, the width, the turn angle and the inner turn radius, are required.

The options presented for this command, are the following: Select air-duct endpoint: Select the endpoint of the air-duct Indicate the direction of the air-duct turn: Indicate the direction along which the curve will be drawn Turn angle <90>: Define the turn angle of the curve (the default value is 90 degrees). Inner turn radius <>: Define the inner turn radius of the curve. It should be pointed out that the program suggests the minimum allowed inner radius and the formula RL>=A/2, where RL=inner radius and Α=curve width. If you want to draw the curve separately you will need to define the following: First width point: Define the first point of the width of the air-duct. Second width point: Define the second point of the width of the air-duct. Air-duct direction: Define the turn direction of the curve Turn angle <90>: Define the turn angle of the curve. Inner turn radius: Define the inner turn radius of the curve.

• Curve with equal inner and outer radius (AERS)

Run this command to draw curves of equal inner and outer radius and functions in the same way as the command mentioned above (ΑERC). The only difference is that the outer radius is shorter than that of the previous curve but is equal to the inner radius.

• Angle (AERΖ)

Run this command to draw an angle without an inner radius. To be more precise, both the inner and the outer angles are 90 degrees. It functions similarly to the command above with the difference that there is no prompt for the length of the inner radius.

- 128 - FINE - HVAC

• Angle with inner radius (AERO)

Run this command to draw an angle as before, with the difference that you can now define the inner radius.

• Expansion - Contraction curve (AEROC)

Run this command to draw an expansion or contraction curve. If Α is the ending width and Β the starting width, then the inner radius RL is calculated by the formula RL= 0.75*A and the outer curve by the formula Ro= B + 0.75*A.

Branches in the form of "Trousers”

• “Trousers” with curves (AERCC)

Run this command to draw “trousers” with curves after you have inserted the following data: Select air-duct endpoint Points/<Line>: Select the endpoint of the air-duct by using this command, which has already been mentioned above. Define the width of the first air-duct <Left>/right: Define the width of the first part, either by typing it or by using the mouse. The side where the first part is going to be placed is indicated by the <Left>/right label (the default setting is the left side-Left) as well as by the side which is indicated by the mouse on the screen.

If you wish to switch the placement side, this can be easily done by pressing the <Enter> button or by right clicking. Turn Angle <90>: Define the turn angle of the curve (the default value is 90 degrees). Inner turn radius <>: Define the inner turn radius of the curve. Drawing the second part: Define the Turn angle and the inner turn radius successively, as shown above. If you wish to draw an air-duct separately from another section, type "P" in the "Select air-duct endpoint Points/<Line>" command, which means that you will insert the starting points of the “trousers” in detail. After that, the steps mentioned above will follow.


• “Trousers” with curves at the same level (AERICC)

Run this command to draw “trousers” with curves, just like the previous one, but the two sections are now at the same level. More specifically, the program will add a straight air-duct section to the shorter curved section so that the two separate curved sections end at the same level.

• “Trousers” with curves of equal inner and outer radii (AERSS)

Run this command, as the one before, to draw “trousers” with curves which have equal inner and outer radii.

• “Trousers” with curves of equal inner and outer radii and with sections at the same level (AERISS)

Run this command, as the one before, to draw “trousers” with curved sections at the same level which have equal inner and outer radii.

• “Trousers” with angles (AERZZ)

Run this command, as the one above, to draw “trousers” with angles.

- 130 - FINE - HVAC

• “Trousers” with angles and sections at the same level (AERIZZ)

Run this command, in the same way as the previous one, to draw “trousers” with angles which end at the same level.

• Angled “trousers” with inner radius (AERΟΟ)

Run this command to draw angled “trousers” with inner radius.

• “Trousers” with angles with inner radius and sections at the same level (AERIΟΟ)

Run this command, in the same way as the previous one, to draw “trousers” with angles and inner radius which end at the same level.

• “Trousers” with straight and curved sections (AEREC)

Run this command to draw “trousers” with one curved and one straight section.

• “Trousers” with straight and curved sections at the same level (AERIEC)

Run this command, as the one before, to draw “trousers” with one curved and one straight section which end at the same level.


• “Trousers” with straight section and curve with equal inner and outer radius (AERES)

Run this command to draw “trousers” with one curved section, which has equal inner and outer radii and one straight section.

• “Trousers” with straight and curved sections at the same level with equal inner and outer radius sections (AERIES)

Run this command, as the one before, to draw “trousers” with sections at the same level, one straight and one curved with equal inner and outer radii.

• “Trousers” with straight and angled sections (AEREZ)

Run this command to draw “trousers” with one straight and one angled section.

• “Trousers” with straight and angled sections at the same level (AERIEZ)

Run this command, as the one before, to draw “trousers” with one straight and one angled section, with the difference that the two sections have equal heights.

• “Trousers” with straight section and angle with inner radius (AEREΟ)

Run this command to draw “trousers” with one straight section and one angled section with inner radius.

- 132 - FINE - HVAC

• “Trousers” with straight section and angle with inner radius at the same level (AERΙEΟ)

Run this command, as the previous one, to draw “trousers” with an angled section with inner radius and a straight section, with the difference that the drawn sections have the same height.

• General “Trousers” (ΑΕRP) This selection enables you to draw “trousers” with any kind of curve or angle you wish. The options of this command are the following: Total air-duct width Points\<Line>: Select the endpoint of an air-duct or use the "Points" command to define the air-duct width. Equal Levels? Υes/<No>: Define whether the two sections of the air-duct have equal heights or not. First air-duct type aerE/aerR/aerL/aerM/aerC/aerS/aerA: Define the type of the first “trousers” section. This can be done by typing the capital letter of the corresponding section as shown in the selection box message above. Second section type aerE/aerR/aerL/aerM/aerC/aerS/aerA: Define the type of the second “trousers” section, here too. Air-duct Displacement • AERCEC Displacement

Run this command to draw the parallel displacement of an air-duct, by drawing two curves and a straight section which connects them. In order to make drawing possible, you should insert the air-duct width, the displacement length and the curves angle. The command options are the following:

Select air-duct endpoint Points/<Line>: Select the endpoint of the air-duct or specify two points that define the air-duct width by selecting the "Points" option. Direction of air-duct displacement: Point the direction towards which the air-duct is going to be displaced using the mouse. Displacement length: Insert numerically the length of the displacement or select two points that mark the displacement distance. Turn angle: Define the turn angle of the two curved sections of the displacement Inner turn angle: Specify the inner turn angle. The program recommends the minimum required inner angle.


You can then see the displacement drawn.

• Displacement of curved air-duct with equal inner and outer radius (AERSES)

This command functions as the previous one, with the difference that the curves which are used to draw the displacement have equal inner and outer radii.

• Displacement of angled air-ducts (AERZEZ) This command functions as the one mentioned above, with the difference that angles are used for the drawing of the displacement.

• Displacement of air-ducts with angles and inner radius (AEROEO). This command functions like the one above, with the difference that the angles which are used to draw the displacement have inner radius as well. Elevating-Lowering

• Elevating induction air-duct (ΑΕRPU)

This command creates an elevation cross-section of the induction air-duct.

• Lowering induction air-duct (ΑΕRPD)

This command creates a lowering cross-section of the induction air-duct.

• Elevating outlet air-duct (ΑΕREU)

This command creates an elevation cross-section of the outlet air-duct.

- 134 - FINE - HVAC

• Lowering outlet air-duct (ΑΕRED)

This command creates a lowering cross-section of the outlet air-duct.

• Cross-section of induction air-duct (ΑΕRGU)

This command creates a cross-section for the induction air-duct.

• Cross-section of outlet air-duct (ΑΕRGD)

This command creates a cross-section for the outlet air-duct.

• Flexible air-duct (AERF)

Run this command to draw flexible air-ducts. In order for the program to draw a flexible air-duct, you should provide the width as well as the routing of the flexible air-duct. More specifically, the options of this command are the following:

Select air-duct endpoint Points/<Line>: Select the air-duct endpoint to which the flexible will be connected or specify the two points defining the air-duct width, by using the "Points" option. Specify first point: Specify the starting point of the air-duct routing. Specify next point: Specify the next points. Rounding Radius: Specify the rounding radius at the points where the routing of the air-duct changes. Distance between flexible air-duct sections <0.10>: Specify the distance between the sections of the flexible air-duct which will be drawn or just press <ENTER> to accept the default value the program suggests. After you have done the above, you can see the drawing of the flexible air-duct on your screen.


• Circular Air-duct (AERRC)

The drawing philosophy of a circular air-duct is the same with this of the rectangular air-duct, with the difference that a dotted line, which passes through its middle, is drawn, so that the air-duct can be distinguished from others.

• Contraction of circular air-duct (AERRL, AERRR, AERRM) These commands enable the user to draw circular air-duct contractions. Their function is similar to those for rectangular contractions, with the difference that a dotted line is drawn in the middle of the air-duct. More specifically: The AERRL command draws one-sided contraction to the left The AERRR command draws one-sided contraction to the right The AERRM command draws one-sided contraction to the middle

• Circular air-duct curve (AERRC) A circular air-duct curve is drawn, following the same procedure with the rectangular air-duct drawing, with the difference that a dotted line is drawn in the middle of the curve.

• Convert from circular into rectangular (AERCTRM, AERCTRL, AERCTRR) This command functions in the same way the contraction command does, with the difference that in addition to the contraction of the air-duct it converts the air-duct from circular into rectangular as well.

• Convert from rectangular into circular (AERRTCM, AERRTCL, AERRTCR). This command functions similarly to the previous command.

• Cross-section of circular air-duct (AERKT)

This command draws the cross-section of a circular air-duct.

• Arm (AERB)

Run this command to draw an arm for a circular air-duct branch.

- 136 - FINE - HVAC

• Elastic connector (AERT)

Run this command to draw an elastic connector (e.g. for connecting to a fan).

• Sound absorber (AERN)

Run this command to draw a sound absorber.

• Heating Element (AERTH)

Run this command to draw a heating element.

• Cooling Element (AERPS)

Run this command to draw a cooling element.

Conversion of drawn air-duct sections. • Extension of air-duct The extension of an air-duct can be accomplished with the utilisation of the "Stretch" command. More specifically, type in the command line: stretch This command has the following options: Select objects to stretch by window or polygon Select objects: Select the air-duct endpoint you want to extend, in a window, as shown in the adjacent figure. Base point of displacement: Define a reference point on which displacement will be based. The most common selection is a point on the air-duct endpoint. Second point of displacement: Define the second point, up to which you want the air-duct to be extended.

• Shifting of air-duct sections The "Stretch" command is used in this case too. The selection of the elements which will be shifted is carried out as shown in the adjacent figure. Example: Suppose you want to draw, step by step (that is, without automatic conversion from the linear drawing), the following air-duct network section.


In the "2D drawing" menu select the straight section (first slide). When prompted to select Point<Line>, press "P" to define the starting side with the use of points. The program will ask you to define the first point (which can be a random point, selected by left clicking) and then the second point (which can be selected to be in a distance of 1 m from the first point, in relevant co-ordinates, by typing @0,1). Next, when prompted to “Define direction of construction”, specify a point to the right and finally when prompted to “Specify length”, type 10 (meaning 10m). As you can see on your screen, the next straight section is drawn until now. Now, from the 2D drawing slides, select the “Central Contraction” contraction (4th slide) and when prompted for (point<line>), “click” the line on which the contraction will be installed. When prompted to “Define air-duct ending width”, type 0.7 (that is 0.7 m). Next, in the “air-duct length” prompt, leave the 0.75 value which is the value suggested by the program.

- 138 - FINE - HVAC

Continue drawing, selecting “Curved Trousers” branch (12th slide in the list) this time. Click the line once more and set, in the order the program asks, the “1st Air-duct width (left <Left> as you “go”)” to 0.4 (m), the turn angle to 90 degrees (i.e. leave the default value) and the internal turn radius to 0.20 m (which is also the value suggested by the program) and then the turn angle (for the second air-duct) to 90 degrees also and the inner radius to 0.15 (also the suggested value). After all these you can see that the adjacent drawing has been drawn. Continue drawing providing the 5 m straight section in the same way you drawn the first section, by “pointing” through <Line> instead of <Points>, and finally draw the 90 degrees curve to complete the example. The user may practise by using the other accessories provided by the program, as well as use the “stretch” command in order to realise how easy it is to extend or shorten the various sections.

Note: In case the 2D drawing of the air-ducts is automatically created from the linear, the whole procedure follows certain rules which can be defined by the expert editor of Fine expert. Thus, the "AutoCurve=2" command refers to the angle type (the serial number from the relevant library) to convert the air-duct diagram from linear to two-dimensional. Furthermore, the ratio of the turn angle curvature radius to the air-duct width is defined (InnerRadiusToWidth=0.5) is defined as well as the following parameters: CenteredPipeLengthFactor=2.5 Which Pipe To Narrow = Min (possible values Min, Max, Most Left, Most Right) Which Pipe To Widen = Max (possible values Min, Max, Most Left, Most Right) Additionally, the curvature radius of the routing of flexible air-ducts (FlexCurve=1), the flexible block distance (FlexBlockDist=0.1) and the minimum length of flexible (if any) measured between their ends (FlexEdgeDist=0.2) are also defined. The "NodeBlockName" command specifies the block which will be used for the network identification.

5.5.3 3D Air-duct Drawing Besides the two-dimensional drawing (manually or after the automatic linear drawing conversion), Fine also enables three-dimensional air-duct drawing. The two drawing methods are completely independent, so you do not have to start with a two-dimensional drawing in order to draw in three dimensions. Therefore, every combination of 2D and 3D drawing [2D only, 3D only, 2D and 3D, 2D and part of the drawing in 3D (the part regarding construction details) etc] is possible. The Three-dimensional Air-duct Drawing is supported by the 3D drawing subsystem, which appears in the AutoNET menu, when the "AIR-DUCTS" option is selected. When "3D Drawing" is selected, a series of slides appear on the screen, each one of which is linked to a complete drawing routine.


For example, if a straight duct section is selected, the corresponding routine will prompt you to enter its length, width and direction. Similarly, if an elbow is selected, the routine will ask you to enter the section of the duct from which it begins and to determine the respective angle. Moreover, all these actions can be performed successively, so that the user is able to draw the network continuously and automatically incorporate each section or accessory, where the previous one ends. If you also consider that the linear network, carrying all dimensional information, can be viewed on the ground plan, it becomes obvious that the air-duct drawing can be completed easily, with minimum possibility of making a mistake. Before describing in detail each of the drawing commands-routines, which correspond to the slides of the menu, we should summarize the two general 2D-drawing principles: Each section of the duct can be constructed in two ways: a) As part of an already drawn frame: In this case the program "reads" the original width from the drawn frame and the user defines the direction of the 3D object on one side of the frame. b) As part of another, already drawn, section: In this case the program "reads" the original width from the drawn section and the user defines the direction of the new 3D object on one side of the previous section. It is obvious how this feature makes drawing much easier, as most duct sections follow previous ones.

Note: The air-duct sections are placed automatically on the BUILD_FLOORx_BODIES_3D layer, and the auxiliary lines on the BUILD_FLOORx_LIMITS_3D layer, so that they can be drawn with different line elevation (as placed by layer).

The 3D drawing commands are categorized as follows: a) Commands used to create initial aid connection frames, which serve as drawing reference and are included in the "3D Drawing" sub-menu. b) 3D accessory commands, which appear in a slides window, when selecting "Air-ducts". The (a) group commands are the following:

• Rectangular frame (REB3D). Run this command to draw an initial rectangular frame, from which you will start drawing a 3D air-duct. The data you are asked to enter are: First apex: The user is asked to specify the apex of the first side of the frame. Second apex: The user is asked to specify the second apex of the frame side. Frame height (m): The user is asked to specify the height of the frame to be drawn.

• Split frame Run this command to divide an already drawn frame in two parts, in order to start drawing a "trousers"-like duct.

- 140 - FINE - HVAC

• Three-point rectangular frame. Run this command to draw an initial rectangular frame, from which you can start drawing a 3D air-duct. The data you are asked to enter are: First apex: The user is asked to specify the apex of the first side of the frame. Second apex: The user is asked to specify the second apex of the frame side. Third apex: The user is asked to specify the third apex of the frame to be drawn. If you select "3D Air-ducts" from the menu, the following window will appear, with the 3D drawing commands (group b). These commands and the way they are executed are described below in detail (including the command name in brackets, which can be typed in the command line).

• Straight Air-duct (AERE3D) The AERE3D command is used for drawing straight air-ducts. You will be prompted to specify the side of the previous section and the duct length. The messages of this command are: Air-duct base: Select the side of an already drawn air-duct section or frame. Air-duct length (m): Type (or define using the mouse) the duct length

• Basic Air-duct (AERG3D) The AERG3D command is used for drawing air-ducts of random shape or/and positions (sidelong ducts, ducts with different starting and ending dimensions etc). During drawing, you will be prompted to specify the side of the previous section as well as the length, the ending width and height and the ending position of the duct. The messages of this command are: Air-duct base: Select the side of an already drawn air-duct section or frame.


Ending air-duct width (m): Type (or define using the mouse) the ending width of the duct. Ending air-duct height (m): Type (or define using the mouse) the ending height of the duct. Ending base center position: Specify the ending position of the duct.

• One-sided contraction (AERD3D) This command is used for drawing an air-duct one-sided contraction. The command messages are: Air-duct base: Select the side of an existing air-duct section or frame, based on which the contraction will be drawn. Ending air-duct width: Type (or define using the mouse) the ending width of the duct. Ending width is inserted in m. Contraction length <>: Enter the contraction length in m. The program suggests the minimum required contraction length. The contraction length is derived by the formula: C=(A-B)x4 Where C= contraction length, A= starting width and B= ending width

• Double-sided contraction (AERM3D). This command is used for drawing an air-duct contraction related to the center (double-sided). The command messages are: Air-duct base: Select a side of an existing air-duct section, based on which the contraction will be drawn. Ending air-duct width (m): Type (or define using the mouse) the ending width of the duct. Ending width is inserted in m. Ending air-duct height (m): Enter the ending contraction length in m. Air-duct length: Type (or define using the mouse) the length of the duct. The program suggests the minimum required contraction length. The contraction length is derived by the formula: C=(A-B)x2.5 Where C= contraction length, A= starting width and B= ending width

• Curve (AERC3D) Run this command to draw a curved air-duct section. To draw the curve, you should specify the side of the previous section, based on which the curve will be drawn, the turn angle and the inner turn radius. The command messages are: Air-duct base: Select a side of the existing air-duct section, based on which the curve will be drawn.

- 142 - FINE - HVAC

Turn angle <90>: Specify the turn angle of the curve (the default value is 90 degrees). Inner turn radius <>: Specify the inner turn radius of the curve. Please note that the program suggests the minimum allowed inner radius, which is derived from the formula RL ≥ A2, where RL is the inner radius and A is the curve width.

• Curve with equal inner and outer radii (AERS3D) This command draws a curve with equal inner and outer radii and functions like the previous curve (ΑERC3D). The only difference is that the outer radius is small, equal to the inner.

• Angle (AERΖ3D) This command is used for drawing an angle without an inner radius. More specifically, the inner and the outer angle is 90 degrees. The command is executed as the curve commands, without requiring an inner radius.

• Angle with inner radius (AERO3D) This command draws an angle, but here you can specify the inner radius.

• Contraction curve (AEROC3D) This command draws a contraction curve. If A is the ending width and B is the starting width, then the inner radius (RL) is calculated through the formula RL=0.75*A and the outer curve is derived from the formula Ro=B+0.75*A. Example: Draw the following 3D detail:


Start by selecting "Rectangular Frame", that is the rectangular cross section of the duct, in the "3D Drawing" menu and entering its dimensions (e.g. width = 1 and height = 1) as well as its direction (e.g. to the right). Then select the first slide from the "3D Drawing" -> "Air-ducts" menu and when prompted to select "Air-duct base" point the frame. When asked to specify the "Air-duct length", insert, for example, 10 m. Now, if you select “3D View” you will see that the first rectangular section of the duct has been drawn. Continue by selecting "3D Drawing" -> "Air-ducts", and choosing the 5th curve from the slides list. When prompted to select "Air-duct base", click the frame side that corresponds to the inner axis of the curve. When prompted to specify the "Air-duct angle" enter 90 degrees and set the inner radius to 0.2. After you have provided these values, you can see the three-dimensional object, shown in the adjacent picture, drawn. Next, draw a rectangular section as before, but this time you should define the frame of the free end of the curve (when prompted to select "Air-duct base") and enter 5m, when asked to determine the "Air-duct length". Suppose you want to define a "trousers"-like duct at the new end. Therefore, select "Split frame", so that two frames are created, in order to draw the two curves of the "trousers". If you enter 0.5 as the width of the first frame, you will see that the frame is divided into two rectangular sections.

- 144 - FINE - HVAC

Select one of the available "curves" to create the two curves of the "trousers" as seen above. Finally, add the two rectangular sections at the two edges to complete the drawing. The user can also practice by drawing the other 3D accessory types.


6. Plus Drawing Tools

As it is mentioned in the Introduction, Fine includes a large group of options under the general menu PLUS.

These are a series of additional drawing tools, which have been embodied in the package in order to help the user during drawing. In the top part, the first option included in the PLUS menu of options is “Printing Scale”, which is used to specify a scale:

- 146 - FINE - HVAC

Following that, the PLUS menu of options includes general menus of drawing tools, each of which consists of specific tools. These menus are listed below: TEXT TEXT FRAME COMMENTS LINES LAYERS BLOCKS HATCH The tools of each category are described in detail next.

6.1 Text The text menu of options includes a number of tools, especially useful for manipulating text inside drawings.


These tools are described next, in the order they appear in the menu. The use of parentheses indicates commands, which are identical with the corresponding commands in AutoCAD or in IntelliCAD .

6.1.1 Text Height Using the above command, you can set the current height of the drawing, in drawing millimetres.

6.1.2 Select Style Using the above command you can specify the font you want to use.

The selected font will then be the current font.

6.1.3 Text The above command enables you to write text directly on your drawing, as soon as you specify the height and the angle of the text, requested by the application. If you press <Enter> twice, the default values of height and angle are maintained, in which case you immediately write the desired text.

- 148 - FINE - HVAC

6.1.4 Edit Paragraph (Ptext) The above command activates a paragraph text editor . Using this command, the following prompts appear: Center/Edit/Fit/Right/Slack/?/<Startpoint>: Specify the starting point of the text. Τext height <0.2000>: Specify the height of the text in drawing units (Drawing Units). By pressing <Enter>, the default value is assumed. Rotation angle <0>: Specify the angle of writing of the text. Ιnter_line spacing <0.3000>: Specify the distance between lines of text. Maximum line length <2.000>: You set the maximum length of a line of text in drawing units (Drawing units) Text: Write the text. If you want to write in a new line, before you reach the end of the current one, simply press <Enter>.

6.1.5 Arithmetic Progression (Sequence) The above command places a sequence of letters or digits (consequtively) on your drawing. It is useful for the automatic numbering of identical objects (eg. switches, lights, fire boxes etc.). During the execution of the command, the following prompts appear: Alphabetic <Α> or Numerical <Ν> Sequence<A or N>?: Type “A” if an alphabetic sequence is needed, or “N” if a numeric sequence is needed. If you type “A”, these prompts will follow: Which is the first letter?: Specify the starting letter of the sequence eg. B. Text alignment <Left Right Cen. Mid.>?: Specify the text alignment to be left, right, middle etc. Writing Angle?: Specify the angle of writing of the text (in degrees). Add Prefix <P> or Suffix <S>?: Specify if you want to add a prefix or a suffix to the text which results from the numbering. Added Text: Specify the text that will be used as Prefix or Suffix. Give Text Points: Specify the points where you want the text to be placed. If you type “N”, these prompts will follow: Which is the first number?: Specify the starting digit of the numbering. Number to be added?: Specify the step that will be used to create the sequence. Text Alignment <Left Right Cen. Mid.>?: Specify the text alignment to be left, right, middle etc. Writing Angle?: Specify the angle of writing of the text (in degrees). Add Prefix <P> or Suffix <S >?: Specify if you want to add a Prefix or a Suffix to the text that results from the numbering. Added text: Specify the text that will be used as Prefix or Suffix. Give Text Points: Specify the points where you want the text to be placed.


6.1.6 Get Style (Styleset) The above command is used when you want to write text using the parameters of the existing text (fonts, character height etc.). The command prompts are the following: Select existing Text: Select the piece of text that will be used as the basis for writing new text. Justify/style/<start point>: Specify the starting point of the text. You can, however, modify the alignment of the text (justify) by pressing J, or the character style, by pressing S. Rotation angle <0>: Specify the angle of writing of the text. Text: Write the text.

6.1.7 Text Edit (DDEDIT) Using the above command, you can edit existing text (editing). You can also use the following word processing commands.

6.1.8 DOS Text Edit (Etext) The above command is useful for editing a line of text. You can use all existing greek or english characters. The command prompt is: Pick text to edit: Select the text you want to edit. After selecting the text, focus is switched to the text editor, inside which you can edit the text. When all the changes are finished, press <Enter> and you will switch back to the screen.

6.1.9 To DOS System The text is converted into text written with fonts used in DOS.

6.1.10 To Windows System The text is converted into text written with fonts used in Windows.

6.1.11 Text Edit (Export/Edit) This command enables you to edit an entire piece of text, using a text editor. The command prompts are: select objects: Select the text you want to edit. The application composes the lines of the text based on its existing position. You enter the text editor and perform the desired changes. When you are finished, press <F10> (EXIT) and the text is updated if you answer “Y” to the prompt “Update Text (Y/N)?”).

6.1.12 Change Style The above command is used to change the character style (style). More specifically, the command prompts are: Global <G> or Selective <S>: Pressing G will modify all the existing text, whereas, pressing S only the selected text: Select Objects: Select the text you want to edit.

- 150 - FINE - HVAC

New style name (or?): Specify the new character style.

6.1.13 Capital-Lower case (Upper_Lower) The above command is useful for converting lowercase characters to uppercase and vice versa. More specifically, the prompts are: Select objects: Select the text you want to edit. what case <Upper or Lower>?: Pressing U (Upper) will convert the text to Uppercase, whereas pressing L (Lower) to lowercase.

6.1.14 Change Height (Τheight) The above command is used to modify the height of the text, in the case you want to. As soon as you select it, you are prompted to: Select objects: Select the text you want to edit. enter new text height: Specify the new character height in drawing units.

6.1.15 Stretch The above command is used to stretch or shrink text. As soon as you select it, the command prompts are: Select text to stretch: Select the text you want to stretch. Side to stretch <Left or Right>?: Select the side towards which you want to stretch the text.

6.1.16 Justify (Align) The above command is useful in aligning text. As soon as you select it, you are prompted to: Select objects: Select the text you want to edit . Νew Justification (Left/Right etc): Specify the new alignment.

6.1.17 Change Numeration (Angle_block) The above command modifies the text angle of the numbering of receptors (eg. hydraulic receptors, radiators etc.) in a network. The prompts are: Node numbering text angle : Specify the new angle of the numbering text. Node numbering text height: Specify the character height. Select objects: Select the desired receptors to modify the angle of their text of numbering. New Alignment (Left/Right etc) Specify the new alignment.

6.1.18 Add (Append) The above command is used to extend a word towards the left or the right side (prefix or ending). As soon as you select this command, select the desired word, answer the question “left or right” and write the additional desired text, in which case you can view the result of your actions.


6.1.19 Replace This command is useful for replacing a piece of text with another one in a drawing. The execution of the command is simple: first, specify the word you want to replace and next, type the new word.

6.1.20 Search-Replace (Search_Repl) This command is useful in replacing a piece of text with another one in a drawing. If the text to be replaced is located in more than one places in the drawing, that is, it is repeated, it will be replaced in each one of them. The execution of the command is simple: first, specify the word you want to replace and next, type the new word.

6.2 Text Frame 6.2.1 Orthogonal (Box_Txt) This command is used to place a word or a piece of text inside a box (orthogonal frame). The only required action is to select the desired word and then press <Enter> (or the right mouse button), in which case you can view, on your screen, the selected word being enclosed by a frame.

6.2.2 Circular (Circle_Txt) This command is used to place a word or a piece of text inside a circle. The only required action is to select the desired word and then press <Enter> (or the right mouse button), in which case you can view, on your screen, the selected word being enclosed by a circle.

6.2.3 Elliptical (Elipse_Txt) This command is used to place a word or a piece of text inside an ellipse (elliptical frame). The only required action is to select the desired word and then press <Enter> (or the right mouse button), in which case you can view, on your screen, the selected word being enclosed by an ellipse.

6.2.4 Polygonal (Polygon_Txt) This command is used to place a word or a piece of text inside a polygon (polygonal frame). The only required action is to select the desired word and then press <Enter> (or the right mouse button), in which case you can view, on your screen, the selected word being enclosed by a polygon.

6.3 Comments The above menu of options includes tools involving placing comments or references in the drawing. These tools are described next, in the order they appear in the menu.

6.3.1 Arrow (Lead_A) The above command enables you to use an arrow to point to a specific point in your drawing and place a note. The series of command prompts are:

- 152 - FINE - HVAC

Arrow ending point: Specify the point to “point to” and the following points after that. Add Comment? <Y>: If you want to write text you specify “Y”, in which case these prompts follow:. Ηeight: Specify the character height. Its value is the current value of the text (if you want to use the current value, simply press <Enter>). Rotation angle <0>: Specify the angle of the text to be written. Text: Write the text.

6.3.2 Hard Arrow (Lead_W) It functions in the same way as the LEAD_A command. The difference is that a “thick” arrow (wide arrow) is created in the point you “point to”.

6.3.3 Dot (Lead_D) It functions in the same way as the LEAD_A command. The difference is that a dot is created in the point you “point to”.

6.3.4 Lasso (Lead_L) It functions in the same way as the LEAD_A command. The difference is that a lasso is created in the point you “point to”.

6.3.5 Large Lasso (Lead_LW) This command creates a lasso dynamically. You can use it to grab more than one objects, in contrast with the LEAD_L command, which enables you to grab fewer objects.

6.4 Lines The Lines menu of options includes tools for drawing different types of line, as the ones that appear in the adjacent figure (continuous, dashed, dash-dotted etc.), as well as tools for manipulating lines . These tools are described in the order they appear in the menu.

6.4.1 Continuous This command is used to draw a continuous line on the current layer. As soon as you select the command, you can start drawing the line using the mouse.

6.4.2 Dotted (Hidden) This command is used to draw a discontinuous line on the current layer. As soon as you select the command, you can start drawing the line using the mouse.


6.4.3 Dashed This command is used to draw a dashed discontinuous line on the current layer. As soon as you select the command, you can start drawing the line using the mouse.

6.4.4 Dash-Dotted (Dashdot) This command is used to draw a dash-dotted line on the current layer. As soon as you select the command, you can start drawing the line using the mouse.

6.4.5 Dash-Double-Dotted (Divide) This command is used to draw an dash-double-dotted line on the current layer. As soon as you select the command, you can start drawing the line using the mouse.

6.4.6 Dash-Triple-Dotted (3Dot) This command is used to draw an dash-triple-dotted line on the current layer. As soon as you select the command, you can start drawing the line using the mouse.

6.4.7 Dash-Spaced (Center) This command is used to draw an dash-spaced line on the current layer. As soon as you select the command, you can start drawing the line using the mouse.

6.4.8 Double This command is used to draw an double line on the current layer. As soon as you select the command, you can start drawing the line using the mouse.

6.4.9 Change Width This command is used to modify the width of an existing line. More specifically, the command prompts are: Select objects: Select the lines, the width of which you want to modify. New width of selected objects: Specify the new width in drawing units (drawing units).

6.4.10 Change Length The above command lengthens a line towards some direction. The command prompts are: Select the entity near end to : Select the lines you want to lengthen. Amount to add: Specify the length to be added.

6.4.11 MultipleTrim/Extend The above command performs a multiple TRIM or EXTEND. More specifically, the series of command prompts is: Do you want to Trim or Extend: Specify the new width in drawing units (drawing units). Select cutting edges: Select the edges you want to cut. Select objects: Select the desired lines.

- 154 - FINE - HVAC

Drag a line across objects to trim. First Point: specifies the first point of a line intersecting the lines that will be trimmed. Second Point: specifies the second point. If you specify E (Extend) in the above command, the following prompts will appear: Select boundary edges: Select the edges that you want to lengthen. Select objects: Select the desired lines. Drag a line across objects to extend. First Point: specifies the first point of a line intersecting the lines that will be extended. Second Point: specifies the second point.

6.4.12 Clear This command clears the drawing from multiple lines (one lying exactly upon the other).

6.5 Layers The Layers menu of options includes tools for manipulating layers. These tools are described in the order they appear in the menu. Again, the use of parentheses indicates commands in English, which are identical with the corresponding commands in AutoCAD or in IntelliCAD.

6.5.1 Set Layer (Layset) This command enables you to set the current layer by simply selecting an object which belongs to that layer. The command prompt is: Select an Entity on an existing layer: Select an object that is part of the layer that you want to switch to.

6.5.2 Freeze (Layr_Frz) The above command freezes the layer of the object you select. If this layer is the current layer, a message appears, stating that it is not possible to freeze this layer.

6.5.3 Off (Layr_Off) The above command deactivates the layer of the object you select. If this layer is the current layer, a message appears, stating that it is not possible to freeze this layer. The difference with the previous command, LAYR_FRZ, lies in the fact that the LAYER_OFF command does not deactivate any blocks that are contained in blocks of the layer in question. Consider, for example, the top view of a building that has been drawn with AutoBUILD, in which case the windows are blocks inside the “wall” block. If you use the LAYR_OFF command to deactivate the layer of the walls, the windows will still be active, whereas if you used the LAYER_FRZ command, both walls and windows would “freeze".


6.5.4 Lock (Layr_Lok) The above command locks the layer of the object you select. This command can additionally be used on the current layer.

6.5.5 Unlock (Layr_Unl) This command is the opposite of the command above, meaning that, it unlocks a layer that was previously locked using the Layr_Lok command.

6.5.6 Layer Info (Layr_see) Using this command, which is entirely auxiliary, you can view the layer of the object you select.

6.5.7 Move to Current (MovCurNt) This command moves objects from other layers into the current layer. The prompts are: Select the objects to be changed: Select the objects that you want to be moved into the current layer.

6.5.8 Change (ChgLayr) This command enables you to change the layer of existing objects to another one. Its function is simple: Select the objects, the layer of which you want to change. After you select them, you press <Enter> (or the right mouse button), in which case you should next select an object of the layer that you want the previously selected objects to be moved to.

6.5.9 Delete (DelLayer) This command deletes all the objects that exist in a layer that you will select by selecting an object belonging to that layer. That is, after you activate this command, you should simply select an object which belongs to the layer that you want to delete. All the objects of the layer are deleted except for the selected object.

6.5.10 Current Only (OnlyCurn) This command specifies the layer of a selected object to be the current one, while freezing all the other layers. The command prompt is: Select an entity on the layer: Select an object of the layer that you want to become the current one.

6.5.11 Change Color This command changes the colour of a layer. Initially, you are asked to select the object, the colour of which you want to change, in which case you use the mouse to select it. Next, you are asked to specify the serial number of the new colour.

6.6 Blocks The Blocks menu of options includes tools for manipulating blocks. These tools are described in the order they appear in the menu.

- 156 - FINE - HVAC

6.6.1 Replace Using the above command, blocks can be replaced by some other block (replace). The command prompts are: Replace one block for another. Select objects: Select the blocks you want to replace. Enter the name of the new block: Specify the name of the block that will replace the previously selected blocks.

6.6.2 Χplode The above command explodes the blocks of AutoCAD or IntelliCAD (and the mirrored blocks of AutoCAD or IntelliCAD).

6.6.3 Scale Up-Scale Down (Cscale) This command scales a block or a piece of text up or down, with respect to the point of their insertion in the drawing. The command prompts are: select text and blocks to rescale select objects: Specify the scale of the hatch (density factor). new scale factor: Specify the factor of scaling up-scaling down. old scale factor: Specify the old factor.

6.6.4 Scale XYZ (Bscale) This command enables you to scale up a block that has been inserted in a different way, with respect to X,Y,Z, without the need to reinsert the block in the drawing. The command prompts are: select block to rescale Χ scale factor: Specify the scale factor with respect to the X-axis. Y scale factor: Specify the scale factor with respect to the Y-axis. Z scale factor: Specify the scale factor with respect to the Z-axis.

6.6.5 Count This command can count the number of times a block has been inserted into the drawing. The command prompts are: Give me the name of the block ....: Specify the name of the block to count the number of times it has been inserted.

6.6.6 On Screen Appearance (Show) Using the above command, you can view the positions that a block has been inserted into, while deactivating the rest of the objects of the drawing . The command prompts are: Enter the name of the block ....: Specify the name of the block you want to view.


6.7 Hatch The Hatch menu of options includes a series of commands you can use to specify types of hatch and perform hatching (shading) of areas of the drawing.

6.7.1 Features Using the above command, you can specify the type of the Hatch, the printing scale and the printing angle.

The selection of the type of strike is performed by pressing the “Hatch” button, in which case pictures (slides) of different types of strike appear. Select the desired type from these slides. Scale is used to specify the “density” of the hatch, whereas the angle specifies the angle of the hatch lines.

6.7.2 Hatch Polyline This command enables you to hatch (fill) an existing closed polyline, using the Hatch of the previous command. More specifically, by selecting this command, you are asked to specify the corresponding closed polyline that you want to hatch (fill), in which case you use the mouse to select it. After these actions, you can view the selected area being filled with the type of Hatch and the density you previously specified in the “Parameters” window.

6.7.3 Point Hatch Using this command, you can strike an area, by simply specifying outline points. The command prompts are: Draw hatch by picking points Hatch pattern name: Specify the name of the hatch you want. Hatch scale: Specify the scale of the hatch (density factor). Hatch angle: Specify the angle. First Point: Specify the first point of the outline you want to strike. Next Point: Specify the second, third point, last point, so that the desired outline is exactly specified.

- 158 - FINE - HVAC

6.8 Symbols Grid The above option leads to 3 sub-options that involve the creation of a symbol grid in a top view (eg. layout of illuminants, furred ceiling decorations etc.), which are described in the next sections. It is noted that this command is encountered among the commands of several applications (eg. electrical applications), during the placement of the corresponding receptors, where it functions exactly in the same way that is described below.

6.8.1 Parallelogram Grid The parallelogram grid command enables you to create a rectangular grid (orthogonal or not), inside which, selected symbols are placed (eg. illuminants), according to the rule a, a/2. More specifically, the command prompts are: Select Block: Select (using the mouse) the symbol that you want to be placed on a grid. Select first corner: Specify the first corner of the area that the grid will be placed upon (see auxiliary figure). Select second corner: Specify the second corner of the area that the grid will be placed upon (figure). Select third corner: Specify the third corner of the area that the grid will be placed upon (figure). Specify number of columns: Specify the desired number of columns of the grid (figure).

Specify number of rows: Specify the desired number of rows of the grid (figure). Specify rotation angle: Specify, if needed, the value of the rotation angle (the initial value is 0).


After the above actions, you can view the grid being formed on your screen.

6.8.2 Among two Symbols Using this command, you can create a grid, or even better, a layout in series between two symbols (eg. you want to place 5 extra illuminants between two illuminants). The distances between the symbols will be equal to each other. The command prompts are similar to those of the previous command.

6.8.3 Among Symbol and Point Using this command, you can create a grid, or even better, a layout in series between a symbol and a point (eg. you want to place 3 extra illuminants between an illuminant and the opposing corridor wall). The distances between the symbols will be equal to each other (distance α) and will have a distance of α/2 from the “Point”. The command prompts are similar to those of the two previous commands.

6.9 Optimise Size This command optimises the size of the file of your project, and is useful in the case that the size of the project file has become extremely large.

6.10 Current Height Specify the height at which you want to work (eg. to place receptors or to draw a horizontal pipe etc.). Each time you want to modify the current height, you have to select this command.

6.11 Restore Colors of Network After acquiring the layout of a network, and if the network has not been fully acquired (white sub-networks exist), the user can restore the original colours using this command.

6.12 Delete Duplicate Pipes This command deletes the pipes (or cables, or channels etc.) that have been accidentally drawn one exactly upon the other (eg. when a pipe has been placed upon another one – by accident- and it is not visible, the application automatically “erases” it).


7. Examples

7.1 Example 1 The example described in the present section can be found in the program CD within the folder "\Studies" and it is named "Test1.bld". With the “Project Selection” command the user may look for it in the corresponding path (or it would be better to select it from the hard disk, provided that he has already copied the whole "test1.bld" directory to the hard disk). The example is about an apartment building with 7 levels, 5 floors, pilotis, basement and soffit, as shown in the relevant figures. The architectural ground plans of the building were provided by the Architecture in DWG form and have been created through a separate architectural package. The filenames of these ground plans are "ypo.dwg", "pil.dwg", "1os.dwg", "2os.dwg", "3os.dwg", "4os.dwg", "5os.dwg" and "dvma.dwg" and they are saved in the "Test.bld" directory.

- 162 - FINE - HVAC

Select the "TEST1.BLD" project and answer "Ν" when prompted to "Save changes in previous project?". After these actions the loading of the project begins.

Note: At this point, it is possible that certain font types, used in the project, cannot be found, which is something that happens with drawings of applications such as AutoCAD or IntelliCAD, provided by other users. In such a case, the first time you will be asked for a certain font type you may select it from the "\FONTS\ACAD" directory in the FINE CD, where all the font types used in the various applications are included.

When the project is loaded you can see the following screen, which corresponds to a Single-Pipe System ground plan (of the application and the floor relevant to the last "Save Project"):

If the option “Building Definition” is selected, you can indeed see the floors with the corresponding heights and DWG filenames. In this specific window, the user may activate any level (through the "Building Definition" option) and select any application (through the "Select Application" option), so as to see how the several installations are drawn, according to Chapters 4 and 5. The user may later, taking a more advanced step, edit the projects by modifying them and perform again the various elaboration steps receiving the expected results and getting familiar with the program.


Next, we will try to repeat, in brief, the steps followed to complete this particular project, referring to each E/M installation separately, starting with Heating.

Heating: The Single-Pipe System is selected for heating the building. Prior to the drawing of the Single-Pipe System installation, the thermal losses of the spaces of each level should be calculated. Provided that the available ground plans were created in a different Architectural Package (meaning they were not created by FINE or IDEA), the thermal losses cannot be calculated automatically from the ground plan. In order to make this possible, you should re-draw upon the existing drawing the walls and the openings using FINE. Note that this can be easier in practice as long as you use the AutoCAD (or IntelliCAD) “Object Selection Settings” option and then the “Object Sort Method” option. In the appearing dialog window activate “Object Selection” option and deactivate all the rest (so that the user-selected points are snapped). This has actually been done for the heated floors 1-5 (levels 3,4,5,6,7). The walls and the openings drawn can be viewed by selecting "3D View" for every level.

- 164 - FINE - HVAC

This is due to the fact that, in the "Layers Management" window, the walls and openings are activated only in the 3D view and not in the ground plan mode of FINE. Therefore, the drawings shown on the ground plans are the architectural ground plans, as they were provided by the Architect. After drawing walls and openings, the procedure of defining the spaces for each area follows, with the use of the «Definition of Plan View Elements» command (e.g. with point). In this way, the necessary background for the automatic calculation of the thermal losses is created (as well as for the cooling loads calculation, in case an air-conditioning project is also required).

Note: In case the ground plans are drawn with FINE (or IDEA, the architectural package of 4Μ), it is not necessary to re-draw the ground plan, it is sufficient to define spaces.

Therefore, moving from the AutoBLD option menu to "Calculations" -> "Thermal losses" and by selecting "NO" in the prompt "Update thermal losses..." (since they are already calculated in the example they need not be calculated again), enter the calculation application of the Thermal Losses. It is obvious that levels 3-7 include spaces with their detailed characteristics and the analytical calculations of their losses. Provided that losses are known, proceed to draw the piping installation.


For this purpose, the user in the example followed the instructions of section 5.2 step-by-step, i.e. radiator installation, induction and return columns drawing (for the whole building) and afterwards drawing applied to all levels a) the induction collectors, b) the return collectors, c) the induction and return piping from the corresponding columns to the corresponding collectors and, finally, d) all circuits one by one starting each time from an induction collector connection point to a return collector connection point. All relevant details involved in drawing the specific installation can be easily observed by the user (such as the details regarding connection to columns and the circuits shown in the adjacent screen). This will help the user clarify any possible doubts. Observe the area where the network column starts, meaning the boiler-room in the basement (which is not heated) and the endpoints of the induction and return pipes which run towards columns, to see the network start points, i.e. the induction and the return point:

“Elevate” to an intermediate level to observe the columns, the radiators and the circuit piping.

- 166 - FINE - HVAC

Note: In order to avoid having all drawings on the screen simultaneously, run the "Freeze Layer" command in the "Plus" menu and deactivate layers that hinder the supervision process (as followed in the above screen to isolate the network from the architectural ground plans).

By isolating the architectural ground plan layer, supervision is really improved:


Considering the above drawing, exactly as it has been implemented in this particular example, it is possible to identify the single-pipe system network through the corresponding option. If "Axonometric" is selected and then "Building Identification" is carried out, the axonometric diagram of the whole installation will appear on the screen:

After the "Net Recognition" is over, you can enter "Calculations" through the AutoNET set of options, by selecting again "NO" in the prompt "Re-update..". The mathematical model of the network as well as the calculation results (pipe cross-sections, radiator types and outputs etc) can be seen in the calculation sheets. Select the "Vertical Diagram DXF" option in "Print" to create the vertical chart, which can also be seen in "Results" -> "Vertical Diagram" (it does not need to be re-created). Select "Return" to return to the drawing, where the calculation results are displayed on the drawing through the "Drawing Update" command. In order to create the final drawings (layouts to be printed) of the project, it is possible to edit each ground plan separately and then save it as a separate file-drawing, using either the AutoCAD "Save As" command or the FINE "Screen Drawing" command or finally through "wblock" (and then selecting "undo" so that it remains in the current drawing as well). This procedure has been followed in the present project regarding each ground plan as well as the vertical chart. Therefore, the AutoCAD "Open" command facilitates loading the DWG files one by one. These can be found within the project directory (Τest.bld). The final drawings can then be observed (e.g. the following heating drawing of the 1st floor, named after "ther1os.dwg"):

- 168 - FINE - HVAC

Correspondingly for the vertical chart (Therkat.dwg):


Note: If the calculation sheets are re-updated from the drawings, considering the fact that the soffit is not heated, the number of levels will have to be reduced by 1 in the network elements of the calculations, i.e. from 8 to 7, and then, in the sheet of level 7, provide a temperature drop (e.g. 15 degrees) for the upper circuit so that calculations can be carried out.

7.2 Example 2 This second example can be found in the FINE CD, in the directory "\Studies", under the name "Test2.bld". If the “Open Project" command is selected, the user may look for this file through the respective path (or, even better, select it from the hard disc, after he has copied the whole "test2.bld" directory to he hard disc). As shown in the table in "Building Definition" as well as in the following drawing (which resulted after the command "Axonometric" was executed), example 2 refers to an apartment building of two sections and 6 floors.

Note: The drawings of the architectural ground plans were created through FINE AutoBLD. To render the procedure faster, two-dimensional walls were used (the option "NO" was activated in the prompt "Allow three-dimensional wall drawing?" of the "Wall" -> "Full Drawing" command).

- 170 - FINE - HVAC

A typical architectural ground plan of the building, discussed in this particular example, is displayed in the following screen:

The user may all the project installations and view the various respective details, as in example 1. For example, if the 3rd floor ground plan for the Single-Pipe System application is selected, the installation drawing is displayed on the screen.

Apart from Heating, example 2 includes the projects regarding the plumbing and electrical networks, the elevators and the telephone installation.


7.3 Example 3 This example includes the final layouts of a project concerning industrial E/M installations placed on a single floor. More specifically, it includes Air-conditioning through Air-ducts installations (together with Plumbing and Electrical Networks and Fire Protection which have been studied by the other relative modules of FINE). The project drawings can be accessed in the CD, in the "\Studies" directory, under the name "Yam.bld". If these drawings are loaded (run “Open”), they appear on the screen. For example, the ground plans of air-conditioning and fire protection are displayed in the two following screens:

- 172 - FINE - HVAC

The user may enter all project layouts and view all the relevant details.

7.4 Example 4 This example, named after "Tsoyra.bld", includes the heating project of an apartment building. A typical ground plan is shown below:


The user may view and edit the project in order to get familiar with the program. In this project, it is worth viewing the various boiler-room details (floor 1).


PART II

The Calculations Component

- 176 - FINE - HVAC


1. Introduction

1.1 Overview This second part (Part II) of the user’s guide, as mentioned in the Preface, provides a description of the Calculations Component of FINE HVAC. This component, consisting of 8 modules (Heating Loads, Single Pipe System, Twin Pipes System, Infloor System, Cooling Loads, Fan Coils, Air Ducts and Psychrometry), has been designed according to the latest technological standards and stands out for its unique user friendliness, its methodological thoroughness of calculations and its in-depth presentation of the results. Furthermore each module can be used either independently, by typing data, or in conjunction with the CAD component of FINE HVAC. In the last occasion, it is possible to acquire data automatically directly from the drawings, thus resulting in significant time saving and maximum reliability of the project results. In the following sections, the Calculations Component of FINE HVAC is also called ADAPT/FCALC (FCALC as the FINE CALCulations Component, and ADAPT from an older naming of the independent version). Each one of the above 8 modules adopts the more reliable calculating environment, the more solid scientific background and the maximum functionality. More specifically:

• Concerning Methodological Completeness, it is the only package that, following the International Standards and Regulations, enables the user to select the applying methodology (e.g. Carrier - Ashrae CLTD - Ashrae TFM Methods in Air-conditioning Loads, DIN77 - DIN 83 in Thermal Losses, Method of Equal Velocities - Equal Pressures - Static Regain in Air-ducts, VDI in Electrical Installations etc). In each case, the package utilizes the more advanced techniques and mathematical models for maximum accuracy, speed and reliability in calculations (e.g. analytical system of psychrometry equations, model of hydraulic simulation etc).

• Concerning Functionality, the package follows the more modern functionality patterns offering a friendly interface, window technology of unique monitoring, high ergonomy (generalized use of toolbars, buttons, combo boxes as well as function keys). In this way, it is very easy to learn and use while, due to the common philosophy adopted in all applications (modules), learning one of them is sufficient for learning the entire package. It should be mentioned that each application has its High efficiency and monitoring calculation core, specially designed.

- 178 - FINE - HVAC

• It is the latest development in the innovative calculation sheet that 4M established for Mechanical Applications and the majority of designers trust, since it has carried out thousands of projects up to now.

Prior to the detailed description of any application, the user should read carefully this first chapter of Part II of the user's guide, which explains in detail the general philosophy of the package and the common principles for the various applications. Afterwards, the reader should read the section related to the respective application and at the same time practise on the application program, which should result in the fast learning of the specific application and consequently of the whole package.

Note: After the installation procedure described in the beginning of this user's guide, a file named ADAPT.INI is created automatically in the Windows directory (e.g. C:\Windows), containing the following default parameters related to the program directories:

• LibsPath=C:\4M\LIBS\DATAF (The path for the arithmetic libraries of the program)

• OfferPath=C:\4M\LIBS\OFR (The path for the Offer libraries)

• ProjectsPath=C:\4M\CALC (The path for the Projects) The user may open the file and modify carefully the path of the archives, if necessary.


1.2 General Principles of the Package In spite of the individual differences of each application (see window beside), the Calculations Component of the package is based on a uniform philosophy and common principles, that were adopted especially for helping the user to become acquainted with the package operation quickly. Regardless of the way that the user will call any application of the package (through FINE, through the icon, or even through the ADAPT Manager), the aim of this chapter is to clarify the unique concept that characterises each one of the applications. At first it should be pointed out that starting an application leads, most of the times, to a menu with the general form shown below, with minor or major differences, which will be discussed separately for each application. Note that, the start-up screen can be adjusted freely by the user according to his needs, by selecting the option "Save as Prototype" which will be described in detail later on. The ability to adjust the screen and printer defaults (as it will be shown later) is particularly useful, as it enables the user to adopt the program to his needs. At the top of the application window appear the general options of the application menu, and each one may contain more than one sub-options. As you can see, the major option-groups have, in general, the names "Files", "Options", "View", “Windows”, "Libraries" and "Help", although there are, depending on the application, a few declinations from this standard. In the following sections we outline, in general, the use of the options and sub-options mentioned above, which will be examined again later, for each application separately.

- 180 - FINE - HVAC

1.2.1 Files According to the widely known standardisation of Windows, the option "File" at the top of each application menu (including the corresponding icons on the toolbar), intends to manage the project files (new project, open project, save project as, etc) as well as the printing operation, and also some other secondary functions. More specifically, the option "Files" consists of the following sub-options: New project: Type the project name, which is the name it will be given to the new project you want to create. The program automatically creates a folder (using the project name accompanied by the extension “. BLD”) where the files of the specific project will be stored automatically. As we can observe in this window, the list with the existing projects is displayed, among the files list in the current address of the disk. (i.e. CALC , which appears above and left and can be altered from the user, according to windows standardisation windows). Note that the project files have the extension bld and are displayed by bold letters. Note: Starting a new project, the initial prices of the variables of study are defined through the original study called ADAPT.bld. The user can define those initial prices on any application, according to his preferences (eg. He can change the upper limit of speed in the twin pipe heating system), simply by opening the Adapt.bld project, then updating the values and finally saving the project. Project Selection: From the window that appears by clicking on this option, choose the file of the (already existing) project you want to load (for editing or just viewing). You can either type the name of the project directly at the top of the window, or directly select a project (using the project list that appears at the left part) having of course the option to select Drive (down-left part) and Directory (right part). In short, all the options described in the previous paragraph as well as all the rules that apply to any Windows application apply here too. Besides, as you will see later, at the bottom of the "Files" options group, the ability of automatically selecting the most recent projects is provided. Another useful option is the "infiltration" of the projects, through the field "modification" that has initially the value "All the studies". Concretely, by activating the list which is presented by pressing the down-arrow you can select only the projects of the last year, month, week, day or today.

Attention! Provided that you select neither a new nor an already existing Project, the program automatically considers that the project named UNNAMED is active. If you have added new data to UNNAMED project and you want to save it with different name, this can be achieved by selecting “Save as” (as shown later), where you will be asked the name you want to give the project.


“Update from” or “Exit to”: In certain applications the option “Update from application” may be available which means data are collected from a relative application (e.g. Cost Distribution is updated from Thermal losses calculation ), or the option "Update from Drawing" where the application calculation sheet is automatically updated from the ground plan of an installation designed and "certified" according to the Fine package (when an application is running separately, the option “Update from Drawing” has no effect). Finally, the option “Exit to”, that is available for certain applications, creates commonly used files with other applications (e.g. “Exit to” -> “Twin Pipes System” within Thermal Losses application).

Attention! The option «Update from» should be used with caution as it automatically updates the calculation sheet, and in case there are already data it could overwrite them with empty ones. For example, if you select «Update from Drawing» for a project that has not been priory designed & certified (using the Fine programs), blank characters will be transferred to the logistic sheets.

Save: With this option you can save the project you have loaded and have been working on to the hard drive. Save as...: With this option you can save the project you have already loaded, to a different folder in the hard disk using the (second) name you are asked to give. This way you can easily copy or change the name of the project you are working on. Load Prototype: With this option, the display template that has been stored is displayed on the screen. As it has been mentioned above, the Default (Prototype) is a specific configuration of the application windows, but also some default values, according to the user’s preferences. In particular, it can be “restored” the windows status (open, closed), the windows position and size, the type and the size of windows fonts. Save as Prototype: With this option you can save as default prototype any configuration of windows and icons of a specific application on your screen. For instance, if you want the following screen to appear first in "Air-ducts" application, you can act so as to attain the following configuration on screen and then click "Save as Prototype". With every "Load Prototype" selection that is committed thereafter this particular prototype will appear.

- 182 - FINE - HVAC

Printing Prototypes: Printing Prototypes provide a variety of printing ways (printing styles). In order to create a printing prototype, create a prototype (as in the case of the normal prototype mentioned above) and then select “Printing Prototypes”. The following dialogue window appears where the template name is defined (using a two-digit number, e.g. 01 in the first field and explanation in the second). Then click on the key “Save as”. Respectively, if you want to “Load” a prototype (just to see or modify it, since you have to "call" it through printing menu if you want to use it in printing), click on the key “Load”. If you click on the key “Delete”, the selected prototype is deleted.

Attention! The Printing Prototypes are in effect only in the case of the application printouts, those which are incorporated in the application and not the printouts produced by the Report Generator.

Notes: About prototype names: 1. The screen prototype is saved in every application in a file with a CFG

extension (e.g. APOL.CFG for Thermal Losses, DSOL.CFG for Twin Pipes System, and so on).


2. Printing prototypes are saved in every application using the application name, the characters PN and a two-digit number e.g. 01, 02 etc which is set by the user. The extension of the template files is RTF. For example, the name of the first prototype in the Thermal Losses list is APOLPN01.CFG, the name of the second prototype is APOLPN02.CFG and so on. The prototype names exist in order to make things easier for the user.

The following four options are for printing the study. Printing: This option is for printing the study issue according to the previously made selections in "Printer Settings". The user can have full control over the printing result using the option "Print Preview".

When "Printing" is selected, the window for the driver of the printer which has been installed in the system appears. The user can either print all the items of the study (only the items that have been selected in "Printing Contents" will be printed) by clicking on "OK", or select the desired pages, after having activated the key “Pages”. The user can also set printing to file by activating the respective checkbox. In this way, a prn-type file is created which can only be printed if sent to a self printer (e.g. by copying file.prn lpt1). Finally, the user can set the number of copies by inserting the right number in the field "Copies" and ask for collated copies (by clicking in the adjacent checkbox). Printing Contents: Printing contents depend on the specific application and consist of the various items that comprise a complete study. By selecting "Printing Contents", a window appears from which you can easily choose the items you want to print. For example, in "Thermal Losses" a window appears with the following items:

- 184 - FINE - HVAC

The items that the user wants to print can be easily selected by checking the respective checkbox before each section with the mouse, so that the marking "x" appears in the checkbox (which means that it has been selected). In this way, the desirable items can be selected. The keys "All" or "None", which appear on the top right side of the window, simply help you select all the items in one move or cancel a selection (and then, if you want, you can modify the list respectively). If you click on "OK", you accept your selections and "exit" the window but if you click on "Cancel" you "exit" the window without having accepted your selections. Finally, note that the command "Save as Prototype", described above, affects the "Printing Contents" as well, so the user can set his preferences for each application only once. Each one of the Printing Contents corresponds in a type of printout, among two types. More specifically, some of the contents correspond to the "Application" type of printout. This means that they are fixed, so that we have not the possibility of changing or erasing them. Besides, some of the contents correspond to the "User" type of printout. These can be defined freely from the user. Each application includes such a type of printouts, which can be changed by the user. This is done by first selecting the “process” icon (the one with the notepad) and then make the appropriate changes into the word processing environment. For example we can define a printout within the twin pipe application, by writing first the titles "Branch of Network", "Length" and "Total Friction" and below them to insert the relative variables (parameters) of this application. These parameters will take their real value within the “user printout” of a specific project. This capability, the report generator, gives freedom to the user, to define his own printouts, according his preferences. Printing Parameters: This option opens a window for setting the printing parameters, such as headers, frames, page numbers (foliation), fonts etc.

As shown, the "Printing Parameters" window contains a series of "tabs" which cover certain needs and are described below.


Frame Texts: The user can set headers an footers as well as page numbers, which means that certain logos can be put on the printing sheet (e.g. firm, reference number etc), on the left, right, top or bottom side of the printing page. Regarding page numbering, in particular, it should be noted that page numbers can be accompanied by any logo, as far as the code \b is typed wherever the numbers should be inserted (in the text). For example, if "Pg. \b” is typed, it will be printed as Pg. 1 for the first page, Pg. 2 for the second one and so on. The code can be typed anywhere in the text.

The user can set the desired font and font size for every Header, Footer or Page Number. This can be done by first selecting the respective Header, Footer or Page Number and then clicking on the key "Font". Then the familiar window for font setting appears.

- 186 - FINE - HVAC

Caution! The font or fonts which are set in this window apply only to the texts in frame and not to the entire printing text.

Frame: This card enables "Page Frame", "Header Underline" and "Footer Strikethrough.

Moreover, the options "Header Partitions" and "Footer Partitions" can be used if vertical partitions in various positions in the above frames are desired. An example with page frame, header frame, footer frame and central header partition is shown right below:


Finally, the user can set the distance of the frame from the paper edges as well as the frame width through the respective options on the card right side. Naturally, it is not possible to set distances which will lead paper outside the printable area of the specific printer that is being used. For that reason, if a low value is inserted, e.g. 0, the program will automatically correct it to the minimum allowable. Printers cannot print on the paper edges. Pagination: This card enables the user to set the number of the first page, as well as the respective margins from the edges of the printable area, unlike the frame, which is on the paper edges. However, to have the page numbering updated, "Page Numbering" must have been previously set in "Frame Texts”.

- 188 - FINE - HVAC

Prototype: This card enables printing in "current condition" (screen prototype) or using a selected saved printing prototype.

In the latter case, click in the checkbox for "Saved Prototype" and select the desired Printing Prototype from the list that appears.

Moreover, the options "Edit RTF Prototype" and "RTF Prototype Selection" are provided on the right side of the above card. These options enable the user to set and select, respectively, headers and footers in the case of exporting the study in a RTF-type file. Links: In case you are interested, the options "Link to MS-Word" and "Link to CAD" are provided on this last card (see command "Export to RTF" below). Regardless of the activated card on top of the "Printing Parameters" window, the options "Printer Selection", "Save" and "Load" are provided on the bottom side as well as the keys “OK” and “Cancel” to accept or cancel the selections made in printing parameters. Printer Selection: If you click on this key, the "Print Setup" window of Windows appears, where you can select the printers that have been installed in the system and modify some of their parameters (e.g. portrait or landscape printing), if needed.


Save-Load: The option "Save" enables the user to save a group of values for printing parameters (that is a certain printing style, concerning frames, headers and footers) in a file and call it back whenever needed, using the command "Load". During Saving as well as Loading, a window appears where the user can type the file name and see a list of the saved files. The ability to set "Printing Parameters" files in combination with the ability to set "Printing Prototypes" provide the user with full control over the configuration of his studies presentation (output). Of course, in any case, the user can view the results of his selections before printing, with the command "Print Preview". Print Preview: The Print Preview option, following Windows philosophy, shows on screen the complete study page to page exactly the way it will be printed. Using either the <PgUp> and <PgDn> keys or "Previous Page"-"Next Page" options you can preview previous or next pages, with "Zoom" option the on screen text size is increased, and finally with the "Exit" option (or alternatively using the <Esc> key) you can exit the Print Preview state and return to the previous state. Export to RTF: This option is used to send the contents of the study to a RTF (Rich Text Format) type file which is automatically created in the study folder (BLD) with RTF extension (and filename taken from the application name e.g. ΑPOL.RTF for Thermal Losses). Link to Word: By this command the user can be transferred to the Word program where the output of our study can be reviewed. For this to be possible, the option "Link with MS-Word" found in the last tab titled "Links", should have been activated. In this case the RTF file will automatically use the headers/footers defined in the "Prototypes" tab discussed earlier.

- 190 - FINE - HVAC

Link to 4M Editor: This command has the same effect with the previous command (Link to Word), with the only difference that the text is transferred to the 4M Editor. Exit: Exit from the application.

Note: The program memorises and shows, just above the "Exit" option, the recent studies used by the user (up to 5) (e.g. c:\4m\calc\meleth). This way, if the user wants to work with one of them, he can simply select it and loading is performed automatically. These recent studies do not include the NONAME study as it is obvious that this selection has no meaning.

1.2.2 Options The "Options" set of options includes the headings and specific parameters for each application. The headings are common to all applications and refer to the Employer, Project, Address, Designers and Date as also shown in the adjacent window. Specific parameters for each application differ depending on the particular application (e.g. "Network Options" for the Twin Pipes System, "Building Data" for the Thermal Losses etc.), and also may correspond to more than one options depending on the particular application. For this reason, they will be examined in detail in the corresponding section for each application. It is just pointed out here that for any particular application the user can assign to these specific parameters generally applicable values (e.g. maximum water velocity in the pipes, upper limit of friction losses etc.), which are basically taken into account in the calculations (default values) but can be changed at will in the calculation sheets. In other words the basic parameters of the study are under control without this imposing any flexibility limitation to selectively intervene where this is considered necessary.

Note: As mentioned earlier, initial (default) values of the above calculation parameters can be freely defined by the user, by just updating the project ADAPT.bld

It would be useful here to explain the following buttons, which are commonly used within the calculation sheets:

This arrow means that there are more than one alternative selections.

This symbol leads to a set of alternatives, as well, but taken from a table.


Τhe two arrows serve to increase or decrease the value of a parameter, by a certain step (i.e. by 1).

Τhe right arrow leads us to a menu of options.

1.2.3 View The view group of commands includes first of all the toolbars referred to in the menu options. These toolbars are grouped in logical unities, as for example the toolbars related to the "Files" (File management), "Word processing", "Help", "Sheet management" (in applications where space sheets are used) and others. Activating –i.e. "Opening"- one of the toolbars (clicking on the corresponding menu option so that the check mark is shown), we get the corresponding toolbar in the menu. The toolbar is movable (and generally is moved) where the user desires, e.g. top right, top left or bottom or any other screen area so as to "float" over the screen. This can be easily done by dragging the toolbar with the use of the left mouse button and moving it to the desired location (with the mouse button pressed), exactly the same way it is done in any windows application. In the above example (screen) several "open" toolbars in all possible places are shown. Besides, the user can change the on screen characters’ size for improved supervision. More specifically, by defining the percentage scaling, the text size (in the active window) is increased or decreased. For example, if 150% has been defined, then the calculation sheet is increased by 50% and so on. Possible scaling values are numbers 50, 75, 100, 150 and 200.

Caution! The scale and the zoom in and zoom out commands affect the appearance of the characters on screen only since the size of the printed characters depends on the size of the particular font (e.g. 12, 14 etc.) that has been defined.

1.2.4 Windows The "Windows" option comprises within windows all output results from any application including calculation sheets together with all possible options for their arrangement on screen. As far as the arrangement of the windows is concerned, the two main alternative ways we can view them on screen are "cascade" and "tile" arrangements while, of course, we can put them in any other arrangement with proper manipulations. We can select the window we want to work with, either by selecting it through the menu or clicking with the left mouse button anywhere in the window (if we can see the window on screen). In either case the window becomes active and a check indication mark appears beside its name in the menu.

- 192 - FINE - HVAC

Also, for most of the windows, an additional basic option is automatically inserted in the main menu with the name of the active window together with a set of options related to functional characteristics of this window (e.g. parameters entered into results that appear in the window) and/or with secondary options-switches activated or de-activated by successive clicking, with their active state indicated by a check mark appeared beside them. If "Windows" -> "Cascade" is selected, all open windows appear one behind the other (with the active window in front):

If "Tile" is selected, all open windows appear in a side by side arrangement:

Finally, if “Icons Arrangement” is selected, the icons are properly arranged on screen provided there are "minimized" windows in the bar at the bottom of the screen.


The most essential among the windows containing the results of an application is the window corresponding to the basic data or calculations entering sheet bearing the name “Calculation Sheet”. The “Calculation Sheet” is the core of calculations for all applications and for this reason extensive reference shall be made in the next section

Caution! Since the contents of the windows are automatically updated as calculations are continued, the processing speed is increased as far as the number of opened windows is kept small. Consequently, if the processing speed is of great importance to the user it is recommended to have no more open windows on screen at a time than actually needed.

1.2.4.1a Calculation Sheet: General Philosophy Execution of calculations takes place in an advanced calculation environment specially designed by 4Μ for the particular needs of any specific application. It is about a tabulated environment of the spreadsheet type with specific capabilities and facilities tailor-made for each application Although organization and function of the “Calculation Sheet” differs from application to application, its general structure could be standardized in one of the following 3 forms: Ι. Installation Networks: In case the application refers to an installation network (e.g. Twin Pipes system, One pipe system, or even air ducts, fan coils etc.) the calculation sheet is standardized in a specific way. More specifically, the installation network is shown in a spread sheet using lines corresponding to the network branches, and columns containing primary data (e.g. length) and results of calculations (e.g. water velocity) for each branch. An example of such a sheet for the Twin Pipes System is shown below:

In order to make the network understandable by the program a specific standardization should be followed, which is more or less the same in all applications. Said standardization is easily understood with the following simple example.

- 194 - FINE - HVAC

Suppose we have the network shown in the adjacent figure. This network comprises several branches (i.e. parts of the network), junction points and terminals (end points). Thus in this network, we have assigned arbitrary numbers to both the junction points (1,2,3) and the hydraulic terminals (4,5,6). Each junction point may be assigned a number (from 1 to 99) or a letter (lower or upper case, e.g. A, d etc) or a combination of letters and numbers (e.g. A2, AB, eZ, 2C etc.). The main logical restriction is that the starting point is always assigned the number 1. Also, assignment of the same number twice in the same network is not permitted for obvious reasons, with the exception of junction point 1 for which assignment may be repeated as desired (for networks with more than one starting points). After numbering the junction points and terminals according to the above rule and in order to represent the network in the spread sheet it is enough to give a name to the various sections of the network entered in the first column of the spread sheet. Having in mind that the order of network sections is not important, we fill in the first column with the two junction points of each section (putting a dot in between) so that the sequence of junction points matches the direction of water flow in the pipe. In the above example the sections 1.2, 2.3, 2.6, 3.4 and 3.5 should be filled in (order is arbitrary). In some other columns of the row we fill in a series of data (e.g. length of section, accessories included in the section etc.) which depend on the type of installation while the output resulting from calculations and updating the remaining columns depend also on the particular installation. Above standardization, in spite of its several variations or extensions, is generally applied so as to contribute to an easy understanding of any application even if the user applies it initially for one particular application. ΙΙ. Space Sheets: This standardization is encountered in applications where the related calculations refer to the spaces of the building (or, more generally, to other building entities such as the building views). Applications of this kind are, for example, the calculation of Thermal losses or cooling loads for each space separately. The spread sheet for a space is the structural element of this standardization, while all such sheets compose the complete set of spread sheets of the study.


Focusing our attention on a space spread sheet we see a series of rows corresponding to structural elements (e.g. walls W1, W3, openings O1, O2, floors F1 etc.) and columns referring to specific characteristics of these structural elements (such as Exposure, Length, Width etc.). Remaining columns are automatically updated with the results of calculations related to each row element (with deferent color for clarity). At the lower part of the space sheet totaling results are also given resulting from calculations performed on all rows’ data. In the example above which is an extract of thermal losses calculation, we can see the sum of room partial losses at the bottom right. ΙΙΙ. Data Tables: All remaining applications are registered in this last standardization. Here, data are usually presented in a tabulated form and output results update other tables or documents and technical reports. Each spread sheet, irrespectively of the standardization category (Ι, ΙΙ, or ΙΙΙ) it belongs to, is characterized by some general rules.

- 196 - FINE - HVAC

Thus, taking as a reference point the above spread sheet (related to the Twin Pipes System), and ignoring initially the filled in values, we can see the columns heading zone (every column has its title and units), the zone for filling in values with a number of rows (separated with dotted lines for better supervision and clarity) and a status bar where helpful information appear depending on the position in the spread sheet we are in. Since the spread sheet contains usually a lot of information and is the core of the calculations in each application, it is particularly useful to have it maximized on screen by clicking on the upper arrow (located at top right of the window), so that the whole computer screen area is utilized. Next section will familiarize you with the “Calculation Sheet”, as the basic functions described therein hold good for every application.

1.2.4.1b Calculation Sheet: Editing Functions First of all, the user has the possibility, as stated earlier, to use in the frames where the Calculation Sheets appear the "Font" option for both the calculations zone (so that values appear with the desired size and style) and the headings zone (so that headings are shown to the user satisfaction). As far as the headings zone is concerned the user has also the possibility to increase or decrease the column width using the mouse: As long as the mouse pointer rests on the vertical line separating two adjacent columns, it takes the form of a double arrow and then by pressing (and keeping pressed) the left mouse button and dragging, the column width is increased or decreased depending on the direction of mouse movement. In the spread sheet below we can see columns having different widths:

Above alternative supervision possibilities available to the user depend on several factors such as the resolution of the graphics card and screen size, and for this reason any possible interventions are left to the user discretion. For that matter, there is also the possibility of “Load Prototype” from the user. Note however, that best supervision results are achieved with higher resolutions and large screens Access to the positions of the zone for filling in values is carried out by means of the mouse and the arrow keys of the keyboard. Moving the mouse pointer in the zone for filling in values we can see that in some columns the pointer takes the form of a vertical line (|) while in other columns it takes the form of a prohibitive traffic sign. We cannot modify the values contained in these last columns (because they result from calculations).


If we move the mouse pointer (having the form of a cross) in to a cell or small square and click the left mouse button, we’ll see that the cell contour (outline) becomes dark and we can fill in a value or modify the cell content. In the same way we can move to any other cell, while:

• With the <Enter> key we move to the next cell below and so on.

• With the <Tab> key we move to the next cell at the right and so on. Also, in case the window width is not large enough to accommodate all columns, we can review the entire calculation sheet by manipulating it up-down or left-right using the vertically or horizontally sliding keys (potentiometer like). In addition, when access to a column for filling values is denied the mouse pointer takes the form of a prohibitive traffic sign. This way, the user is informed that the quantity under examination is a derivative one i.e. resulted automatically from calculations. The user should keep in mind the following useful commands when entering values in the Calculation Sheets of any application:

• Deleting cell content: Pressing the <Del> key on a cell, the value it contains is deleted, and the cell is blank.

• Deleting a row: Pressing the keys <Ctrl>&<Del> in combination, the row we are in is deleted.

• Inserting a row: Pressing the keys <Ctrl>&<Ins> in combination, a new (blank) row is inserted immediately below the cell we are in.

• Moving to the beginning of a row: Pressing the <Ηοme> key we move automatically in the first column of the row we are in.

• Moving to the end of a row: Pressing the <End> key we move automatically in the last column of the row we are in.

• Moving to the upper part of the sheet (first column-first row): Pressing the keys <Ctrl>&<PgUp> in combination, we automatically move in the first column-first row of the calculation sheet.

• Moving to the lower part of the sheet (first column-last row): Pressing the keys <Ctrl>&<PgDn> in combination, we automatically move in the last row of the calculation sheet.

• Finally, have in mind that you can move from an upper to a lower cell using the <Εnter> key and from a left cell to a right cell using the <Tab> key.

Note: Depending on the specific application, there might be some minor diversifications on the above described functionality.

In addition, the calculation sheet provides the user with a set of Spreadsheet Functions, which are available in most windows applications, such as the Cut-Copy-Paste type of commands of a subset of lines (or even the whole calculation sheet), the row and columns width definition, the font type (as well as font attributes, justification etc) of a selected area, and so on. By selecting a certain area of the sheet (or all of it by “select all”) and then pressing the right button of the mouse, a small menu appears on screen, with the relative

- 198 - FINE - HVAC

commands. Another useful command is the Undo/Redo command concerning the calculations. All those editing commands are also applied to other windows. Apart from the copy-paste command, in case we want to repeat a row (typical branch), it is sufficient to fill in the content of the first column, i.e. the section name, that will make a copy of the row except for the section name which remains blank. When the calculation sheet is activated, you will see in the main menu options an additional one namely “Calculation Sheet” with a secondary option “Printing Parameters”. Selecting “Printing Parameters” the adjacent dialog box appears from where the user may affect the appearance of the printed Calculation Sheet. Specifically, the user may define a bold outline (frame), a normal outline, or no outline, horizontal and/or vertical lines, as well as a raster for the titles (headings) of the spread sheet with the desired shading of tints (using the sliding key). As previously emphasized, the Calculation Sheet window is the core for all applications. Since, however, not all calculation results related to a study can be confined within the Calculation Sheet, every application has additional windows where these complementary results are accommodated to form the complete set of the study. The advisability and functional description of these windows is the subject matter of each application. For all that, we can pick out, among the available windows, some of them with common philosophy regardless of application (e.g. ‘’Bill of Μaterial – Costing’’ Window, ‘’Technical Description’’ Window etc.). The “forms” of these windows are described in the following sections not necessarily in the order found in the applications.

1.2.4.2 Bill of Materials -Costing The “Bill of Materials - Costing” window is found in all applications related directly to an installation (e.g. Twin Pipes System, Fan Coils etc.). This window comprises, in a table, the materials of the specific installation together with the quantities resulting from the calculation sheet and corresponding library values.


As shown in the example, materials are listed itemised (e.g. pipes, fittings etc.) in the rows of the table, while the table columns contain information such as "unit price", "quantity", "discount %", "VAT" and "Total Price". Calculations are perform automatically and the results appear in the last column. User can edit the bill of materials-costing table in a similar way as for the calculations sheet. This means that the same navigation rules with <Enter> and <Τab> keys are also applied here, as well as cell content deletion with <Del> key, row deletion with <Ctrl>&<Del> keys, row insertion etc. Also, column width can be modified exactly the same way as for the calculations sheet. When the "Bill of Materials" window is active, then (and only then) the option with the title name appears in the main menu together with the two secondary options "Offer Parameters" and "Printing Parameters": Using the first group of parameters, user has the possibility to exclude some columns of the Materials Bill-Offer table (namely VAT and Discount), as well as to select (or de-select) transition of “Analytical Descriptions” of the materials may have been selected from the “Offer” Libraries. With the second parameters group, user can affect printing and specifically to define if a frame (normal or bold) for the Materials Bill (or offer) table or horizontal/vertical lines and raster for its title, is desired. Among the available options after the Bill of Materials window is activated, is the option for materials selection from the complementary materials’ library. This option leads to a group of material libraries and hardware which bears the name “Offer Libraries”, containing materials not included in the main libraries for each application. The purpose of these libraries is to help the user, who deals with construction as well, to add anything he considers worthwhile (e.g. small hardware, jobs, equipment that may be embedded in the construction etc.). The materials included in the Offer libraries are common to all applications, that is they may be selected from any application comprising them. Material selection from “Offer Libraries” is performed while we are in a row of the column by clicking on the button (or pressing the <F11> key) and selecting, from the appearing list, the library category first and the particular material next. There is also the possibility to select, using the button (or the <F8> key), a material from the last called library (thus avoiding to select library category each time we attempt access to the libraries). It is obvious that with all these capabilities available, the user may easily have an image for the project cost or draw up an Economical Bid for the construction of the corresponding installation and, of course, print it in the desired form.

- 200 - FINE - HVAC

1.2.4.3 Technical Description The “Technical Description” window supports composition of the project’s technical description, allowing selection of different technical description prototypes with all word processing features available, as we will see below, and free configuration of new prototypes according to the user desire. Making the selection “Technical Description” the corresponding title window in yellow background appears updated with the project’s results (where word-parameters exist). When the Technical Description window is activated, an additional option in the main menu (just above the “Windows” option) is appeared with the name “Technical Description”. Choosing “Prototype Selection” from this menu the prototype management window will appear on our screen together with the list of the available prototypes for the application we work with. Selecting the corresponding prototype (with the help of the mouse and using the “Load” key), the corresponding text appears in the Technical description window (also in yellow background and with updated results of the project).

If we choose to modify an existing prototype in any way (even re-writing a description from scratch), we can easily save it using the “Save” button after giving it a name at the top right and a two-digit number (as done for the “Printing Prototypes”). Also we can easily delete a prototype using the “Delete” button.


In general, as stated earlier, a technical description prototype comprises not only text but word-parameters (in square brackets) as well. With the help of these word-parameters, user can pass values to technical description prototypes since the word-parameters are automatically replaced by the values calculated in the project we work with (for example, the word-parameter [BOILER POWER] found in the technical description text for the Twin Pipes System is automatically replaced by the thermal power value calculated in the project, e.g. 35.000 Kcal/h). Any desired modification in the technical description of the project, either by changing the position of a word-parameter or processing the text the way we want to, can be done by pressing the "Edit Prototype" icon. There is, also, the "Edit Text" icon used for further processing of the final text. This is useful, since user may wish to modify not only the prototype but also the data, which have been replaced from the project’s results (given that the first icon does not allow modification of the parameter values that have been replaced by the program). A simple example may help the user understand easily everything stated above. Of course, in case the user changes his mind after making a modification, recovering of the desired prototype is always possible with the “Load” button as stated earlier.

Note: If you want to use your own word processor (Word for example) for processing the technical descriptions, note that the corresponding prototype files are RTF files and stored in the program’s directory (i.e. in 4M\CALC\DSOL\ for the Twin Pipes System, in 4M\CALC\ΜSOL\ for the Single Pipe System and so on. Prototype file names are composed of the application name (e.g. DSOL), letters TP (Technical Description), numbers 01, 02, 03 according to the order found in the prototype list and finally the extension RTF. For example, the first technical description prototype in the list (for Single Pipe System) is MSOLTP01.RTF (stored in 4M\CALC\MSOL directory). Also, the prototype descriptions in the list appearing by pressing on the option “Prototype Selection” are stored in a separate file, in the same directory with the texts for the prototypes. The name of this file is composed of application name (first 4 letters) letters TP and extension LST. For example, the file containing the prototypes’ list, for Single Pipe System, has the name ΜSOLTP.LST and is stored in 4M\CALC\MSOL directory.

1.2.4.4 Assumptions (of the project) All applications, in the window "Assumptions" include text of the general Assumptions of the project issue, which may be included to the printing of the project as long as it is selected in the "Printing Contents". Assumptions function is similar to that of the Technical Description with the difference that there are not two icons for text editing but only one (there are no parameter-words here). In this way, the option "Assumptions" appears in the menu with the sub-option “Prototype Selection" which views the relevant prototype management window. By selecting (with “Load”) the relevant Assumption prototype, this appears in the Assumption window. The user can edit the text and define new prototypes, just as in the case of Technical Description.

- 202 - FINE - HVAC

Note: The Assumption prototype files are in the program directory (e.g. in 4M\CALC\DSOL\ for the Twin Pipes System, in 4M\CALC\ΜSOL\ for Single Tube System etc. The names of the prototype files consist of the name of the application (i.e. DSOL), the characters PR, the numbers 01, 02, 03 in the order they are in the prototype list and finally the RTF extension. In addition, the prototype descriptions in the list that appears in the program when “Prototype Selection” is selected are located in a separate file, in the same direction with the prototypes texts. The name of this file consists of the name of the application (4 characters) the characters PR and LST extension. For example the file with the prototype admissions list in One Tube System is named ΜSOLPR.LST and is located in the directory 4M\CALC\MSOL.

1.2.4.5 Cover Page (of the project issue) The “Cover Page” window is the first page of the project that is printed and the program enables the user to select between different types of cover pages, or even to create his own cover page, as it is desired. The function of the “Cover” is completely similar to this of the Technical Description. In this way, the option “Cover” appears in the menu with the sub-option “Prototype Selection” etc. By selecting a prototype (with the option “Load”) the relevant Cover page appears in the window.


Note: The prototype cover page files are located in the program directory (i.e. in 4M\CALC\DSOL\ for the Twin Pipes System, in 4M\CALC\ΜSOL\ for the One Tube System etc. The names of the prototype files consist of the application name (i.e. DSOL), the characters CP (cover page), the numbers 01, 02, 03 with the order they are in the prototype list and finally the RTF extension. In this way, for example the first technical description prototype in the list for the One Tube System application is the file MSOLCP01.RTF (that is located in directory 4M\CALC\MSOL). Besides, the descriptions of the prototypes in the list that appears in the program by selecting “Prototype Selection” are in a separate file, in the same directory with the prototype texts. The name of this file consists of the name of the application (4 characters) the characters CP and LST extension. For example the file with the admission prototypes list in One Tube System is named ΜSOLCP.LST and is located in the directory 4M\CALC\MSOL.

1.2.4.6 Text Editing-Word Processor The software package contains a build-in Word Processor with advanced functions (just as word), in order the user to have all the needed management and editing tools. On this wordprocessor is based the program’s report generator, as well. Particularly, in each case the text-editing program is selected through the relevant icons, then the menu of the text-editing program replaces the application menu, which covers all the upper part of the screen.

The option groups of the text editing program consist of the following: "Files", "Edit", "View", "Insert", "Font’’, "Paragraph’’, "Table" and "Other options". In detail, the commands of the text-editing program are divided in the following groups and sub-groups:

- 204 - FINE - HVAC

Editing Commands Cut Copy Paste Delete Paste Special Edit Picture Undo Redo Select All Repaginate Edit Section Edit Style Edit Frame Drawing Object Edit Drawing Object Vertical Base Position Edit Page Header Footer First Page Header Footer Create First Page Header Create First Page Footer Delete First Page Header Delete First Page Footer Edit Footnote text Edit Ole Object Inline Ime Line Edit Insert Line Before Insert Line After Delete Line Copy Line Block Move Line Block Join Line Split Line


View Commands Page Mode Fitted View Ruler Tool Bar Status Ribbon Paragraph Marker Hidden Text Field Names Hyperlink Cursor Page Header Footer Page Border Zoom Insert (Add) Commands Insert Break Page Break Section Break Column Break Embed Picture Link Picture Ole Object Frame Drawing Object Page Number Page Count Footnote Bookmark Data Field Text Input Field Checkbox Field Non breaking Space Non breaking Dash Optional Hyphen

- 206 - FINE - HVAC

Font Commands Normal Bold Underline Double Underline Italic Superscript Subscript Strike Fonts Style Text Colour Background Colour Spacing Hidden Boxed Protect Hyperlink Paragraph Commands Normal Centre Right Justify Justify Both Double Space Indent Left Indent Right Hanging Indent Keep Together Keep with Next Widow Orphan Control Border and Shading Paragraph Spacing Background Color Bullet Numbering


Set Tab Clear Tab Clear All Tabs Style Table Commands Insert Table Insert Row Insert Column Merge Cells Split Cell Delete Cells Row Position Row Height Header Row Keep Row Together Cell Border Cell Shading Cell Colour Cell Vertical Align Select Current Column Show Gridlines More Options Search Search Forward Search Backward Replace Jump Protection Lock Snap to Grid Background Picture The basic options may be called using a combination of function keys, which is written next to each command (in the menu), according to the general standardization. As the detailed description of each of the above commands would demand a lot of space, the reader should refer to any manual for the Word.

- 208 - FINE - HVAC

Besides, when the text-editing program is "active", there is a "ruler" in the upper part of the text window, which shows the distances with the "guides" and the tab symbols.

In general whatever applies to Word applies here too. Regarding the "guides" used for defining the left and right margins, the left guide can be moved as a total (by clicking on it and dragging it with the mouse), but the upper guide can be moved in the relevant position in order to start each paragraph with an indent. As far as text alignment (tabs) is concerned, there is the possibility of using 3 tab types for left, central and right text alignment. In order to put TAB in one row, first select the desired type of tab (if you click on the tab symbol -on the left end of the ruler- you will see the 3 tab types one after another), left click on the point of the ruler where you would like to put the tab (if you want it removed, click on it and drag it outside the ruler). In the above figure of a ruler the 3 tab types have been put in 3 different positions. In order to put TAB in more than one rows, first select the rows using the mouse, so that they turn into black (that is the familiar "select" of Windows) and then put TAB on the ruler. The TAB function is about a word or sentence being aligned with the first TAB point on the ruler, when the key "Tab" is pressed. Generally, TAB points are a very powerful tool for text alignment.

Caution! In order to exit the Word Processor and return to the previous desktop, you should select "Exit" in the first menu under "File".

As mentioned earlier, the Report Generator of the program is based on the above described word processor. In order to define a report, the user has to insert the variables (parameters) of any application in the righ position into the text (i.e. under the titles). For example the parameter ''net_sec'' should be placed under the title “Branch of Network”. All these parameters take automatically the exact values that have been calculated by the program. Example of creation of a new output: Assuming that we want to create a new output within the application double pipe heating system, after running the application we should go to define a new “user printing output” by clicking on the

“new output” icon .

FINE – HVAC - 209-

We also give a name for this new output after clicking on the standard name(Noname0000015 in our example). Then we click on the icon “output processing”and thus we are automatically “transported” to the word processor. Here we candefine the page of our new printing output by inserting tables, writing titles, notesetc (see picture).

Note: The thickness of the lines of a table are defined through the command“wideness of cell outline” from the “table” group of commands..

The texts will be shown in the printing outputs, together with the variables(parameters) that have to be inserted as follows:

The icon “Insertion of a variable” leads to a window, having on its left side thedata concerning the application, and on the right side the variables available. Byselecting and putting into our text the relative variables we create our output. Unitsare also variables selected in the same way (and put next to the respectiveparameters).

- 210 - FINE - HVAC

Apart from the icon “Insertion of a variable” there is also the icon “Insertion ofa table field”. This icon refers to variables that are repeated as lines of a table. Forexample, the variables of the table shown in the next picture have been selectedfrom the group “calculations of the double piping heating system” through this icon.


Printing Outputs FilesThe files of the printing outputs defined by the user, are stored in the folder named“Reports” which exists for any application. There are two types of printing outputsfiles. Those with the extension RPR and those with the extension RPT. The firsttype concerns the outputs which are going to be printed once, while the PRT willbe repeated as many times as the number of pages needed to include the data ofthe calculation sheets. The “Reports” folder includes also a file of the type xxx.RPIthat can be edited by the “notepad”, which includes the printing outputs codes withtheir names, as have been defined by the user.

Note: In the case of header titles such as in the case of the table of thecalculation sheet, the user has to define those header titles as “header” by firstselecting them and then enabling the command “line header” (from the “table”group of commands, of the word processor menu), as shown in the example of thenext window:

Although the concept described above is unique for any application, eachapplication has obviously its special parameters. Note that the name of anyhighlighted (current) parameter appears on the status bar of the window.

Caution! During the creation of a new output by the report generator, the user hasto be carefull at the following two points:

• Avoid using the Copy-Paste command, especially for the variables.

• Quit the word processor through the command “File”->”Close” and not byclosing the word processor window.

- 212 - FINE - HVAC

1.2.4.7 Vertical Diagram In the case of a network application, this window contains a figure of the network vertical diagram, according to the calculation sheet data and the respective polar coordinates (properly filled in). An example of a vertical diagram is shown in the following screen:

It is reminded that, if the network has been designed on AutoNET, the vertical chart is automatically created, therefore there is no need to create one here (of course, it can be done if the user wants to). After the "Vertical Diagram" window has been activated, a homonymous option appears in the basic menu containing the secondary options "Design Scale", "Page Display", "Parameters", "Printing Parameters" and "Export to DWG or/and DXF File", which are explained below: Design Scale: The design scale is set or modified (e.g. 1:100, 1:50 etc). Show Page: The borders of the page, which has been selected to be printed (in Printer Settings), are shown in dotted line if it does not fit in the selected paper. This secondary option is a switch, in fact, that is it can be activated and deactivated by successive clicks, while a check mark appears next to it when active.


Finally, it is reminded that the user can view the exact format of the printed Vertical Chart using the "Print Preview" option (only if the "Vertical Diagram" has been selected in "Printing Contents"). All commands in the set of options "View" are applicable here, e.g. the user can "Zoom out" once or more to see the whole vertical chart and the required pages as well (more or less depending on the set scale), or “Zoom in” to see the various details using the vertical and horizontal sliding keys. Parameters: In the adjacent window - dialogue box the more important vertical diagram drawing parameters are shown, i.e. printing scale, paper dimensions, frame, design position and the setting of the design label. By modifying these parameters the user can watch the vertical diagram configuring respectively.

- 214 - FINE - HVAC

Export to DWG and DXF files: DWG or DXF files are created on the hard disc (within the design folder) for further processing using any other designing package (e.g. AutoCAD, IntelliCAD etc). In particular, the design filename consists of the application name (4 letters, e.g. DSOL for Twin Pipes System, FANC for Fan Coils etc), the 2 characters VR (i.e. VeRtical) and finally the extension DWG or DXF respectively. For example, the DWG file of the vertical diagram for the Twin Pipes System Installation of the MEL project will be file DSOLVR.DWG which will have been created within design folder MEL.BLD.

1.2.4.8 Network Drawing This window contains a rough network drawing, according to the calculation sheet data and the respective polar coordinates (properly filled in). For example, if the above-described vertical chart and the respective drawing are loaded simultaneously, the result is shown below:

Everything stated above about the vertical chart apply to "Design Scale" and the other secondary options that come with the option "Drawing" of the basic menu (when the respective window is active) as well.


1.2.4.9 Other result windows In every application there are various result windows, each of which refers to certain calculations. For example, the Boiler and the Circulator selection windows, in Heating (see screen below), the Duct Fan selection window etc are such windows. These windows are analytically described within every application.

1.2.5 Libraries Libraries contain the materials needed for the specific installations examined in every application as well as additional data. For example, in Heating, libraries consist of smaller libraries, such as radiator, pipe, accessory, boiler, circulator etc libraries. Although libraries are grouped depending on the type of the material they describe -that' s why libraries are examined thoroughly within the frame of every application-, they can be also grouped in general categories, the more important of which are: Pipes: Regardless of the specific application, pipes are grouped in general categories, by description and roughness, which are summarised in small tables where a section list along with the respective data (nominal diameter, inner diameter, and cost) is shown. Receptors: Receptors could be radiators, fan coils, grills etc. Regardless of the application they represent, the contents of a receptor library are presented in list form:

- 216 - FINE - HVAC

If a certain receptor is selected from the list, the necessary data for the calculations are shown on the window right side. In some cases, another window appears containing additional data. For example, in "Radiators", besides the type and the main features, there is also a window showing the radiator range (grouped by slice (or elements) number or dimensions) and the respective output (see adjacent window), while in "Grilles", besides the type and the features, there is also a window showing the opening dimensions range. Fittings: Fittings libraries are found in installation network applications and contain the various fittings in list form, while the main features of every accessory (z resistance and cost) are also mentioned. Various Materials (e.g. Boiler-room equipment): Material libraries are part of almost every application. Circulator or pump libraries comprise a representative example in network applications, as shown in the following screen.


1.2.6 Help This option includes a number of options that aim to support the user in learning each application-program following various ways. More specifically, the following sub-options are included: Contents and Index: It is about the classic windows help in a modern html form (links, internet search etc). More specifically, with the help of the Contents and Index that use key words, as well as the various Hypertext links within the help documents, the user can pinpoint the issue he is interested in and solve any problem, related to both the theory and the operation of the program.

Note: The Contents are organised in a tree-view, divided in Categories-Sub-categories-Topics which can be accessed directly by "unfolding" with double-click the categories and sub-categories. In each topic there can be selected the underlined words which direct to relevant topics, as well as possible references at the bottom part. During searching, the return to a previous page can be accomplished with the use of the "Back" button. A Topic can also been searched for with the use key-words, by going to Index and by selecting the key-word either from the alphabetical list or by typing the word (with the first letter Capital). Finally, at the top part of the Help window appear the "Hide" button (used to hide the left part that contains the contents and the index-it changes into the "Show" button), the "Print" button (used to print the corresponding topic) and the "Options" button (including other commands of minor importance).

Link to the 4Μ web: If an internet connection is available, this option transfers us automatically to the 4Μ web site. Send e-mail: With the Send e-mail command the user may send an e-mail to the company support department, in free form.

- 218 - FINE - HVAC

Ask by e-mail: With the "Ask by e-mail" command a standard question form of 4Μ web site appears, which the user may fill in describing the problem and the exact conditions under which it appeared or making a comment. On line Registration: With the “On line registration” option the new customer may send his personal data in order to be stored into the company’s DataBase. This step is not obligatory as there is a registration card that can be sent (by fax or by mail) after being filled, but it is available for those who find that mailing through internet is more convenient. Questions-Answers: With the "Questions-Answers" option the user may be informed on the Answers to the most Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) related to the program he uses. This works in a way similar to the way that is widely used throughout the internet. On line Upgrade: With the "On Line Upgrade", which is a very important option, the user has the ability under certain conditions, to “download” the latest releases of his programs. More specifically, a screen appears where the package applications and the dates of the latest upgrades are displayed (so that compared to the date on the user’s CD it can be verified whether a more recent release is available). Technical Essays in the Web: With the "Technical Essays in the Web" option the user may update the technical essays of his applications by "downloading" them to his hard disk drive. All he has to do is to follow step by step the Instructions presented in the site, where the user can be transferred to by selecting the "Technical Essays in the Web" option. Project patterns in the Web: With this option the user may download from 4M site specific project patterns, in order to learn the program easily. All he has to do is to follow step by step the Instructions presented in the site, where the user can be transferred to by selecting this option. About: An “About” screen appears on which the exact release version of the product purchased by the user is displayed. As far as the internet options that support the user are concerned their importance is profound, while amongst others are "live", updated and expanded continuously (e.g. new project patterns, extensive technical essays add-ons etc). The user may of course access the services above by entering the 4Μ site as well (in the address www.4m.gr).


1.2.7 ADAPT Manager ADAPT Manager is a program utility within the other applications, which helps the user to have a global view about his projects and case studies. More specifically, the ADAPT Manager permits:

• To Select a project, in order to see which studies have been elaborated (i.e. heating losses, cooling loads, air ducts etc) with their titles and details. By clicking on a study, the relative application (program) automatically runs and loads the file of this study.

• To copy the project in another file (bld type of file) and then keep or delete one or more of the studies included.

• To make a live update of the latest versions of each application, through a full automated procedure.

On the left side of the ADAPT Manager main menu, we can see and run (through a double click) the applications. We can choose a vertical or horizontal view of the main screen of ADAPT Manager by clicking on the proper icon. Then, we can choose among the following commands: Project Selection: By selecting a certain project we can see all the relative information. In particular, on the column in the middle, we can see the case studies that have been implemented for the selected project. If we select a certain study (i.e. heating losses) of this project, we can see on the right the titles and details of this study. By a double click the respective application runs and the “contents” of the case study are loaded. If an application is highlighted, then by pressing the right button of the mouse, and choosing “Add” on the menu that appears, we can see a list with the vacant studies. We can select anyone of these studies (displayed by a black color) in order to run the relative application. Save As: We can save the loaded project file in another file (with a different name). Close:: We close the project file, after confirming our selection on the Yes/No menu.

- 220 - FINE - HVAC

Project Titles: We can see and edit the project titles. Live Update: There is a special menu for the Live Update procedure, composed of 4 colums: The installed applications (first column), the dates of the versions installed on our PC (second column), the dates of the online versions (4M server), and finally the fourth column with the check boxes corresponding to the applications. These boxes are automatically checked in the case that an application in our computer is older than the latest one, in 4M server. Of course, the user has the last word to make his own choises. Then, by pressing the button “Update” on the lower-right side, the live update procedure starts and the applications are updated. The new files are located on the correct path, in other words there is no need for any installation procedure.


2. Heating

The Heating package consists of four applications which function either independently or in conjunction with each other. These applications are listed below:

• Thermal Losses: Heat losses are calculated in each building floor and room. This procedure usually comprises the first step of a heating project.

• Twin Pipes System: All the necessary calculations for the installation of a Twin Pipe Heating System are made and the required equipment is selected (radiators, pipes, boiler, burner, circulator, safety device, tank, chimney etc).

• One Pipe System (or Single Pipe System): All the necessary calculations for the installation of an One Pipe Heating System are made and the required equipment is selected (radiators, pipes, boiler, burner, circulator, safety device, tank, chimney etc).

• Infloor Heating System: All the necessary calculations for the installation of an Infloor System are made and the required equipment is selected (radiators, pipes, boiler, burner, circulator, safety device, tank, chimney etc).

The four Heating applications are described in detail in sections 2.1 - 2.4 which follow.

- 222 - FINE - HVAC


2.1 Thermal Losses Double click on the relevant icon to run the Thermal Losses program. After a while, the basic menu window appears:

As you can see, the basic menu options are divided into the groups "Files", "Options", "View", “Windows”, "Libraries" and "Help", which are described below along with their secondary options.

2.1.1 Files The option "Files" contains secondary options which apply to each application and have already been described in detail in section 1.2.1. Summarizing, the options in brief are: New project: Type a name in order to save the new project in a file. Project Selection: A window appears where you can select the desired (existing) project file and load it.

Attention! If neither a new nor an existing Project is selected, the program automatically considers that the UNNAMED project is active. If you add new data to the UNNAMED project and you want to save it with a different name, select “Save as” and type the new project name.

Update from Drawing: In the case of cooperation with the FINE package, the project calculation sheets are updated with the drawing data. This option replaces the data that have already been saved in the calculation sheet.

- 224 - FINE - HVAC

Attention! If the option "Update from Drawing" is selected, without previously opening a project and inserting rooms in the ground plans using the Fine package, any existing data in the calculation sheets will be replaced with blanks.

Export: This option can be selected only if the heat losses calculation is completed and you want to proceed to studying a "TWIN PIPES SYSTEM", "ONE PIPE SYSTEM" or “INFLOOR HEATING SYSTEM” heating system network, selecting the respective secondary option so that the auxiliary link files can be created. Furthermore, if you want to export data from Thermal Losses to “COST DISTRIBUTION” (of Heating Expenditure) or to “SYSTEMS-PSYCHROMETRY”, you should select the respective secondary options. When you select one of the above secondary options, auxiliary files are created in order to update automatically the calculation sheets of the respective application, while, in the case of incomplete filling, auxiliary messages appear on screen. In this case, you should correct the error and select once again the respective secondary option. For example, if you select "Cost Distribution" and the message "Unspecified Properties" appears, you should activate the calculation sheet of the room where ownership is not defined, define ownership and select "Cost Distribution" again. After creating the files and activating the respective application, the calculation sheets can be updated by selecting the respective option for data query (e.g. in expenditure distribution, in the first set under “Files” there is the option “Link to Losses”).

Note: If you have designed the whole installation on Fine, you should not use the command “Export to” -> “Twin Pipes System”, “One Pipe System” or “Infloor Heating System”, because if you select "Net Recognition" the program updates automatically the calculation sheets of these 3 applications.

Save: The project you are currently working on is saved on the hard disc (with the previously given name). Save as...: The project you are currently working on is saved in a different file with a new name. Restore Prototype: The saved prototype appears on the screen. Save as Prototype: The form, which has been created by the user and is displayed on the screen when this option is selected, is saved as a Prototype. Printing Prototypes: The printing prototype management window is activated. Printing: The project issue is printed according to the previously selected options in "Printing Contents" and "Printing Parameters", following the print preview output. Printing Contents: You can select the project items you want to print, as shown in the respective window:


Printing Parameters: The desired printing parameters can be selected in this window according to the procedure already mentioned in Chapter 1. Print Preview: The complete project issue appears on the screen, exactly as it will be printed, page to page. Export to RTF: A RTF file containing the project items is created (within the project directory, with the name APOL.RTF). Furthermore, the user can select this command if a direct link to MS-Word is desired. Link to MS-Word: A RTF file containing the project items is created (within the project directory, with the name APOL.RTF). Παράλληλα, ενεργοποιείται το MS-Word (εφόσον είναι εγκατεστηµένο στον υπολογιστή σας). Link to 4M Editor: A RTF file containing the project items is created (within the project directory, with the name APOL.RTF). Παράλληλα, ενεργοποιείται o 4M Editor. Exit: With this command, the application stops running.

2.1.2 Options There are 3 basic data categories of the project: Project options, building data and typical data.

2.1.2.1 Project Options The "Project Options" include the project headings, where you can type the data concerning the Employer, the Project, the Location, the Date and the Project Manager, as shown in the respective form.

- 226 - FINE - HVAC

2.1.2.2 Building Data When “Building Data” is selected, a window appears presenting a list of items concerning mainly the building and some additional data. These items and the values which should be given to them are explained right below, exactly in the same order in which they appear in the window:

• Mean minimum Outdoor temperature: The designer can see (by pressing F11 or the appropriate button into the field) the list containing climatologic data for the cities, which are saved in the library, and either select a value from it or type directly the desired temperature value.

• Desired indoor temperature: The designer types the more typical indoor temperature, in case there are more than one values. This value can be selectively edited in the fields of the spaces where a different temperature is required. In order to select the indoor temperature, the user can consult the auxiliary table which appears by pressing F11 or the appropriate button into the field.

• Not-heated spaces temperature: The temperature of the building spaces which are not heated (e.g. staircase) should be typed in this field or the user can consult the auxiliary table which appears by pressing F11 or the appropriate button into the field.

• Soil temperature: The soil temperature should be typed in this field.

Note: The above values determine the temperature difference Dt for each structural element and are automatically transferred to every new structural element the user adds in the calculation sheet. The user can modify these values for every structural element on the calculation sheet. If you add some structural elements in the calculation sheet and then modify one of the above temperatures, only the elements with not modified temperature will change. For example, if 20°C is defined as "Desired indoor temperature" and 10°C as "Not-heated spaces temperature" and then 12°C is defined as "Not-heated spaces temperature", the Dt for the internal walls will change from Dt = 20°C-10°C=10°C to Dt = 20°C-12°C=8°C while the temperature difference for each internal wall with a different Dt will remain unchanged because the program assumes that they have been modified by the user.

• Calculation Methodology: Depending on whether you have typed "1" or "2", the calculations will follow the older (1977) or the new (1983) DIN standard respectively. This option determines the following auxiliary tables (e.g. R or r number) as well as the calculation method (e.g. automatic calculation for increase due to wind for buildings higher than 10 m in the new DIN). In Turkey, however, the DIN 1977 is generally preferred due to the long breaks which are usually the case.

• Building characteristic number Hk: It depends on how much the building is exposed to winds (pressing F11 or the user can consult the auxiliary table which appears by pressing F11 or the appropriate button into the field, an auxiliary table, based on the respective DIN, appears).


• Shut-Down period: One of the 3 options should be selected: "0 break hours", "8-12 break hours" or "12-16 break hours". The third option is default, as it is the most usual.

• Space characteristic number Rκ (DIN 59) or r (DIN 83): Depending on the ratio of the internal to external openings, an auxiliary table, based on the selected DIN, appears (by pressing F11 or the appropriate button into the field).

• Mean Space increment (%): This value is used only in the case of non-automatic increase calculations (see last option), as it is simply stated for every room, can be selectively modified by the user and is not affected by the "advisory" description in brackets next to it (in the losses sheet of each space). Note that the new DIN ignores increase due to breaks since the heating system is scheduled to operate continuously.

• Number of Levels (1-15): The number of the floors which should be heated (from 1 to 15) is stated here. Practically infinite number of spaces can fit in any one of these floors.

• Typical Level Height: The standard floor distance (e.g. 3 m) is the default value for floor distance. This option is very useful since the user avoids typing this value in each field in the space calculation sheet, except the fields where it should be modified in the losses sheet.

• Unit System (Κcal/h ή Watt): Here you should state the desired units for the results. The user can change the units any time and the results will be automatically modified.

• Floor on ground level: You should type the number of the floor which is on the ground level (e.g. 2nd floor), so that the floor distances and, therefore, the rift increase due to height (DIN 1983) can be automatically calculated.

• Automatic Increment Calculations: If you check the box, the increase percentage is automatically modified in every room in combination with the above selected DIN. Therefore, the increase percentage due to exposure, breaks and walls will be displayed analytically for each space.

2.1.2.3 Typical Options This term is used to describe some of the usual types of the building structural elements, which are summarized in the respective window:

- 228 - FINE - HVAC

As shown in the window, the following structural element classification can be defined:

• External Walls (W1, W2, etc): The thermal conductivity coefficient k can be typed either independently or by selecting one of the walls from the respective column of the list which appears when the appropriate button into the field is pressed.

In fact, this list contains the external wall library, which can be updated by the user through the respective secondary option under "Libraries".

• Internal Walls (I1, I2, etc): The thermal conductivity coefficient k is typed in the same way as for the external walls (if the appropriate button into the field is pressed, another auxiliary table with the internal walls saved in the library appears, from which a wall can be selected).

• Floors (F1, F2 etc): The thermal conductivity coefficient k is typed (if the appropriate button into the field is pressed, an auxiliary table with the library floors appears, from which a floor can be selected).

• Ceilings (or Roofs) (C1, C2 etc): The thermal conductivity coefficient k is typed (if the appropriate button into the field is pressed, an auxiliary table with the library ceilings appears, from which a ceiling can be selected).


• Openings (O1, O2 etc): The user should type the opening dimensions (width, height), the thermal conductivity coefficient k (if or the appropriate button into the field is pressed, the auxiliary library table appears, from which a window can be directly selected), the air penetration coefficient (infiltration) a (if or the appropriate button into the field is pressed, another auxiliary table appears) and leaf number (one, two etc). The data which will remain blank can be filled in later within the losses calculation sheet. For example, if there are French windows of the same type and height (2.20) but different length, a standard opening O1 can be defined and the user can type a value to every feature except the length. Calling O1 in the calculation sheet, all data except the length will be transferred, that is the length field should then be filled in.

Note: If you modify any value within the “Typical Options”, all calculation sheets will be automatically updated with the current values. This way, the user maintains overall control over the structural element parameters and he is able to see how the total building losses are affected in relation to various construction options (e.g. double glass windows, less or more insulation and so on).

2.1.3 View This set of options includes the secondary option "Toolbars" which are described in section 1.2.3 in detail.

2.1.4 Windows The option “Windows” includes a series of calculation and result windows, in which the analytical project calculations are presented. The main window which comprises the core of the calculations for the "Thermal Losses" application is the Thermal Losses Calculation Sheet, which is described in the following section.

2.1.4.1 Thermal Losses Calculation Sheet The calculation sheets for space losses are included in the respective building floor sheets. If you select one of the floors, a list will appear containing the respective losses sheets for the floor spaces along with their management toolbar:

- 230 - FINE - HVAC

Of course, when a new project is created this list is blank. When you enter this list (with the mouse) and click the icon (with the “+” sign on the lower side) in the menu or press the key <Ins>, a small window appears, where the name of the desired space should be typed (e.g. Kitchen, Bathroom etc). If you press “OK” this space Enters the list and all you have to do is type the space dimensions in the thermal losses sheet. In the same way, if you click the icon Delete Space (with the “x“ sign) or even press <Del> on the keyboard, after selecting the name of the space, the specific space is deleted. Finally, there is also the possibility to Insert Space, by going to some intermediate space and pressing <Ctrl>&<I> or clicking the icon of insertion (with the “+” sign in the middle), therefore moving henceforward all spaces and creating a blank row (where another space can be defined).

Note: If you want to rename an existing space all you have to do is click the space name and press <Enter> or if we select the button ''Rename Space''. Then a small window appears indicating the old name, which you can change if you wish.

If you “Maximize” the thermal losses sheet (if it is not already maximised) you will be able to see the related data as well as the rows and columns which must be filled in order to calculate the thermal losses of the specific space.


To every Level (left) corresponds a Losses Sheet (right), where up to 60 different structural elements can be inserted and which can be separated in two parts: On the upper part, each row of the losses sheet corresponds to a structural element while each column refers to the data which are going to be inserted or are going to result automatically during the process of the sheet completion. Instructions about entering these data are displayed in the status bar. For each row, the first column which refers to some type of structural element should be filled first. If a typical element is concerned, the corresponding data of the building typical data sheet are automatically filled. For example, if O1 is typed on the first column of a row, the dimensions of the typical opening 1 and the respective coefficient k are transferred to the corresponding columns of the same row (the typical data are displayed if F11 is pressed). For the non typical structural elements no serial number is typed (e.g. O, W etc.). In each case the temperature difference, which is automatically filled, is the difference of the values entered during the general data sheet completion while also in the column "Surfaces equal Number" the value 1 is automatically filled. These values can change of course whenever the user desires. For each row-structural element the following must be defined: The exposure, the indication "Subtracted" (by S) since it considers an element that can be removed from the element just above this one, the thickness (optional), the length and the height of the structural element, the number of similar surfaces, the thermal conductivity coefficient and the temperature difference. The openings are removed automatically under the following conditions:

• The openings must be entered under the walls to which they belong.

- 232 - FINE - HVAC

• A common exposure should be entered for the openings and the respective walls (or "I" if it is about internal openings on internal walls (non heated), "H" for horizontal openings/skylights, "P" for Pilotis Roof - Attention for Pilotis you enter Ceiling -e.g. C1- and not Floor).

• The indication "S" (Subtrahend) should exist in the correspondent column (for the openings it is inserted automatically at the beginning).

Note: For Floors that are adjacent to the ground you fill "F" in the second column, while when the Floor is above a non heated space you fill "I". For Roof to external space (or openings on the roof) you enter "C", to internal "I" and to pilotis "P".

On the bottom side of the screen appear data which refer to the overall sheet: These are the total increase, the losses due to slots or air changes, the total losses due to thermal conductivity and the total space losses, as well as some additional data that are used as a link to the applications of Cost Distribution and Single Pipe System. All these data are organized in 3 columns, the first two of which refer to parameters and the third to total results about the space. More specifically: In the first column appear the increase percentages due to exposure and breaks, as well as the desired increase percentage which can be modified. The total increase percentage automatically becomes equal to the value that exists on the general data sheet, which can be modified by the designer. The designer can be based either on his judgement, or on the DIN increase value. The last one is displayed on the right side in brackets, results depending on the selected methodology (DIN) and consists of two components: The increase due to exposure ZH and the general increase ZD due to breaks (ZU) and Cold Walls (ZA) (ZD=ZU+ZA). In order to have a value for the ZD, the dimensions of the space (and, consequently, the adjacent surface of the space), which are obtained automatically by the dimensions which exist two rows below, should be known. Note that according to the old DIN the total increase ZD is taken into consideration, while according to the new one, ZU is ignored and only ΖΑ is taken into consideration. Lower on the first column, the values R, H and ZΓ are shown that are typed under the “Building Data”. These values are taken into consideration automatically for the calculation of the losses due to slots, losses that are displayed in the middle of the 3rd column. The user can inrefere to the calculation since he is able to change the values R (or r), H and ZΓ. In the case of the new DIN the coefficient Η is increased automatically when the height is over 10 meters using the factor eGA. If any of these values are zero, the losses due to slots are also zero, which must be performed when there is forced ventilation (therefore the space is overpressurised).


In the second column, the space dimensions which are on the upper part (Length, Width, Height) are used for the calculation of the adjacent surface (for the calculation of the increase due to breaks) and the losses due to air changes. The calculation of the latter is performed as long as the number of changes per hour is entered in the row right below. Below fill the symbolic name of the Property (e.g. 1A, 1B, A1, 1IS or any other name you wish) to enable the cooperation with the Cost Distribution program as well as the overall results of heat losses per property (Windows). The circuit topology (to enable linking to the Single Pipe System program) and the property code (to enable linking to the heating cost distribution program) can be defined in the last two rows. Specifically, it is necessary to insert two numbers:

• The serial number of the column and circuit which passes through the space (number the circuits by level and column starting from 1). For example, if the first column of the building and the second circuit of the column pass through the specific space, you should type 1.2 in the specific level.

• The radiator serial number in the circuit (number the radiators in each circuit starting from 1). If there are more than one radiators in the same space, their serial number is inserted with a full stop (e.g. 1.2 or 2.4 etc). Note that in case of a twin pipes system no entering is required, because you can call the load of any space directly from there.

Notes: • In case that two different circuits pass through one space, it is recommended to

divide the space in two parts (e.g. Living-room part Α, Living-room part Β) in order to define the corresponding circuit in each part. If this is not possible, the user can interfere afterwards to the Single Pipe System and make the required changes.

• In case you use the Fine and you have designed the circuits in the ground plan, it is obvious that you do not need to fill the two previous fields since the topology is given and the program takes it automatically into consideration.

Finally, in the third column, the total results of the space thermal losses are presented. First of all, the Total Losses due to Thermal Conductivity are presented, that are the sum of the losses in the last column of the losses sheet (space losses). The absolute value of the increase, which corresponds to the percentage of the increase of the first column, is presented below. The sum of the two previous values provides the Final Losses due to Thermal Conductivity (Final Thermal Losses) which are displayed right below. After that, the space losses due to Openings Slots and Ventilation are presented (only one of them is provided with a value). Finally, the sum of all previous values of column 3, which provides the Total Space Losses, is presented in the lower part.

- 234 - FINE - HVAC

Note: The "Subtrahend" data option which is provided by the program (if selected by the user) offers many advantages:

• The user is able to specify independent elements in the losses calculation sheet if he desires (e.g. Subtrahend balks, pillars or low walls from the Wall sheet) achieving the maximum possible accuracy in the heat losses calculations.

• When ADAPT is used together with FINE all structural elements (balks etc) "pass" automatically from the design to the calculation sheet directly as "Subtracted", resulting in the maximum calculation accuracy without wasting time.

• Finally, a full and explicit data and result analysis is presented in the calculation sheets as well as the ability of their easy control.

In order to insert data quickly, in case they have to be thoroughly typed (if they are not automatically updated from the ground plans by Fine), the program provides the ability of typical floor (a very common case in practice) and typical space copying: Typical Level (Floor): If you go to a blank level, that is if no space is defined, the program automatically asks if this is a typical level, and you must answer “Yes” or “No”. In the first case a list will be displayed with the building levels from which you can select an already filled level to update the spaces sheets of the empty level. Typical Space: The program enables the copying of each space to any other (typical space), either on the same level or on different levels (e.g. the user can copy space 1 of level 5 to the space 5 of level 3 if he wishes to). This can be carried out in the following way:

• Go to the level and space which you want to copy.

• Press the keys <Ctrl>&<Ins> or click the icon “Copy” in the menu.

• Go to the level and space where you want the copy to be performed. Of course this space should already be defined (as described above, by pressing <Ins> and naming it). If it is not already defined you should define it.

• Press the keys <Shift>&<Ins> or click the icon “Paste” in the menu. The space sheet values you want to copy are transferred to the space sheet.

2.1.4.2 Circuits-Radiators-Properties The window “Circuits-Radiators-Properties” presents a list of the building spaces with the circuits-radiators which correspond to each space, as well as the properties to which they belong. With the help of this window, the user can control the above data and detect any omissions. This window is extremely useful in case the program displays a message about an “Unspecified Property” or “Incomplete Circuits” during the creation of the link files to Distribution and Single Pipe System (or Infloor Heating System) respectively.

2.1.4.3 Overall Data of Losses A list appears with the spaces per level and serial number with their names and their losses, as well as the side and total losses sums.


2.1.4.4 Properties Thermal Losses A list appears with the Properties and losses Qol, (Total, due to Openings and Slots respectively), that are required by the Cost Distribution program. If a link file is created, these are the losses values which will update the data sheet on the Distribution program.

2.1.4.5 Assumptions The text of the general Assumptions, which may be included in the printed project issue as long as it is selected in the "Printing Contents", is stated. If “Assumptions” is selected, the option “Assumptions” with the secondary option “Select Prototype” appear in the menu. If you select a specific Assumption prototype, the respective text appears in a window (see Chapter 1).

Note: The Assumption prototype files are in the directory 4M\CALC\APOL\ with the names APOLPR01.RTF, APOLPR02.RTF etc. The listed prototype descriptions are in the file APOLPR.LST.

2.1.4.6 Cover (of the project issue) The “Cover” window is the first printed page of the project and the program enables the user to select among different types of cover pages, or even create his own cover page, exactly as he wants it.

Note: The cover page prototype files are in the directory 4M\CALC\APOL\ with the names APOLCP01.RTF, APOLCP02.RTF etc. The prototype descriptions are in the file APOLCP.LST.

- 236 - FINE - HVAC

2.1.4.7 Energy Analysis The program has the ability of Energy Analysis by the Degree Day Method. Based on the results of the thermal losses, the program calculates the annual energy consumption required for the main cities based on the Degree Days (from weather data) which have been measured for each city on annual basis and for defined temperature limits. These data are in the "Libraries" and can be updated by the user.

2.1.5 Libraries The libraries refer to structural element types, as well as to temperature data. They can be updated by the user and therefore the user can enter his or her own data exactly as he or she desires. The categories to which the libraries of the Thermal Losses application are divided are described in the following sections.

2.1.5.1 Openings It includes various opening types, which are characterized by their particular thermal conductivity coefficient, glass coefficient and cost.

2.1.5.2 External Walls It includes a variety of external wall types, which are characterised by their particular thermal conductivity coefficient as well as by a number of other data, which are of no importance, during the thermal losses calculation at least.


2.1.5.3 Inner Walls It includes Inner Wall types, with data similar to those of the External ones.

2.1.5.4 Floors It includes various Floor types and their thermal conductivity coefficient plus some other characteristics which are not used in the thermal losses calculation.

- 238 - FINE - HVAC

2.1.5.5 Ceilings It includes various Ceiling (or Roof) types and their thermal conductivity coefficient plus some other characteristics which are not used in the thermal losses calculation.

2.1.5.6 Outside Winder Temperatures A list with the main cities is included, along with their minimum temperatures during winter, according to the available meteorological data. Furthermore, for some of these cities, where data is available, there is data on degree days for reference temperatures 10, 15, 18 and 25 respectively. In particular, the number of degree days is noted for values above and below the four previously mentioned reference temperatures. This data is taken into account in option “Energy Analysis” under “Windows”.


2.1.5.7 Recommended Winter Indoor Temperatures This pertains to the indoor temperatures recommended for various space categories, depending on their use, during winter.

2.1.6 Help This option includes a number of secondary options that aim to support the user in learning the Thermal Losses application following various ways.

- 240 - FINE - HVAC


2.2 Twin Pipes System The Twin Pipes System is executed by double clicking on the respective icon and, after a while, the main menu screen appears.

As you can see, the main menu options are divided in groups under "Files", "Options", "View", “Windows”, "Libraries" and "Help", which are described below with their secondary options.

2.2.1 Files The option “Files” includes secondary options which apply to each application and are described in detail in section 1.2.1. Summing them up, you have the following: New project: Type a name for the new project to save it in a file. Project Selection: A window appears where you can select the desired (existing) project file and load it.


Update from Drawing: In the case of cooperation with the FINE package, the project calculation sheets are updated with the drawing data. Thus, if a similar procedure has not taken place, this option should not be used.

- 242 - FINE - HVAC

Save: The project you work on is saved on the hard disc (with the previously given name). Save as...: The project you work on is saved in a different file with a new name. Load Prototype: The saved prototype appears on screen Save as Prototype: The form, which has been created by the user and is displayed on the screen when this option is selected, is saved as a Prototype. Printing Prototypes: The printing prototype management window is activated. Printing: The project issue is printed according to the previously selected options in "Printing Contents" and "Printing Parameters", following the print preview output. Printing Contents: You can select the project items you want printed, as shown in the respective window. Printing Parameters: The desired printing parameters can be selected in this window according to what has already been stated in Chapter 1. Print Preview: The complete project issue appears on screen, exactly as it will be printed, page to page. Export to ASCII File: An ASCII file (Text File), containing the project items, is created (within the project directory, named after DSOL.TXT). Link to MS-Word: A RTF file containing the project items is created (within the project directory, with the name DSOL.RTF). Παράλληλα, ενεργοποιείται το MS-Word (εφόσον είναι εγκατεστηµένο στον υπολογιστή σας). Link to 4M Editor: A RTF file containing the project items is created (within the project directory, with the name DSOL.RTF). Παράλληλα, ενεργοποιείται o 4M Editor. Export to RTF: A Rtf file, containing the project items, is created (within the project directory, named after DSOL.RTF). Exit: Exit from the application.

2.2.2 Options This pertains to the project basic data, which are divided into general data (project headings) and network data.

2.2.2.1 Project Options General data refer to titles and headings pertaining to the project identity. Initially, these are updated automatically from the general project data, which were filled out in the “Headings” of the core. The user may fill out the information and any comments he wishes for the specific project.

2.2.2.2 Network Options This option leads to the network data, which the designer must define and which concern:

• Entering Water temperature: The water inlet temperature in degrees Celsius is filled out.


• Radiators Temperature Drop: The temperature difference is filled out - inlet minus return (temperature drop on radiators). The usual value is Dt=15 (certain books refer to Dt=20 when inlet tn is 90). It is also noted that Dt=10 in low temperature Twin Pipes System Network (tn=60).

• Room temperature: Room temperature (usually 20 degrees Celsius).

• Main pipes type: The type of the main pipe is selected (e.g. copper pipe). • Main pipes roughness: The roughness of the main pipe is given, which takes

an automatic value depending on the type of pipe you have selected.

• Secondary pipes type: The type of the secondary pipe is selected, if one is to use a second type of pipe in the network (e.g. copper pipe for the columns and plastic pipes for the horizontal piping).

• Secondary pipes roughness: The roughness of the secondary pipe is given which, initially, takes an automatic value according to the type of pipe you have chosen.

• Maximum water velocity: This consists of the maximum water velocity based on which the cross-sections are calculated. The designer may alter this either totally (for each network section) or selectively (for a specific section) in the calculation sheet.

The recommended circulation water velocities (in m/s) are: a) For piping in inhabited areas, w=0.3-0-5m/s. b) For piping in storage rooms, basements, ground floors, stores, staircases, in small and medium networks (up to 80 000 kcal/h) with iron or copper pipes, w= 0.4-0.7 m/s. c) For Central Network Piping in uninhabited areas for Twin Pipes System Networks with iron or copper pipes in large installations (between 80 000 and 300 000 kcal/h), w= 0.7-1.2m/s. d) For Central Network Piping in uninhabited areas for Twin Pipes System Networks with iron or copper pipes in extremely large installations (between 80 000 and 300 000 kcal/h), w= 0.7-1.2m/s. According to the General Building Code, in order to control flow noise, the velocities of water in piping systems should not exceed the following maximum values.

Inner pipe diameters (in)

Maximum velocity

1 1 2 1.32 3 2 4 2.3

- 244 - FINE - HVAC

• Friction limit per meter length of piping (mwg/m): This consists of the maximum level of friction based on which calculations are performed in the network. The existence of two criteria for piping calculation (Maximum Velocity and Friction limit per pipe length meter) provide the designer with huge capabilities in calculating and sizing the network.

• Number of circulators: Fill out the number of circulators that will be installed in the network, should you have more than one.

• Unit System: Select a unit system (kcal or Watt) based on which calculations will be performed.

• Expansion tank type: Select the type of expansion tank that will be placed in the installation (open or closed).

• Temperature drop per meter length of piping: This pertains to a coefficient, which expresses the insulation degree of the pipe (for ideally insulated pipes this is equal to zero).

2.2.3 View This set of options includes the secondary option "Toolbars" which are described in section 1.2.3 in detail.

2.2.4 Windows The core of the calculations is the calculation sheet window which is described in the following section in detail.

2.2.4.1 Calculation Sheet

Each row of this sheet corresponds to a different network section while each column refers to data that will be filled out or will ensue automatically during the procedure of completing data. Assistance orders for the completion of this data appear in the status bar. In each row, first fill in the fields of the first column which refer to section designations. The way in which the network is standardized is based on the principles which will be explained later on. Assume that the standard Twin Pipes System Network, which is shown in the following figure, is under study. Later on the case of a reverse-return network will be examined.


In this figure, the junction points (1,2,3) and the radiators (4,5,6) have been numbered. Each junction point may be assigned a number (from 1 to 99) or a letter (lower or upper case, e.g. A) or a combination of letters and numbers (e.g. A2, AB, 3C etc.). The only restriction in numbering is that the location point of the circulator must be assigned number 1. If there are more than one circulators, they should be assigned the number 1 as well (so that the program may comprehend that these are starting points). Furthermore, it is obvious that each number may not exist twice in the same network. It should be noted that all calculation sheets refer to the same network and that they can be accessed either through the menu (using the arrows as well as the auxiliary keys <Home> and <End> when there are more than one sheets) or through sheets moving from page to page using the keys <PgUp> and <PgDn>. After you have numbered the network, enter each section in the project calculation sheet separately (the succession order is not important) by typing in the first column the two junction points of each section (putting a dot in between) so that the sequence of junction points matches the direction of water flow in the pipe. In the above example the sections 1.2, 2.3, 2.6, 3.4 and 3.5 (order is arbitrary) should be filled in. In each section between two junction points (e.g. section 1.2 or 2.3 in the above figure) the following information must be provided:

a) pipe length (in m), estimating the return branch in the case of a classic twin pipes system (that is double length) or the normal length in the case of a separate reverse-return section, as you will see in detail later, and

b) local accessory resistance (completed in detail once F12 from the specific column or the appropriate button into the field is pressed in the respective column). It should be noted that in sections leading to a radiator, you should mention, among other possible accessories, the radiator (e.g. z=2.5), which is the resistance produced by the radiator itself.

In each row between a junction point and a radiator (e.g. section 2.6 in the figure), apart from the length of the pipe and the local resistance of accessories, the supply of the radiator should also be entered. This may be inserted directly (the respective temperature difference in column 4 must be deleted immediately) or calculated automatically based on the temperature difference and the space load. In the last and most frequent case, this data may be provided in the last columns of the calculation sheet or, alternatively, in the screen that appears by pressing F12. This last capability was given especially for users who are used to this function from the previous version.

- 246 - FINE - HVAC

The space load is taken immediately (by inserting the level and space number (e.g. 1.2) provided that a link to losses has been established and the respective supply corresponds to the total required supply for the space. If there are more than one radiators in the same space, the designer should intervene by distributing the load accordingly. In the above window, the network polar coordinates must be provided (referring to the above example 0 degree angles must be assigned to sections 1.2, 2.6 and 3.5, 90 degree angles for section 2.3 and 180 degree angles for section 3.4) so that the drawing and the vertical chart are designed correctly. It is emphasized that, in this manner, any type of network can be accurately and scale designed. Finally, the respective radiator is calculated in the above window, with inlet temperature defined in the general data (which may be altered by the designer). For the radiator calculation it suffices to complete the serial number of the radiator type in the selected library or through access to the radiator Library (by pressing F11) and the selection of the type, moving by using the arrows and pressing <Enter>. If the loads have been given, then the supplies to sections which have no radiators (e.g. 2.3) are added up and presented automatically in the supply column. Based on the supply in each network section and given the maximum velocity that corresponds to this section, the cross-section of the section pipe is established. Despite all this, the designer may give another standardized diameter, by pressing F11 from the 6th column and selecting from the list of standardized diameters from the library that appears on the screen. In whatever way the section has been defined, the effective water velocity and the pressure drops (see respective columns) of the piping and accessories in the respective section of the network will be exactly calculated.

Note: The selection of a standardized section, helps, among other things, in the study of existing twin pipes heating systems, for detailed analysis of their hydraulic behavior.

The accessories are completed in each section separately, opening the respective accessory window, with F11, from the respective column.


At this point, the accessory numbers for each type of accessory must be given or their combination (up to 5 different accessory types per section). There is also the capacity to assign an increasing number system for the accessories (in the upper accessory) so as to avoid the repeated filling out of the same accessories and in order for the system to be provided directly from the calculation sheet (filling out only the system increasing numbering). It should be reminded that, with the introduction of special accessories one may restrict the network in order to balance the branches. As you will see later on, the window “Sections Friction Drop” shows how well balanced the system is and indicates, indirectly, in which branches strangling should occur. In the case of typical (similar) sections it is possible to recall them (with their name from the first column) in order to automatically transfer them. Reverse - Return (Tichelmann or Three Pipes System) Network Calculations: Apart from the classic Twin Pipes System described above, there is the possibility to define a reverse-return network, that is a network where inlet and return do not comprise entirely parallel networks, but follow a different path. It is easy to define such a network considering a second network like, the one described above, which junctions are numbered differently.

Attention! Radiators do not need numbering because they are already numbered.

After you have corresponded numbers (or letter and numbers) to the junction points and radiators, fill in the first column of the calculation sheet with the return sections intervening “-” instead of “.” and opposite to the water flow (e.g. 13-5 if in the above example the return in radiator 5 is not done according to the inlet route (1:3:5) but through other route). It should be noted that the return network has a return point at point 1 (e.g. section 1-13 could be the terminal point of return). However, this standardization is the simplest possible, as the user will find out by working out a simple example, simulating simultaneously inlet and return. For example, if a radiator load changes, then both the inlet and return supply will change which will, in turn, influence the pipe cross-sections etc. It should be noted that the program offers the capacity to directly type network supplies (once the temperature difference in the next column has been deleted).

- 248 - FINE - HVAC

Finally, it should be noted that there is the capability to insert or delete a row in the calculation sheet using the keys <Ctrl>&<Ins> or <Ctrl>&<Del> respectively. When the arrows or the mouse are used, the cursor moves, either towards the left or towards the right, while <Tab> is kept pressed or downwards while <Enter> is kept pressed. The options concerning the boiler-room equipment (Boiler, Burner, Circulator, etc) are found in the menu “Windows”, below the calculation sheet.

2.2.4.2 Boiler The "Total Thermal Load Qol" is automatically updated with the calculation sheet data. This field remains blank only if the calculations have not been completed or the junction point 1 (start) of the network does not exist.

If an increase coefficient (e.g. 0.25 for 25% increase) is inserted, the Boiler power can be calculated. If F11 or the appropriate button into the field is pressed in the row "Type of Selected Boiler", the types included in the core library appear, from which the user selects the one desired. All its data and features are automatically transferred into the boiler selection sheet. Naturally, modifications are possible but, to be permanent, they must be within the core library.

2.2.4.3 Burner – Fuel TankThe necessary data for the burner and the tank selection are typed in the drawing screen and the Burner is selected from the library by pressing F11 or the appropriate button into the field, just like the Boiler. In particular, the Boiler thermal power is automatically transferred from the previous window "Boiler Selection". If the fuel thermogenic power q and the output n (the user can modify these parameters) are known, the fuel consumption per hour results, on which the burner selection is based.


Regarding the tank, the user should type its dimensions so that the capacity requirements are oversatisfied based on the number of sufficient days and the daily operation hours which have already been defined. Furthermore, the cost of the tank should be typed so that it is included in the "Bill of Materials – Costing" window.

2.2.4.4 Circulator The program enables the designer to have more than one circulators (up to 5). The user can either simply select a circulator (if F11 is pressed or selecting ''Circulator selection'' by pressing the arrow into the field) or select a circulator for Reverse solution (if F7 is pressed or selecting ''Circulator selection by Hydraulic Solution Method '' by pressing the arrow into the field), where the program determines the intersection point of the network characteristic curve with the nearer circulator curve (operation point), on which all the other results (velocities, supplies, radiators etc.) are based. Furthermore, in the latter case, the program presents a list with the circulators that satisfy the requirements of the specific installation, excluding automatically the inappropriate ones. Note that the circulator which covers each network branch should be set in the starting section of the network (e.g. 1.2) by typing the Circulator serial number.

- 250 - FINE - HVAC

Regarding the selected Circulator serial number (1, if only one circulator exists), the following data appear:

• The calculated Water supply in m3/h, according to the calculation sheet data.

• The Most mailing network section, that is the branch presenting the higher friction values.

• The Total Network (pipes and accessories) Friction, which corresponds to the above Most Mailing Branch, in mwg, and has been calculated in calculation sheet.

• The Boiler Friction coefficient C, on which the calculation of the water pressure drop within the boiler will be based. The C coefficient is calculated according to the formula C = Dp (mwg) / Q2 (m3/h), where Dp is the water pressure drop, given by the boiler manufacturer, in a specific Q range. If the above values are unknown, for the estimation of coefficient C the following table can be used, where C is given in relation to the boiler power.


Boiler Power C

25.000 0.02

35.000 0.01

45.000 0.008

55.000 0.005

75.000 0.003

90.000 0.003

100.000 0.003

115.000 0.002

130.000 0.0015

• 3-way Valve Friction coefficient. Like the boiler, the friction coefficient C should be given. If the calculation of the coefficient C is impossible because of too many unknown values, the following characteristic table can be used, where the valve C is given in relation to its diameter.

3-way Valve Diameter

C DN 20 ¾” 0.19

DN 25 1” 0.08

DN 32 1 ¼” 0.03

DN 40 1 ½” 0.012

DN 50 2” 0.005

DN 65 2 ½” 0.0016

DN 80 3” 0.00075

DN 100 4” 0.00031

DN 125 5” 0.00014

• The Not Return Valve Friction coefficient. Like the boiler, the friction coefficient C should be given. If the calculation of the coefficient C is impossible because of too many unknown values, the following characteristic table can be used, where the valve C is given in relation to its diameter.

Valve Diameter C DN15 ½’’ 0.58

DN 20 ¾’’ 0.085

DN 25 1’’ 0.035

DN 32 1 ¼’’ 0.015

DN 40 1 ½’’ 0.008

DN 50 2’’ 0.004

DN 65 2 ½’’ 0.0008

DN 80 3’’ 0.0003

DN 100 4’’ 0.00015

- 252 - FINE - HVAC

• The Friction coefficient for the Remaining Frictions (Friction Coefficient of other parts). For safety reasons, the theoretically calculated friction values should be increased by approximately 20-30%.

If the above friction values are added together, the result will be the installation total head (in mwg). In order to select a circulator type from the program libraries, press F11 or F7 (if hydraulic solution is desired) in the field "Type of Selected Circulator". Then the features (Supply, Head etc features and operation curves) of the selected circulator are presented. Apparently, the selected circulator(s) should satisfy the supply and head requirements of the installation. Example: Consider the following simple network is being studied: If the classic method is used to solve the network, considering that the temperature drop on radiators equals to Dt=10°C, the results will be the following:

In order to solve the network using the "Hydraulic Simulation" method and the total supply value which was previously calculated with the classic method, the user should just select a circulator by pressing F7. Then the results (regarding a specific circulator) will be modified as it is shown in the following screen:


It is evident that the temperature drops on radiators have changed and have different values (above and below the value 10 which was assumed in the first methodology). It can be concluded that the classic method generally leads to over-sizing the nearer radiators and under-sizing the remote ones.

2.2.4.5 Expansion Tank and Chimney In order to select an Expansion Tank and a Chimney, you should fill in the following fields: Regarding the Expansion Tank, as long as it is closed (as usual), the user should state the installation static and final pressure (in bar) as well as the radiator type, so that the system water content can be calculated. It should be noted that the installation Static Pressure (in bar) corresponds to the distance between the installation expansion tank and the above radiator. Knowing that 10 mwg correspond to 1 bar (to be accurate, 9.81 mwg = 1 bar), the Static Pressure can be calculated in bar. Regarding the installation Final Pressure, the Static Pressure should be increased by a safety factor (of 0.7 bar), in the case the above radiators contain air. Water expansion and the minimum volume of the expansion tank are calculated and the only thing left is to select an expansion tank from the libraries (pressing F11 or the appropriate button into the field) so that the required minimum volume is exceeded.

- 254 - FINE - HVAC

If there is an open expansion tank, the safety and priming pipe diameter should be inserted. The required volume comes up automatically and the effective volume finally appears, if the dimensions (length, width, height) are typed in the following fields. Furthermore, the respective cost should be stated for cost estimation. Regarding the Chimney, the user should insert the total height in order to estimate the required chimney cross-section. Then the dimensions given should create an area equal to or larger than this cross-section. Furthermore, the chimney cost should be stated, so that cost estimation is possible in the "Bill of Materials-Costing" window.

2.2.4.6 Network Drawing The (numbered) network drawing is shown on the screen, provided that polar coordinates have been inserted in every network branch (see calculation sheet). H διαχείριση του σκαριφήµατος περιγράφεται αναλυτικότερα στην ενότητα 1.3.4.9.

2.2.4.7 Vertical Diagram If the user wants to create a vertical chart using the calculation sheet (and not automatically, using Fine package), the above option creates the vertical chart provided that polar coordinates have been inserted in every network branch. The Boiler-room, with its specific features having been transferred from the calculation sheet, is on the bottom side. The vertical diagram management is described in detail in section 1.2.


2.2.4.8 Sections Friction Drop This option shows the total friction in every terminal route so that the designer can see if the network is balanced. If the user thinks that there are great friction differences among specific branches (on the above screen-example the network is almost balanced), he can modify the calculation sheets (by changing the pipe diameter or putting a restrictive accessory) and return to "Sections Friction Drop" to see the result of his modifications. The most mailing network branch, which is one of the criteria for the circulator selection, is shown on the screen bottom side. Finally, it should be noted that, in the case of a reverse-return twin pipe system, all sections (branches) (both inlet and return branches) as well as their most mailing combination are estimated.

2.2.4.9 Bill of Materials - Costing The bill of materials-costing results regarding the specific project are presented.

- 256 - FINE - HVAC

The user can edit the bill of materials-costing sheet, modifying costs or quantities, inserting discounts, adding jobs or materials followed by their costs and quantities. In general, everything stated in section 1.2 is applicable here.

2.2.4.10 Network Check If this option is selected, a window appears containing various network checks and possible errors which the designer should keep in mind during the final solution. More specifically, each circuit is checked for temperature drop (the program locates and marks the circuits where temperature drop exceeds 20 degrees). Furthermore, water velocity within pipes is checked in relation to the maximum limit set by the designer.

2.2.4.11 Hot Water Storage Tank Calculations

If you select this option, the next window appears where the Hot Water Storage Tank of the installation is selected.

2.2.4.12 Technical Description The window “Technical Description” supports the creation of the project technical description, enabling the user to select among various technical description prototypes and text editing styles. As stated in Chapter 1, when the "Technical Description" window is activated, an additional option, with the name “Technical Description”, appears in the main menu (just before the “Windows” option) of the Twin Pipes System application. If you choose “Prototypes...” within this menu, a window appears on the screen containing a list of different prototypes regarding the technical description of a Twin Pipes System. If you select a specific prototype, the respective technical description appears in a window on the screen, updated with the project results.


As stated in section 1.3, the editing icons enable the user to modify either the prototype or even the updated results.

Note: The technical description prototype files are in the directory 4M\CALC\DSOL\ with the names DSOLTP01.RTF, DSOLTP02.RTF and so on. The prototype descriptions are in the file DSOLTP.LST.

2.2.4.13 Assumptions The text of the project general Assumptions, which may be included in the printed project as long as it is selected in "Printing Contents", is stated. If “Assumptions” is selected, the option "Assumptions" with the secondary option "Select Prototype" appear in the menu. If you select a specific Assumption prototype, the respective text appears in a window (see Chapter 1).

Note: The Assumption prototype files are in the directory 4M\CALC\DSOL\ with the names DSOLPR01.RTF, DSOLPR02.RTF and so on. The prototype descriptions are in the file DSOLPR.LST.


Note: The cover page prototype files are in the directory 4M\CALC\DSOL\ with the names DSOLCP01.RTF, DSOLCP02.RTF and so on. The prototype descriptions are in the file DSOLCP.LST.

- 258 - FINE - HVAC

2.2.5 Libraries The "Twin Pipes System" application libraries contain pipes, radiators and accessories as well as equipment for the boiler-room (Boilers, Burners, Circulators, Expansion Tanks etc). Each library category contains various material types which exist in the market, but naturally it can be updated with the material types the user desires. In the following sections each library category is described mentioning the characteristic features for every material type.

2.2.5.1 Pipes “Pipes” library contains various types of heating pipes with their description and roughness (e.g. Copper pipe, Plastic pipe etc).

If you have selected a specific pipe type and press the key "Size", a small table appears listing the available pipe cross-sections followed by all necessary data (nominal diameter, inner diameter, cost and code).


2.2.5.2 Radiators "Radiators" library contains various radiator types with all the features needed for the calculations.

If you select a radiator from the list, some general data concerning the specific radiator type (Height, Area/Slice, code) appear on the window right side. If you have selected a radiator type and press the key "Sizes", a window appears containing the outputs of the whole range of the selected radiator type. The column "Size" refers to either slice number, if the radiator is grouped by slice, or various lengths in an increasing order for radiators with standard dimensions.

2.2.5.3 Fittings Fittings libraries contain the various tubing accessories in list form, while the main features of each accessory (z resistance and cost) are also mentioned.

- 260 - FINE - HVAC

2.2.5.4 Boilers This library contains various boiler types with their main features (Heating Capacity, Water Content, Dimensions, Cost, Code).

2.2.5.5 Burners This library contains various burner types with their costs and Codes.

2.2.5.6 Circulators This library contains various circulator types with their main features (Size, Supply, Head, Duty Curve, Motor Power, Electrical Data, Cost, Code).


If the key "Duty Curve" is pressed, the chart showing the selected circulator curves and the respective values for Q (supply) and H (head) for every circulator scale (speed) appear. This simulation is based on 4 pairs of values for Q and Η, as shown in the adjacent window. The circulator library can be updated, that is the user can freely define the characteristic curves for the circulator he inserts in the library by giving the respective coordinates for these curves.

2.2.5.7 Expansion Tanks This library contains various Expansion Tank types with their Capacity, Valve Size, Cost and Code.

- 262 - FINE - HVAC

Note: All libraries can be updated simply either by accessing the card of the material you want to modify or by adding the new material and typing the relevant required data. If you click on "OK", the modifications are saved while if you click on "Cancel" any modifications are cancelled.

2.2.6 Help This option leads to the other user support options, according to section 1.2.6.


2.3 Single Pipe System In order to execute the Single Pipe program, double-click the corresponding icon. After a while, the main menu window will appear:

As you can see, the main menu options are divided in groups under "Files", "Options", "View", “Windows”, "Libraries" and "Help", which are described below with their secondary options.

2.3.1 Files The "Files" menu includes secondary options which can be used in every application and were described in detail in section 1.2.1. Here is a brief summary: New project: Type a name for the new project to save it in a file. Project Selection: A window appears where you can select the desired (existing) project file and load it.


- 264 - FINE - HVAC

Update from Drawing: In the case of cooperation with the FINE package, the project calculation sheets are updated with the drawing data. Update from Thermal Losses: The Calculation Sheets of the program are updated with the Thermal losses data. This function is available only if the circuit topology has been specified in the space sheets and the Single Pipe System files have been created in the "Export" option of the first option group in the "Thermal Losses" application (see Thermal Losses manual) Save: The project you work on is saved on the hard disc (with the previously given name). Save as...: The project you work on is saved in a different file with a new name. Load Prototype: The saved prototype appears on screen. Save as Prototype: The form, which has been created by the user and is displayed on the screen when this option is selected, is saved as a Prototype. Printing Prototypes: The printing prototype management window is activated. Printing: The project issue is printed according to the previously selected options in "Printing Contents" and "Printing Parameters", following the print preview output. Printing Contents: You can select the project items you want printed, as shown in the respective window: Printing Parameters: The desired printing parameters can be selected in this window according to what has already been stated in Chapter 1. Print Preview: The complete project issue appears on screen, exactly as it will be printed, page to page. Link to MS-Word: A RTF file containing the project items is created (within the project directory, with the name MSOL.RTF). Παράλληλα, ενεργοποιείται το MS-Word (εφόσον είναι εγκατεστηµένο στον υπολογιστή σας). Link to 4M Editor: A RTF file containing the project items is created (within the project directory, with the name MSOL.RTF). Παράλληλα, ενεργοποιείται o 4M Editor. Export to RTF: A Rtf file, containing the project items, is created (in the project directory with the name MSOL.RTF). Exit: Exit from the application.

2.3.2 Options 2.3.2.1 Project Options Enter the project headings, as in every application.

2.3.2.2 Network Options This is about a series of data related to the single-pipe heating system network (they are explained below).

• Space Temperature: Enter the desired space temperature in °C (usually 20° C).


• Entering water temperature: Enter the inlet water temperature in °C (the return temperature is calculated automatically)

• Water Temperature drop per level (%): Enter (if desired) a percentage of temperature drop per level, due to minor losses in the vertical column of the installation.

• Water Temperature drop at the circuits: Enter the temperature drop at the circuits (usually 15° C). This need to be entered only if the equal temperature drops method is used.

• Maximum velocity limit for the main pipes: Enter the maximum water velocity limit in the main pipes.

Note: For the floor supply vertical columns w=0.6-1.0 m/s, while for the "Boiler-room to first-floor Branch" part of the network you can enter a marginal w=1.4 m/s. According to General Building Code, concerning the flow noise, the water velocity inside the pipes should not exceed the following maximum values.

Inner pipe diameters ( in )

Maximum Velocity

1 1

2 1,32

3 2

4 2,3

• Maximum water velocity limit for the circuits: The maximum desired water velocity limit at the circuits. In general, for Single Pipe System circuits with copper or plastic pipes on the floor, water velocity should be between w=1.0-1.2 m/s.

• Main pipes type: Selects the pipe types of the main pipes (e.g. copper pipe)

• Main pipes roughness k: Roughness is entered automatically, depending on the pipe type you have selected, and can be modified by the user. The measurement unit used by the program is µm.

Note: The following table contains indicative pipe roughness values.

Pipe Type Roughness k (µm) Indicative Standard

Copper pipe 1,5 DIN 1754 and DIN 1786

Iron pipe 150 DIN 2440 Plastic pipe 7 DIN 8077/78

• Circuit pipes type: Select, to enter the pipes type for the circuit pipes (e.g. copper pipe)

- 266 - FINE - HVAC

• Circuit pipes roughness: Roughness is entered automatically, depending on the pipe type you have selected, and can be modified by the user

• Desired circuit pipes size: Enter the circuit pipes size (diameter). Initially, this will be the same for all circuits. Diameter may be selectively modified for specific circuits, in the calculation sheets (although in practice, most of the times loops with the same diameter are used).

• Desired switch Regulation (%): Enter the initial setting of the radiators switches (usually 50%). For the last radiator of a circuit, most engineers set the switch to 100%. If the program works with Fine, this setting is entered automatically.

• Switch Equivalent Length: Enter the equivalent length of the switch (in m). By default, the program considers that there is one switch for every radiator.

• Branch Equivalent Length: Enter the equivalent length of the branch (in m). By default, the program considers that there are two branches for every circuit (inlet & return).

• Equivalent length of the curve: Enter the equivalent length of a circuit pipe curve. By default, the program considers that there are two curves for every radiator.

• Increment of main pipes length (%): Enter the average estimated increase of the main pipes length (25-30%).

• Number of levels: Enter the number of levels (floors) to be heated with the single pipe system.

• Unit system: Select the unit system (Kcal/h ή watt).

• Expansion tank type: Select between open and – more often used – closed expansion tank.

• Calculation Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate the installation. The program gives three options: 1) self- balancing (of equal pressure drops or frictions), 2) of equal temperature drops and 3) hydraulic simulation with reverse solution. With the method of equal temperature drops, the program considers that there will be the same temperature drop at every circuit, and it calculates the required restrictions to make sure that this will actually happen. With the equal frictions method, the program balances the circuits automatically (something that also happens in practice if we do not make any interventions). Therefore we have different temperatures at every circuit (with greater variations depending on how asymmetrical the network is. The self-balancing method is the one usually preferred by the engineers, because, among others, it does not require settings that are difficult to apply and maintain. In both these methods we get the characteristics of the selected circulator (head / supply). The third method is the most precise of the three because it solves the network reversely, with the circulator selected by the user, based on the characteristic curves of the circulator and of the installation. In other words, this is an absolute Hydraulic Simulation of the installation.


2.3.3 View This selection includes the secondary option "Toolbars", which is common to most applications (see section 1.2.3).

2.3.4 Windows The main calculations window is the Calculation Sheet, where the required data are entered, the corresponding calculations are carried out and the results appear. The Calculation Sheet, which comprises the core of the Single Pipe System program, is described in the next section.

2.3.4.1 Calculation Sheet The Single Pipe Heating System calculation sheet has the following form:

Each calculation sheet corresponds to a building level (floor) which is heated with the single pipe system. Each row of the sheet corresponds to a different circuit of the level or to the section of the vertical column that heats this particular level (or simply passes through it to feed the circuits of higher levels) or to a horizontal section that connects two vertical columns. Each column of the sheet contains the data entered by the user or calculated by the program. In the network Calculation Sheet, the user should enter the circuits existing on each level and the columns which provide the heating medium to the particular level. Each column-circuit row is numbered with the column and circuit serial numbers, inserting a full stop ".", e.g. "2.3", which stands for "column 2, circuit 3".

- 268 - FINE - HVAC

At each level the circuits are numbered, starting from 1. If there are more than one columns, the numbering of the circuits of each column begins from 1 (for example, the circuits of column 1 will be 1.1, 1.2 etc, the circuits of column 2 will be 2.1, 2.1 etc.). Please note that to each column-circuit row corresponds a sub-table that contains the detailed characteristics of the particular circuit. To activate this table, go to the desired line and press F11 or select ''One Pipe System Circuits Calculations'' from the list that appears when we press the right button of the mouse. Instructions about data entering appear at the bottom of the screen. Finally, note that the network vertical columns are entered, for each level, right below the last circuit, by entering the central column number for each column. For example, the section of the central column 1 that feeds the 5th level and comes from the 4th level, will be given to the 5th level by entering "1" below the last circuit. At level 1, the section of the central column 1, which will also be given number "1", is the section that leads to the boiler-room collector. In case another column begins from the collector of a certain level, it is specified by entering the numbers of both columns, with a dash ("-"). For example, section "1-2" is the horizontal section that connects two vertical columns at the collector of the level below the one you are working on. This way any possible case of single pipe heating network installation is standardized. The following examples (a simple and an advanced one) will make the above instructions easier to understand. A. Simple example In this example we shall enter the data for the heating of a two-storeyed building with a central column. The vertical chart drawing is shown in the figure below.

• Start by selecting "2" in the field "Number of levels" under "Building data"

menu, in order to specify that there are two floors (Level 1 is the Ground floor and 2 is the 1st floor) to be heated.

• Number the column. In this case there is only one column, so it will have number 1.


• Number network circuits on each level. Define circuits 1.1 and 1.2 both on level 2 (1st floor) and on level 1 (ground floor) as well. The corresponding entries are shown in the figure.

• Assign the radiators of each circuit the serial numbers they have in the circuit, according to the order they are supplied by the inlet collector. For example, in circuit 1.1, Radiators 1 and 2 are entered as shown in the drawing.

After the installation data have been standardized, they can be inserted in the calculation sheet. The data which should be entered are the following:

After the above data are typed in the field "Circuit Number", you should also enter the total length of each circuit, which is the circuit pipe length from the inlet collector and back to the return collector. After that, the loads of each circuit are inserted in the "Circuit Options" table", which appears if F11 is pressed or by selecting ''One Pipe System Circuits Calculations'' from the list that appears when we press the right button of the mouse.

Enter the heated space where the circuit radiators are placed. For level 2 circuit 1.1, enter "Radiator 1" first, which is in space 2.1 (Level 2, space 1), and then its load in Mcal/h (1Mcal/h=100Kcal/h). Move to the "Radiator type" column and select the radiator type which will be used by pressing F11. In the "Radiator" column, the program will show the size of the radiator. Follow the same procedure for the remaining circuits.

- 270 - FINE - HVAC

B. Advanced example In this example, a more complex installation with many columns and column interconnections will be studied. The standardization and data entry procedure is the following: α) Select a column route which leads to the above level (the one marked with a black line in the example) and name it "Column 1". Name the other columns "2", "3" and "4". β) Number the circuits on each level, as shown in the following figure:

According to the above standardization, the following data must be entered in the level sheets: LEVEL 3 1.1 (1st circuit of column 1 on level 3) 1.2 (2nd circuit of column 1 on level 3) 1.3 (3rd circuit of column 1 on level 3) 1 (the column section from level 3 collector to level 2) LEVEL 2 1.1 (1st circuit of column 1 on level 2) 1.2 (2nd circuit of column 1 on level 2) 2.1 (1st circuit of column 2 on level 2) 2.2 (2nd circuit of column 2 on level 2) 2.3 (3rd circuit of column 2 on level 2) 5.1 (1st circuit of column 5 on level 2) 5.2 (2nd circuit of column 5 on level 2)


5.3 (3rd circuit of column 5 on level 2) 5 (the column 5 section from level 2 collector to level 1) 2 (the column 2 section from level 2 collector to the connection with column 1) 1 (the column 1 section from level 2 collector to the connection with column 2) 1-2 (the connection of columns 1 and 2) 1 (the column 1 section from the connection of columns 1 and 2 on level 2 to the connection 3 and 4 on level 1) LEVEL 1 1.1 (with zero length because there should be 1.1 on all levels) 4.1 (1st circuit of column 4 on level 1) 4.2 (2nd circuit of column 4 on level 1) 4.3 (3rd circuit of column 4 on level 1) 3.1 (1st circuit of column 3 on level 1) 3.2 (2nd circuit of column 3 on level 1) 3.3 (3rd circuit of column 3 on level 1) 4 (the column 4 section from level 1 collector to the connection with column 3) 3 (the column 3 section from level 1 collector to the connection with column 4) 1-3 (the connection of columns 3 and 1) 1-4 (the connection of columns 4 and 1) 1 (the column 1 section from the connection of columns 3 and 4 on level 1 to the boiler-room collector) 1-5 (the connection of columns 5 and 1 at the boiler-room collector) 1 (the column 1 section from the boiler room collector to the boiler) It is important to notice that column 1, where the first circuit (1.1) of the above level (on which the temperature drop is defined. According to this temperature drop, the whole network is balanced when using the Self-balancing method) belongs, should always end at the boiler room. Furthermore, even if there is no circuit for column 1 on a certain level, you should (for standardization reasons) assume a virtual 1.1 circuit, by entering mark "1.1" in the first column (with zero length and load), as shown for level 1 of the example.

Note: As shown in the example, the selection of column 1 is based on the following criteria:

• Have a circuit on the above level

• Have the most mailing circuit of the above level (load and length).

• End in the Boiler room You can number the remaining columns as desired.

The entry procedure of the data concerning each circuit and radiator is explained below, in "Circuit Table" and "Radiator Sub-table" sections, in detail.

- 272 - FINE - HVAC

Ι. Circuit Table The calculations are carried out according to the equal frictions (self-balancing) or the equal temperature drops (balancing using regulatory accessories-regulators) principle, depending on the selection made in the "Network data" option. In each row, you should fill the first column, which corresponds to a branch designation, at the beginning.

If the first method (self-balancing) is selected, enter the temperature difference for the first circuit of the last level. The inlet supply, the resistance and the total pressure drop (since the pipe diameter is assumed known) result from the (circuit load)/(temperature difference) ratio. At all other circuits, inlet supply and temperature drop result automatically (the circuit loads are known), so that all network junction points have equal total pressure drop values. The data regarding the loads of each column circuit and the respective pipe length increase are taken from the corresponding circuit radiator sub-table.

ΙΙ. Circuit Options Sub-table The sub-table appears if F11 is pressed or by selecting ''One Pipe System Circuits Calculations'' from the list that appears when we press the right button of the mouse from the corresponding row of the circuits table. This table contains the space loads provided that the thermal losses have already been calculated.

The data contained in this sub-table are described and explained below.


• Space Number: Spaces are specified so that the respective thermal losses value is automatically transferred. In particular, the level and space (on this level) serial numbers are entered, by inserting a full stop in the middle ("level.space") e.g. 1.1, 2.4 etc).

• Inlet Water Temperature: It concerns the inlet water temperature (in °C) which is calculated by the program. For the first radiator, the temperature is equal to the inlet water temperature specified in network data (decreased by the temperature drop per level, for level 2 and above)

• Space Thermal Load: It concerns the losses of the space where the radiator is located (or part of the losses, in case there are more than one radiators in the space). The space thermal load is automatically calculated, using the circuit topology and the number of radiators. The user may modify this value, if he wants. However, if the user enters a space number in the first column, the appearing load corresponds to the total space load, so the user has to modify it, if he/she wants to distribute it on more than one radiators.

• Water Flow: The water flow to the radiator is calculated, based on the radiator load and inlet temperature.

• Temperature Difference: It concerns the temperature difference (in °C) on radiators (temperature drop), which is calculated automatically.

• Room Temperature: It is given in °C and initially has the value entered in network data. Of course, if the user may change this value for a certain space.

• Effective Radiator Temperature: The effective radiator temperature is calculated using the formula tεν = tµ-tχ = (tπ+tε)/2 - tχ, where tχ is the temperature of the heated space, and tµ the average water temperature of the radiator, usually equal to (tπ+tε)/2 (where tπ is the inlet water temperature, and tε the return temperature).

• Q60 Load: It is automatically calculated and is equivalent to the load produced by the radiator, if the inlet water temperature was 90 °C, the return water temperature was 70 °C and the space temperature was 20 °C. So, for tεν=(90+70)/2-20 = 60. The majority of manufacturers estimate output based on Q60. Therefore, the radiator selection should be based on this load. In the program libraries the radiator outputs correspond to Q60 as well.

• Radiator Type: The radiator type can be selected either from a list which appears by pressing the appropriate button into the field or by entering directly the serial number corresponding to the desired type from the list (e.g. "5" corresponds to type III 905).

• Estimated Radiator Load: The actual load of the selected radiator is displayed.

• Switch Regulating: The setting entered in the network data is initially applied (e.g. 50%), except for the last radiator of the circuit, where many engineers set the switch to 100%. The user may change the setting, provided that he/she also changes the equivalent length of the last column (according to the friction diagram of the switch).

- 274 - FINE - HVAC

• Switch Equivalent length: The value entered in the network data is initially applied. If the setting has changed, the new actual value of equivalent length should be entered (according to the friction diagram of the switch). If the friction diagram is not available, the user may refer to the following table (values in pipe equivalent length):

Circuit Pipe

Diameter Radiator Switch Preset (%)

20 35 50 60 75 90 100 15 1.8 2.3 3.2 3.7 5.1 6.9 7.9 16 2.0 2.5 3.6 4.0 5.5 7.8 8.3 18 3.7 4.7 6.7 7.9 10.8 14.0 15.8

"Independent" values must be entered while the rest are automatically calculated. In case a relevant losses study has been carried out, the space serial numbers ("level.space") and the respective loads have already been transferred to the corresponding columns. The only thing left is to select a radiator type from the library, by pressing F11 while in the respective column. In case the specific losses study provided for 2 or 3 radiators in the same space, the total load is equally distributed among them. Of course, the user can make afterwards any change he/she wishes. Furthermore, many of the above mentioned values are automatically entered (default), but the user can still make changes. Any change in the above mentioned data affects the corresponding values of the calculation sheet, which appears on the screen momentarily. This way, the user can fully monitor and control the project.

Note: At this point, we should refer to some special cases which vary from the general standards described above. Such cases are:

• Boiler-room on the roof: The standardization procedure described above applies to this case only if the order of the levels is reversed. So, if there are 3 levels, the highest level is considered as level 1, the middle level as level 2 and the lower level as level 3 (level 1 is always the one closer to the boiler room).

• Mixed system (combination of Single and Twin Pipes Systems): In case there is a combination of single and twin pipe installations, first solve the single pipe system in the way described above and then solve the twin pipe system by specifying the entire single pipe block as part of the network where the temperature difference is deleted and supply is directly set equal to the one resulted from the single pipe study. Furthermore, make sure that the single pipe system frictions are similar to the frictions of the other twin pipe installation branches (so that the network is as balanced as possible).

• Boiler: If there is a Boiler, incorporate it in the system as if it was a one-radiator circuit. The load entered depends on the boiler size (in any case it will be in the 5000-10000 Kcal/h range).

• Other special cases are solved thanks to the versatility of the program and the experience the user progressively acquires.


2.3.4.2 Boiler Whatever applies to the Twin Pipes System bears an equal validity in this case: If an increase coefficient is applied (e.g. 0.25 for a 25% increase), the power of the Boiler can be calculated. If F11 or the appropriate button into the field is pressed in the row "Type of Selected Boiler", the types included in the core library appear, from which the user selects the one desired. All data and features of the selected type are automatically transferred into the boiler selection sheet. Understandably, changes are possible but their permanency is ensured only if they occur inside the core libraries.

Note: If the data in the "Calculation Sheet" have been filled but the field "Total thermal load Qολ" has not been updated yet, it is attributed to the fact that you may not have indicated the vertical column section which ends in the Boiler Room. Note that columns are indicated after circuits that carry the respective column number, e.g. 1.

2.3.4.3 Burner – Fuel Tank Data concerning the boiler and tank selection should be filled in the respective window, while the burner selection from the libraries entails pressing F11 or the appropriate button into the field, like the Boiler (see also Twin Pipes System). The tank dimensions entered should overbalance the capacity requirements, based on the given number of sufficient days and daily operation hours. The cost of the tank should be also filled so that cost estimation is carried out in the "Bill of Materials-Costing" window.

2.3.4.4 Circulator The values of the total network supply and total frictions of the most mailing network branch are automatically shown. The program provides two possibilities:

• Simple circulator selection to cover installation needs: Type the friction values regarding the boiler, the entry and the check valve. Proceed by entering a value for the remaining frictions, for safety reasons (they should be calculated at approximately 20-30% of the total network frictions). The sum of the above frictions results in the installation head (in m.W.G.). Press F11 or the arrow into the field and select ''Circulator Selection'' in the "Type of Selected Circulator" field in order to select the circulator type from the program libraries and go through the relevant features (Supply, Head and other features). Apparently, the selected circulator should comply with the supply and head installation requirements (see also Twin Pipes System).

• Selecting a Circulator for Reverse solution: In this case, selecting a circulator (if F7 is pressed or by selecting ''Circulator selection by Hydraulic Solution Method '' when we press the arrow into the field) triggers the program to determine the point where the characteristic network curve and the nearest circulator curve (operation point) intersect, something which defines the remaining results (velocities, supplies, radiators e.t.c.).

- 276 - FINE - HVAC

Furthermore, in the last case, the program shows a list with the circulators covering the needs of the particular installation, excluding automatically the inappropriate ones (see also Twin Pipes System).

2.3.4.5 Expansion Tank-Chimney In order to select an expansion tank and a Chimney, you should fill in the following fields: Regarding the expansion tank, insert the installation static and final pressure (in bar) as well as the radiator types, to calculate the water contained in the system. Water expansion and the minimum volume of the expansion tank are then calculated and the only thing left is to select an expansion tank from the libraries (by pressing F11 or the appropriate button into the field) so that the minimum required volume is exceeded. Regarding an open expansion tank, the safety and priming pipe diameter should be entered. The required volume comes up automatically and the effective volume finally appears, if the dimensions (length, width, height) are typed in the following fields. The relevant cost should be also filled to facilitate cost estimation. The total height of the Chimney should be entered, which enables the calculation of the required section. Then the dimensions given should create an area equal to or larger than this cross-section. Furthermore, the chimney cost should be stated, so that cost estimation is possible in the "Bill of Materials-Costing" window.

2.3.4.6 Vertical Diagram This option creates the vertical diagram of the network. The Boiler Room is located on the bottom side with its specific features automatically transferred from the calculation sheets.


2.3.4.7 Bill of Materials – Costing The results of the bill of materials-costing process of the particular project are presented in a familiar form (see also section 1.3).

The user can edit the bill of materials-costing sheet by modifying costs or quantities, inserting discounts, adding jobs or materials followed by their costs and quantities.

2.3.4.8 Network Checks If this option is selected, a window appears containing various network checks and possible errors which the designer should keep in mind during the final solution. More specifically, each circuit is inspected for temperature drop (the program locates and marks the circuits where temperature drop exceeds 20 degrees). Furthermore, water velocity in the piping is checked with respect to the maximum limit set by the designer.

2.2.4.9 Hot Water Storage Tank Calculations

- 278 - FINE - HVAC

This option leads to the adjacent window, where the boiler of the installation is selected.

2.3.4.10 Technical Description The "Technical Description" window supports the creation of the project technical description, enabling the selection among various technical description prototypes and multiple text editing styles, according to section 1.2.

Note: The technical description prototype files can be found in the directory 4M\CALC\ΜSOL\ under the names ΜSOLTP01.RTF, ΜSOLTP02.RTF e.t.c. The prototype descriptions can be found in the file ΜSOLTP.LST.

2.3.4.11 Assumptions The text of the project general Assumptions, which may be included in the printed project as long as it is selected in "Printing Contents", is stated. If “Consessions” is selected, the option "Assumptions" with the secondary option "Select Prototype" appear in the menu. If you select a specific admission prototype, the respective text appears in a window (see Chapter 1).

Note: The admission files can be found in the directory 4M\CALC\ΜSOL\ under the names ΜSOLPR01.RTF, ΜSOLPR02.RTF e.t.c. The prototype descriptions are in the file ΜSOLPR.LST.

2.3.4.12 Cover The “Cover” window is the first printed page of the project and the program enables the user to select among a set of different types of cover pages, or even create his own cover page, exactly as he wants it.

Note: The prototype files can be found in the directory 4M\CALC\ΜSOL\ under the names ΜSOLCP01.RTF, ΜSOLCP02.RTF e.t.c. The prototype descriptions can be found in the file ΜSOLCP.LST.

2.3.5 Libraries Libraries of the Single Pipe System include pipes and radiators as well as the equipment of the Boiler Room (Boilers, Burners, Circulators, Expansion Tanks e.t.c.) as in the case of the Twin Pipes System. These libraries can be updated by the user.

2.3.5.1 Pipes The "Pipes" library contains different types of pipes characterised by their description and roughness (e.g. Copper pipe, Plastic pipe e.t.c.). If you have selected a specific pipe type and press the key "Size", a small table appears listing the available pipe crosssections followed by all necessary data (nominal diameter, inner diameter, cost and code).

2.3.5.2 Radiators The radiator library contains different types of radiators followed by all the features required for the calculations.


If you select a radiator from the list, some general data concerning the specific radiator type (Height, Area/Slice, code) appear on the window right side. If a radiator type has been selected and the "Sizes" key is pressed, a window appears containing the outputs of the whole range of the selected radiator type. The column "Size" refers to either slice number, if the radiator is grouped by slice, or various lengths in an increasing order for radiators with standard dimensions.

2.3.5.3 Boilers This library contains various Boiler types with their main features (Heating Capacity, Water Content, Dimensions, Cost, Code).

- 280 - FINE - HVAC

2.3.5.4 Burners This library contains various Burner types followed by their costs and Codes.

2.3.5.5 Circulators This library contains various types of Circulators too, as in the Twin Pipes System application, with their main features (Size, Supply, Head, Duty Curve, Motor Power, Electric Data, Cost, Code). If the key "Chart" is pressed, the chart showing the selected circulator curves and the respective values for Q (supply) and H (head) for every circulator scale (speed) appear. This simulation is based on 4 pairs of values for Q and Η.

The circulator library can be updated, which means that the user can unrestrictedly define the characteristic curves of the circulator he inserts in the libraries by providing the respective coordinates of these curves.

2.3.5.6 Expansion Tanks This library contains various Expansion Tanks with their Capacity, Valve Size, Cost and Code.

2.3.6 Help This option leads to the other user support options, according to section 1.2.6.


2.4 Infloor Heating System The Infloor Heating System program is executed by double - clicking on the relevant icon and the main menu window appears after a while:

As you can see, the basic menu options are divided into the groups "Files", "Options", "View", “Windows”, "Libraries" and "Help", which are described below with their secondary options.

2.4.1 Files The "Files" option includes secondary options valid in every application and already described in detail in section 1.2.1. To sum them up briefly, they are: New project: Type a name for the new project to save it in a file. Project Selection: A window appears where you can select the desired (existing) project file and load it.


Update from Thermal losses: The Calculation Sheets of the program are updated with the Thermal losses data, provided the circuits topology has been determined in the space sheets and the Single Pipe System files have been created under the option “Export” in the first set of options of the "Thermal losses" application (see Thermal losses manual).

- 282 - FINE - HVAC

Save: The project you work on is saved on the hard disc (with the previously given name). Save as...: The project you work on is saved in a different file with a new name. Load Prototype: The saved prototype appears on screen. Save as Prototype: The form, which has been created by the user and is displayed on the screen when this option is selected, is saved as a Prototype. Printing: The project issue is printed according to the previously selected options in "Printing Contents" and "Printing Parameters", following the print preview output. Printing Contents: Select the project items you want printed, as shown in the relevant window: Printing Parameters: The desired printing parameters can be selected in this window. Print Preview: The complete project issue appears on screen, exactly as it will be printed, page to page. Link to MS-Word: A RTF file containing the project items is created (within the project directory, with the name DAPE.RTF). Παράλληλα, ενεργοποιείται το MS-Word (εφόσον είναι εγκατεστηµένο στον υπολογιστή σας). Link to 4M Editor: A RTF file containing the project items is created (within the project directory, with the name DAPE.RTF). Παράλληλα, ενεργοποιείται o 4M Editor. Export to RTF: A Rtf file, containing the project items, is created (within the project directory, named after DAPE.RTF). Exit: Exit from the application.

2.4.2 Options These are the basic project data, which are divided into three categories.

2.4.2.1 Project Options These are the headings of the study, as specified for each application.

2.4.2.2. Network Options • Space temperature: This is the desired temperature (°C) of the spaces to be

heated.

• Entering water temperature: The inlet water temperature which is heated by the boiler (in °C).

• Water Temperature drop per level (%): If it is desired, the program can take into account a slight temperature drop from level to level (%) due to thermal losses in the central columns

• Maximum velocity limit for the main pipes: This is the upper water velocity limit in the main pipes (in m/s), which should not be exceeded.

• Maximum velocity limit for the circuits: This is the upper water velocity limit in the circuits (in m/s), which should not be exceeded.


• Main pipe type: A pipe type for the main piping is selected (e.g. copper pipe).

• Main pipe roughness: Roughness is automatically filled, depending on the selected pipe type and can be modified by the user.

• Circuit pipe type: A pipe type for the circuit piping is selected (e.g. copper pipe).

• Circuit pipe roughness: Roughness is automatically filled, depending on the selected pipe type and can be modified by the user.

• Desired circuit pipe size: The circuit pipe size (diameter) is selected, which will initially apply to all circuits. This diameter can be modified selectively in the desired circuits included in the calculation sheets, although loops of uniform diameter are usually preferred in practice.

• Coefficient of floor Thermal Resistance (Upward): The respective coefficient is entered in m2K/w (if F11 or the appropriate button into the field is pressed, an explanatory table appears).

• Coefficient of floor Thermal Resistance (Downward): The respective coefficient is entered in m2K/w (if F11 or the appropriate button into the field is pressed, an explanatory table appears).

• Pipe distance in circuits: RA spacing is given in m.

• Main Pipe accessory resistance ztot: The value of the total accessory resistance is entered (if F11 or the appropriate button into the field is pressed, an explanatory table appears).

• Coefficient z of Entering and Leaving switches: The value of the inlet and return switch resistance is entered (if F11 or the appropriate button into the field is pressed, an explanatory table appears).

• Unit system: The Unit System is selected (Kcal/h or watt)

• Expansion tank type: An opened or (usually) a closed expansion tank is selected.

2.4.3 View This option includes the secondary option "Toolbars", which are described more analytically in section 1.2.

2.4.4 Windows 2.4.4.1 Calculation Sheet The columns and the circuits (loops) of the infloor heating network are included in the network calculation sheet. According to the applied standardization, circuits are numbered in each floor and column (starting from number 1). Each sheet is corresponds to a specific floor and each sheet row to a different circuit of a particular central column while each column of the calculation sheet refers to the data which are going to be inserted or result automatically during the data insertion procedure.

- 284 - FINE - HVAC

Attention should be paid to the fact that the sub-table of the circuit, which contains the detailed features of the particular circuit and is activated if F12 is pressed or by selecting '' Additional Data '' from the list that appears when we press the right button of the mouse while in the respective row, corresponds to each column-circuit row (which is symbolised with the serial column and circuit number, separated by a fullstop "." e.g. 2.3, which stands for column 2 circuit 3). Helpful instructions regarding any data entry appears on the second row (from the end) of the screen. Finally, it should be mentioned that the vertical columns of the network are entered, for every floor, in the 1st column of the sheet right below the last circuit, by simply inserting the central column number for each column. This standardization is completely relevant to the one applied to the Single Pipe System (see section above). If the above standardization is followed, data should be entered not only into the floor sheets (circuit table) but into the circuit sub-tables as well, for every network circuit. In the next paragraghs (a) and (b) you can find an extensive description about the way to insert data:

(a) Infloor Circuit (loop) Table As it has already been mentioned above, concerning every row of the calculation sheet, data should be inserted primarily in the first column, which refers to the circuit symbolism. The length of the pipe automatically comes up in the second column (provided that the necessary calculations have been made). In the same column, extra accessories can be added to the circuit (elbows, valves e.t.c.) if F12 is pressed or by selecting '' Additional Data '' from the list that appears when we press the right button of the mouse and the total z (resistance) provided, using the table which automatically appears on the top left side of the screen. The circuit load appears in column 3, on the condition that F12 has been formerly pressed or by selecting '' Additional Data '' from the list that appears when we press the right button of the mouse and certain data have been inserted into the displayed window (circuit sub-table). More specifically, you should insert either the serial number of the floor and the space heated by the particular circuit (e.g. 2.3 stands for floor 2 space 3) in the first row of the window or the space load directly in the third line (in Mcal/h).


During the calculation of each space thermal losses, it should be taken into consideration that the Infloor Heating System requires a 16-hour minimum operation time. Quite often part of the space under study needs to be covered by a separate additional circuit of high thermal output. Such a circuit is called thermal “zone”. The aim is to have the zone covering floor areas that cannot or are not normally used by the tenant of the space (e.g. area close to the external walls or area beneath an immovable piece of furniture e.t.c.). This zone allows us to cover a substantial space load, since the maximum floor temperature can be taken as 35 °C maximum. Note that space loads should not contain any floor losses, which should also be taken into account during the thermal losses calculation. In the second row you should insert the type of the space using 1, 2 or 3 which stand for residential area, bath, or high thermal output area respectively and affect the maximum allowable floor temperature. Remaining data of the circuit sub-table will be discussed below. In this way, if you exit the window by pressing Esc you can see that the circuit row data have been entered.

Attention! Results will not appear in case the average water temperature (in the circuit sub-table) is higher than the inlet temperature (temperature data). Therefore, you should either increase the latter or modify the circuit pipe spacing (RA) in the circuit sub-table.

When the results appear in the circuit row, it can be observed that all items (water supply, temperature drop in the circuit, flow velocity, frictions e.t.c.) have been calculated for the specific pipe diameter selected in the network data. If it is desired, it can be changed by pressing F3 while in the "desired pipe size" column (see also relevant message in the bottom of the screen). In the third column from the end, the required restriction is calculated so that the installation functions properly (through precise regulation devices). Regarding the most mailing installation circuit, restriction is automatically nullified (reference circuit).

(b) Circuit Sub-table As it has already been discussed above, control is transferred to the sub-table by pressing F12 or by selecting '' Additional Data '' from the list that appears when we press the right button of the mouse in the relevant row of the circuit table. Data appearing in the columns of this sub-table, as it can be seen in the previous screen, are as follows:

• Heated space: The floor and space serial numbers are entered (e.g. 1.2).

- 286 - FINE - HVAC

• Space type: It is determined whether it is a residential area, a bath or a high thermal output area respectively

• Space load: It concerns the total space load which automatically appears after selecting the "heated space" or typing it directly

• Floor surface: Insert the floor area of the heated space (in m2).

• Space temperature: It concerns the desired space temperature (in °C).

• Under heated Space Room temperature: The temperature of the space located under the heated space is entered (in °C).

• Coefficient of thermal resistance (Upward) (W/m2K).

• Coefficient of thermal Conduction (Downward) (W/m2K).

• Density of thermal flow (Mcal/hm2).

• Mean floor temperature: The average floor area temperature appears (in °C), as it has been calculated by the program.

• Maximum mean floor temperature: The maximum allowable floor area temperature appears in °C (DIN 4725E). Specifically, for residential areas tFBmax ≤ 29 °C, for perimetric zones tFBmax ≤ 35 °C and for baths tFB ≤ ti + 9 °C, where ti is the space temperature.

• Desired mean floor temperature: Insert the desired average floor area temperature (in °C).

• Corrected value of heat transfer Density: The corrected value of the thermal flow thickness is calculated and shown.

• Fall Sort Thermal Power: It concerns the power that cannot be covered by the particular piping arrangement. Consequently, the designer should either shorten the piping spacing or define a thermal zone or install a radiator.

• Pipes Distance RA • Mean water temperature: The average water temperature is calculated and

shown.

• Density of thermal flow downward: The density of thermal flow downward appears, as calculated by the program.

• Total Power of infloor heating system: The total infloor heating power of the installation is calculated.

• Circuit length: The required circuit length (net section) is calculated according to all the above mentioned data.

• Supply and return circuit length: Insert the total inlet and return length from the column to the circuit.

Some of the above values should be typed while others are automatically calculated (the ones in red). Default values, which are the more common in each case, have been inserted in advance so that the user will not have to insert data in all fields.


Any modifications in the above data bring about correspondent modifications in the values of the circuit sheet, which instantly appear on the screen. In this way, the user supervises and controls the procedure fully. Note that all these parameters account for precision reasons concerning the calculations, an essential requirement in every infloor heating installation. Regarding the calculations, it should be clarified that the space type (1:residential area, 2:bath ή 3:high thermal output area) automatically determines the maximum floor temperature (29, 33 or 35 respectively). If the average floor temperature is higher than the maximum, then the desired average floor temperature should be inserted. In this case, the circuit will not cover all losses. For this reason, the remaining thermal power appears. Moreover, pipe spacing constitutes one of the principal parameters determined by the user in each space. If this spacing is shortened, the circuit pipe length is obviously increased and the average water temperature drops. In all cases it is assumed that the circuit length should not exceed a certain limit which is set by the manufacturer of the particular pipe type and is approximately 150 m. Through various tests and modifying each and all of the above parameters, the user will be able to understand more easily the way the various items are linked. It is obvious that the program allows for any experimental interferences towards the optimum design of the installation.

Note: The formulas used in the calculations are summarised below: qfb = Qn/Afb tfb = (qfb/ages)+tl RA=da+ ar cosh z x 2/m z= { 2[ (th - tl) + Kb (tl - ta)]}/{3 (ac/kc) (tfb-tl) + 2 Kb (tl-ta) - (th-tl)} m = 0.45 x ( (kb + kc) / λb da ) Kb= κb/(κb+κc) Kc= κc/(κb+κc) l= 100 x Afb / (RA 100) qde = (th - ta) κb where: qfb density of thermal flow upward (W/m2) Qn thermal load without floor losses (W) Afb floor area (m2) tfb average floor area temperature (°C) ages convection heat transfer distribution coefficient for area heating (W /m2 K) l circuit pipe length (m) da pipe diameter (m) ac convection heat transfer coefficient from the bottom edge of the pipe to the upper side of the floor (W /m2 K)

- 288 - FINE - HVAC

κc convection heat transfer coefficient from the upper edge of the pipe to the upper side of the floor (W /m2 K) κb convection heat transfer coefficient from the bottom edge of the pipe to the bottom side of the floor (W /m2 K) ta room temperature below heated space (°C) th heating medium temperature (°C) tl room temperature (°C) λb thermal conductivity coefficient of the material used between the pipes (W/m K) RA pipe spacing (m)

2.4.4.2 Boiler The Boiler selection window functions in the same way as in the Single Pipe and Twin Pipes Heating System applications. If an increase coefficient is applied (e.g. 0.25 for a 25% increase), the Boiler power can be calculated. If F11 or the appropriate button into the field is pressed in the row "Type of Selected Boiler", the types included in the core library appear, from which the user selects the one desired.

2.4.4.3 Burner-Fuel Tank Like the Single or Twin Pipes System applications, the burner selection from the libraries entails pressing F11 or the appropriate button into the field while the tank dimensions entered should overbalance the capacity requirements, based on the given number of sufficient days and daily operation hours.

2.4.4.4 Circulator Whatever applies to the Single Pipe System bears an equal validity in this case. The sum of the total frictions results in the installation head (in mwg.). Press F11 or the arrow button into the field in the "Type of Selected Circulator" field in order to select the circulator type from the program libraries and go through the relevant features (Supply, Head and other features). Apparently, the selected circulator should comply with the supply and head installation requirements.

2.4.4.5 Expansion Tank-Chimney Whatever applies to the Single Pipe System bears an equal validity in the Expansion Tank and Chimney selection. Regarding the Expansion Tank, select expansion tank from the libraries (with F11 or the appropriate button into the field) so that the minimum required volume is exceeded. Regarding the chimney, enter the total height, on which the calculation of the required section is based, and the dimensions.

2.4.4.6 Vertical Diagram This option creates the vertical diagram of the network. The Boiler Room is located on the bottom side with its specific features automatically transferred from the calculation sheets.


2.4.4.7 Bill of Materials - Costing The results of the bill of materials-costing process of the particular project. The user can edit the bill of materials-costing sheet by modifying costs or quantities, inserting discounts, adding jobs or materials followed by their costs and quantities.

2.4.4.8 Technical Description The "Technical Description" window supports the creation of the project technical description, enabling the selection among various technical description prototypes and multiple text editing styles, according to chapter 1.

Note: The technical description prototype files can be found in the directory 4M\CALC\DAPE\ under the names DAPETP01.RTF, DAPETP02.RTF e.t.c. The prototype descriptions can be found in the file DAPETP.LST.

2.4.4.9 Assumptions The text of the project general Assumptions is stated, according to section 1.2.4.

Note: The Assumptions admission prototype files can be found in the directory 4M\CALC\DAPE\ under the names DAPEPR01.RTF, DAPEPR02.RTF e.t.c. The prototype descriptions are in the file DAPEPR.LST.

2.4.4.10 Cover The “Cover” window is the first printed page of the project and the program enables the user to select among a set of different types of cover pages, or even create his own cover page, exactly as he wants it.

Note: The prototype files can be found in the directory 4M\CALC\DAPE\ under the names DAPECP01.RTF, DAPECP02.RTF e.t.c. The prototype descriptions can be found in the file DAPECP.LST.

2.4.5 Libraries Infloor Heating System Libraries include pipes and radiators as well as the Boiler Room equipment (Boilers, Burners, Circulators, Expansion Tanks e.t.c.) as in the case of Single and Twin Pipes Systems. Therefore, for further details, see sections 2.2 and 2.3 concerning Twin Pipe System and Single Pipe System respectively.

2.4.6 Help This option leads to other user support options, according to section 1.2.6.


3. Air Conditioning

The Air-conditioning package consists of four applications, which function either independently or in conjunction with each other. These applications are listed below:

• Cooling Loads: Cooling Loads are calculated (with the use of Ashrae or Carrier method) in each building floor and space, a procedure which usually comprises the first step of an Air-conditioning project.

• Fan Coils: All the necessary calculations for the installation of Fan Coils are carried out and the required equipment is selected (Fan Coil units, pipes, cooling system, pump, safety device etc).

• Ducts: All the necessary calculations for the installation of a duct network are carried out (with one of the three known methods) and the required equipment is selected (duct dimensions, duct grills, fan etc).

• Systems-Psychrometry: The air distribution in the air-conditioned spaces is estimated based on the analytical psychometric equations, the psychometric change is depicted on the Psychometric Chart and the appropriate air-conditioning unit is selected.

The four Air-conditioning applications are described in detail in the following sections 3.1 – 3.4.

- 292 - FINE - HVAC


3.1 Cooling Loads When the program is loaded, the main menu with the option groups "Files", "Options", "Windows", "Libraries" and "Help" appears on the screen.

3.1.1 Files The option "Files" contains secondary options, which apply to each application (see section 1.3.1). Summarizing, the options in brief are: New project: Type a name in order to save the new project in a file. Project Selection: A window appears where you can select the desired (existing) project file and load it.

Attention! Provided that you select neither a new nor an already existing Project, the program automatically considers that the project named UNNAMED is active. If you add new data to the UNNAMED project and you want to save it with a different name, select “Save as” and type the new project name.

Update from Drawing: The project calculation sheets are updated in case of collaboration with the FINΕ package.

Attention! If the option "Update from Drawing" is selected, without previously opening a project and inserting spaces in the ground plans using the FINE package, any existing data in the calculation sheets will be replaced with blanks.

Export: When the study of the loads is completed, the link files to the other air-conditioning applications (Systems, Fan Coils, Ducts) as well as to the Thermal Losses and the FKLIM can be created.

- 294 - FINE - HVAC

As shown in the next example, during file creation, you are asked if you wish the total loads to be taken into consideration or just the ventilation loads or the space loads. This provides the designer with various alternative ways in order to satisfy the space needs (e.g. using ducts to cover all loads or using ducts to cover ventilation and fan coils for space loads etc).

Save: The project you are currently working on is saved on the hard disc (with the previously given name). Save as: The project you are currently working on is saved in a different file with a new name. Load Prototype: The saved prototype appears on the screen. Save as Prototype: The form, which has been created by the user and is displayed on the screen when this option is selected, is saved as a Prototype. Printing Prototypes: The printing prototype management window is activated. Printing: The project issue is printed according to the previously selected options in "Printing Contents" and "Printing Parameters", following the print preview output. Printing Contents: The contents of the project you wish to print are selected: Printing Parameters: The desired printing parameters can be selected in this window according to the procedure already mentioned in Chapter 1. Print Preview: The complete project issue appears on the screen, exactly as it will be printed, page to page. Link to MS-Word: A RTF file containing the project items is created (within the project directory, with the name KLIM.RTF). Παράλληλα, ενεργοποιείται το MS-Word (εφόσον είναι εγκατεστηµένο στον υπολογιστή σας). Link to 4M Editor: A RTF file containing the project items is created (within the project directory, with the name KLIM.RTF). Παράλληλα, ενεργοποιείται o 4M Editor.


Export to Rtf: A Rtf file containing the project items is created (within the project directory, with the name KLIM.RTF). Exit: Exit from the "Air-conditioning Loads" application.

3.1.2 Options These are the basic options of the project and they are divided in the following categories: Project Options (headings of the project), special building data, structural elements data and typical building openings data.

3.1.2.1 Project Options Project Options are mentioned in titles and headings, concerning the identity of the project, as in any other application.

3.1.2.2 Months Reference month serial number: This is the serial number of the month about which we care to have an on-screen presentation of some intermediate and individual results (e.g. the space loads due to an eastern window per hour). This happens because the large information volume, which would accumulate if more months were to pass by, would rather make it more difficult for the user in such a detailed level of information. In the level of concentrated calculations, the results may concern as many months as the user desires (see hereunder). Calculation month serial numbers: Here, the user types the serial number for the months for which he wants calculations to be carried out (from April until September). The calculation months can be arranged in any order in the vertical column of the screen and modified whenever the user desires.

3.1.2.3 Indoor conditions

Desired indoor temperature: This concerns the desired temperature (in °C) in the air-conditioned spaces. If F11 or the appropriate button into the field is pressed, the auxiliary library table appears, from which the desired case can be selected by pressing <Enter>. Alternatively, the desired temperature can be typed directly.

- 296 - FINE - HVAC

Desired indoor humidity: This concerns the desired relative (%) humidity in the air-conditioned spaces. If F11 or the appropriate button into the field is pressed, the auxiliary library table appears, from which the desired case can be selected by pressing <Enter>. It is noted that in this way the lower humidity limit is selected but the user can alter it by consulting the table data. Difference between outdoor and non air-conditioned spaces temperature: The temperature difference between the outdoor environment and the non air-conditioned spaces is typed (in °C). Temperature difference between ground and air-conditioned spaces: The temperature difference between ground and air-conditioned spaces is typed (in °C). This difference will be taken into consideration in the respective calculations.

3.1.2.4 Climatologic Data They refer to the selected city. At first, the city serial number is 2, which corresponds to Izmir. Any change of this number or the direct selection of another city (if F11 or the appropriate button into the field is pressed, the library cities appear) results in displaying the corresponding climatologic data (maximum temperatures and the corresponding fluctuations for 6 months as well as the average relative humidity in summer). Note that the above values comply with data from the bibliography but, naturally, they can be modified (usually increased) according to the user’s judgement.

3.1.2.5 Building Data The data of the screen below, which concern the building, the units in use and the calculation methodology, are inserted.

Altitude: The altitude value of the building is typed (in m). Area with Fog: In case there is usually fog check the box or let it empty in case there is no fog in the area is entered. The default value is naturally the second one.


Number of (building) Levels: The levels (floors) of the building can be up to 15, while each floor has the ability to house a practically infinite number of spaces. Typical Level Height: This concerns the most common value which characterises the distance between the building floors and is estimated in m. The distance defined here will automatically update the height of the walls in the calculation sheets, while the user will be able to make modifications wherever he desires. Unit system: The results (air-conditioning loads) can be expressed in three different types of units (Kcal/h, Watt, Btu/h) according to the user’s wish. Note that all data tables in the program that concern power units are expressed in Kcal/h. Calculation Methodology: The program provides the user with the important ability to select among Carrier, Ashrae CLTD and Ashrae TFM calculation methodologies. Moreover, when the user completes the data entry procedure with one of these methods, he is able to compare its results with the other method results, by simply altering the method. In this case, the user should pay attention while entering the roof data in the typical data sheet (see hereunder), because standardisation is different in each method. In other words, he should alter standard roof data before he calls up each method. It is also useful for the user to check whether there is a wall type by Ashrae in the typical walls as well as in the typical roofs, when this methodology has been selected (see next section).

Note: The Ashrae TFM (Transfer Function Method) Methodology takes into consideration the Transfer Function for the calculation of the cooling loads. If this method is selected, the program follows precisely everything mentioned in the recent (1997) Ashrae handbook about the TFM method. As far as walls are concerned, the program takes into consideration the data of the Heat Department of the National Technical University of Athens (NTUA) regarding the Greek Walls, as these data have been published in relevant projects and books. For that reason, the program wall libraries have been expanded and updated using the NTUA codification (G1, G2 etc). Finally, since the storage of the loads in each space also depends on some specific characteristics of the space (e.g. floor type, lighting, suspended ceiling type etc.), these data are inserted in the window that appears when F11 is pressed from the field "System or Zone" at the bottom of the calculation sheet.

Increment Factor: The user can define in any desired space a general increase factor for the loads (e.g. 5%), which will increase accordingly all the individual loads of the space. This can be also done through the window that appears when F11 or the appropriate button into the field is pressed from the field "System or Zone" at the bottom of the calculation sheet. The value of the general increase can be defined in the building data sheet. Initial checking time – Final checking time: Through these 2 last options of the "Building Data" menu the user has the ability to determine the range of the time period in which he wishes to have the calculation results (e.g. initial time 8 until final time 18). Naturally, the selection can be made for the whole 24 hours time (from 1 o’clock until 24 o’clock) but the result volume will be larger.

- 298 - FINE - HVAC

3.1.2.6 Typical Options

This term corresponds to some common element types which characterise the building, and more specifically to:

• Typical structural elements (walls, floors, roofs)

• Typical openings (doors, windows)

• Typical daily schedules (lighting, people) Regarding typical structural elements, there is the possibility to define:

• Up to 11 external walls with specified thermal conductivity coefficient k, weight (100, 300, 500, 700 kg) and colour (light, intermediate, dark), as well as standardisation by Ashrae (A, B, C, D, Ε, F, G). Here the user can select the desired typical data from the relevant library, after having pressed F11 or the appropriate button into the field in order for the respective list to appear. In case the user types the value for the coefficient k and the weight, the selection of a type by Ashrae cannot be ensured, since there is no such rule. However, the user can select a type and modify slightly the coefficient k afterwards. This can be considered of no significant modification to the formula. Nevertheless, even if there is no respective wall type by Ashrae, the program is automatically taking into consideration the type "C", which is the most common for the Greek Conditions.

• Up to 8 internal walls with specified thermal conductivity coefficient k.

• Up to 8 floors with specified thermal conductivity coefficient k.

• Up to 5 roofs with specified thermal conductivity coefficient k, weight (50, 100, 200, 300 kg), colour (light, intermediate, dark), type by Carrier (sunny, shady, under water or watered) or by Ashrae (types 1, 2, 3, .., 11 with or without suspended ceiling) (see on-screen help instructions, depending on the selected method). Regarding standardisation by Ashrae, similar instructions to the ones described above, concerning the walls, apply here as well. Note that you should pay attention to the third column data (colour and type) because "type" has a different meaning in each method.


As far as the typical openings are concerned, up to 16 types of openings can be defined, each with specified dimensions (m), coefficient k, absorption coefficient, frame coefficient (1: wooden frame, 2: without frame or with metal frame) and coefficient of air penetration α (the same coefficient applied in heating). As far as the absorption coefficient is concerned, a detailed auxiliary table appears (by pressing F11 or the appropriate button into the field).

3.1.2.7 Coincidence Options The program provides the option of specifying typical daily scheduling for lighting and people as well. In both cases a coefficient column, concerning a period of 11 hours, appears. These coefficients (which have a preset value 1) correspond to the hours of the day (from 8 am until 6 pm) and multiply the relevant loads (lighting or people) for the above mentioned hours. For example, if a coefficient with value 1 corresponds to a specific hour, that means that at that time the total load (lighting or people) is taken into consideration multiplied with 0.6, that is 60% of the load, and so on.

3.1.3 View This set of options includes the secondary option "Toolbars" which are described in section 1 in detail

3.1.4 Windows The option “Windows” includes a series of calculation and result windows, in which the analytical project calculations are presented. The main window which comprises the core of the calculations for the "Air-conditioning Loads" application is the Load Sheet, which is described in the following section.

3.1.4.1 Calculation Sheet The calculation sheets for Space loads are included in the respective building floor sheets. If one of the floors is selected, a list will appear containing the respective load sheets for the floor spaces.

- 300 - FINE - HVAC

Normally when a new project is created, this list is empty. By moving to this list (with the mouse) and clicking the icon (with the “+” at the bottom) in the menu or pressing the <Ins> key, a small window appears in which the desired name of the space (e.g. Kitchen, Bath, etc) should be typed. By pressing “OK” this space Enters the list and all there is to do is type its dimensions in the air-conditioning load sheet. Respectively, by clicking the icon Delete Space (with the “x“) or pressing <Del> on the keyboard, while the space name is selected, this particular space is deleted (after the program prompts you to confirm this option). Finally, there is the option to Insert Space, by selecting an intermediate space and pressing <Ctrl>&<I> or the insertion icon (with “+” in the middle) and all the spaces below that point move and an empty row appears (in order to define another space there).

Note: If you want to change the name of an existing space, you can simply select the space name and press <Enter> and a window with the old name will appear, where you can change this name if desired. We can also press the button ''Rename Space'' to change the name of a space.

After “Maximizing” the sheet with the cooling loads on the screen, the relevant data and the rows and columns to be filled should be monitored, in order to calculate the loads of the specified space.


The screen that corresponds to the space data is divided in two parts: the upper part refers to the loads due to the structural elements of the space, while the lower part refers to the additional loads due to lighting, people, appliances etc. Concerning the upper part of the screen, each row corresponds exactly to one structural element of the space, while each column refers to the data which should be inserted or automatically derive during the sheet filling procedure. In total, up to 60 fields can be filled with data in each space. Help instructions concerning data entering appear at the bottom of the screen (status bar). In each row, the first column that refers to some typical structural element (e.g. W1, O1 etc) should be filled at the beginning and then the respective data of the standard building elements are filled automatically. For example, if O1 is typed in the first column of a row, then the dimensions of the typical opening 1 and the respective coefficient k are transferred automatically in the respective columns of the same row (the typical data appear if F11 or the appropriate button into the field is pressed). In the column "Surfaces equal number" 1 is automatically inserted. Of course, these values can change whenever desired. The fields that should be always filled with data are:

• Orientation (8 types) We type or we select from the table that appears when we press the appropriate button into the field.

• Length (m)

• Height (m)

• Number of equal surfaces

- 302 - FINE - HVAC

Note: The 3rd column refers to "Subtracted", thus providing the option to define the structural elements of the first column of the calculation sheet (e.g. W1, O2 etc) as "Subtracted" (among the several elements only Openings are automatically inserted as Subtrahend, meaning that, if an opening is inserted in the first column, then "Α" is inserted in the column "Subtracted"). This column provides the user with the ability to define, if desired, individual data on the cooling loads calculation sheet (e.g. Subtrahend beams, pillars or piles from the Walls) for maximal accuracy on the calculations, while in the case of collaboration between the CAD Component and the Calculation Component, the individual structural elements «pass» automatically from the drawing to the calculations (as "Subtracted"). Generally, in this way there is complete and accurate analysis and control of the data and the results.

Optionally, in the last 3 columns, the data for the shading calculation can be typed. Three different shading mechanisms are possible:

• Shading due to curtains, tents, etc: This applies only to windows in the case there are curtains, tents, etc that cover their total surface at the same time. The most common values for each case and according to the color shades appear in the auxiliary table, which is activated when F11 or the appropriate button into the field is pressed.

• Shadings due to projections: This applies mainly to openings but it can be also used for wall surfaces. If we press the right button of the mouse while in the respective column and row we can select from the list ''Additional Data'' and the window of the adjacent figure appears in the right corner of the screen. Here you should absolutely fill the width of the horizontal and (or) vertical projection of the opening (in m) and its distance from it. For example, for a balcony of one meter width which hangs 0.5 meter above the O1 window, you should type for the O1 window (after having pressed F11 for the table to appear) 1 in the field of the horizontal projection width and 0.5 in the field of the horizontal projection distance.

• Shadings inserted arbitrarily: The user has the ability to select his own shading coefficients for different hours, with the help of the relevant window, which also appears at the bottom right corner of the screen. This option is used when there are shadings due to elements that do not belong to the building (e.g. neighbouring buildings). Note that a shading coefficient 0 means that the window is completely shaded, a shading coefficient 1 means that it is not shaded at all and a coefficient from 0 to 1 means that it is shaded partially. As you can see in the table above, the user types shading coefficients that correspond to specified hours. Regarding all other intermediate hours, the shading coefficient is calculated automatically with the linear interpolation method.

Notes: • In case the last two columns in one opening are both filled, the last column has

priority.

• In order to show where shadings have been calculated, the word «SHADE» appears in the respective column and row of each sheet.


• In each case of shading data entry mode, the respective calculated shading coefficients per hour (for the reference month) appear on the screen when we press the button or the F8 is pressed or by selecting ''Shadows'' from the special toolbar.

Returning to the structural elements data that are filled in the first column of the sheet, it is pointed out that there are 2 factors that derive automatically: the thermal conductivity coefficient and the removable wall surface: The thermal conductivity coefficient k derives automatically from the respective typical structural element. The removable wall surface is automatically calculated from its opening(s) area, under the following conditions:

• The opening or the openings of the wall have been typed in the sheet, right under the wall.

• The exposure value is the same for the wall and the opening (or openings).

• "S" (Subtrahend), which is automatically inserted for the openings, should be entered in the 3rd column.

In general, the above mentioned apply to the case of removable roof surfaces due to openings (Skylights) as well. The only difference is that "H" (horizontal) is inserted in the second column, instead of exposure. Moreover, the same apply to the case of the removable internal wall surfaces due to internal openings (e.g. wooden doors). The only difference is that "I" (internal opening) is inserted in the second column, instead of exposure. It should also be noted that, if the exposure column is marked with "I", the respective structural element is considered to be internal (it is also taken into consideration, among others, the difference with non air-conditioned spaces that is typed in the general data). In this way, if a floor or a ceiling is next to a non-heated space, "I" should be typed, while if there is a floor that is next to the ground or an external roof, the field should be left empty. Any modification in the above data leads to respective changes in the values of the losses sheet, which appear instantly on the screen. In particular, as far as the space loads calculation is concerned, the Maximum Space Load Values appear in the bottom right corner of the screen, at every minute, and more specifically:

• The maximum sensible space load

• The maximum latent space load

• The maximum total space load If the designer wishes to see the analytical calculations per structural element and hour, all he has to do is press F7 or the button or select ''Loads'' from the special toolbar and the analytical loads due to each structural element as well as the sums for each hour will appear on the screen. In this way the user has absolute supervision and control in every phase of the data entry procedure and can interfere accordingly (e.g. make an opening smaller if he thinks that this causes a rather large increase of the space load).

- 304 - FINE - HVAC

At the bottom left part of the screen appear the results that concern additional loads due to People, Appliances, Lighting and Ventilation. More specifically, these data are divided in two categories: total loads due to People and Appliances appear in the left column while total loads due to Lighting and Ventilation appear in the right column.

a) Loads due to people: In the case of people, the adjacent window appears on the screen, where the following data should be inserted: Calculation methodology (people/m2 of space or people): Type 1 or 2, depending on whether you want to enter the total space lighting power (Watt) or the power per space surface unit (Watt/m2) respectively. In the second case the surface of the space should be known. This can be inserted in the last but one row (ventilation), where the dimensions of the space are typed. Number of people for every kind of activity (e.g. 2 people sitting, two people working in light conditions etc). Building type (e.g. office, restaurant etc), the specification of which leads to the selection of the respective daily schedule, which is ready in the program. In case the user wishes to specify his own schedule, note that he should specify it in the Options menu and choose the "Coincidence Options" in this phase. Furthermore, the user may not want variation in the number of people in the space. In this case, number 1 should be left in the field "building type".


b) Loads due to appliances: In the case of appliance, a window appears on the screen, where the number of each unit type that exists in the space or, directly, the unit sensible and latent load specified by the manufacturer should be typed. c) Loads due to Lighting: In the case of lighting, a window appears on the screen, where the following data should be typed:

• Calculation Methodology: Type 1 or 2, depending on whether you want to define the total space lighting power (Watt) or the power per space surface unit (Watt/m2) respectively. In the second case, the surface of the space should be known. This can be inserted in the last but one row (ventilation), where the dimensions of the space are typed.

• Power of fluorescent lamps: The power of the fluorescent lamps (if they exist) is typed in watt.

• Power of incandescent lamps (Watt): The power of incandescent lamps (if they exist) is typed in watt.

• Building type: The building type serial number is typed (e.g. office, restaurant etc) according to the table that appears on screen. The definition of the "building type" leads to the selection of the appropriate daily lighting schedule, which is ready in the program. In case the user wants to specify his own schedule, note that he should specify it in the coincidence data menu and select the "Coincidence Options" in this phase. Furthermore, the user may not want variation in daily time lighting. In this case, number 1 should be left in the field "building type".

- 306 - FINE - HVAC

d) Loads due to Ventilation: They are due to either losses due to slots (in the case of no forced air circulation) or loads due to air changes. Loads due to air changes are estimated only when the user wants to. If <F11> or the apppropriate button into the field is pressed, the user can type values for length, width, height and number of air changes per hour (n). If there is no forced air circulation, losses due to slots are probable to occur. In a similar case, the number of air changes must be 0, while the value of the slot coefficient should be approximately 0.5 (see Calculation Assumptions).

Notes: • If there is a central air conditioning system, the loads due to air changes are not

"charged" to the space but to the respective air-conditioning unit (their calculation is described in the section of Calculation Assumptions in detail).

• Losses due to slots are included in the calculations only if there are Fan Coils to install, while they are ignored in the case of air ducts due to overpressure.

System or Zone: The zone or unit serial number, which is found at the bottom of the central column, should be typed only if you want to group the spaces (up to 50 space groups can be defined), so that total calculations for each group can be performed separately. The default zone or unit number is 1. The air-conditioning load requirements of a zone can be covered by (usually) one or more units. In the latter case, which is the more rare to occur, the load allocation over units is left to the designer.

If F11 or the apppropriate button into the field is pressed in the field "System or Zone", the following window is activated, where you can insert the increase, temperature and relative humidity values regarding the specific space. In particular, regarding exclusively the 3rd method (Ashrae TFM), the space surrounding type (from very light to thick with values 1-4), the air circulation (low up to very high with values 1-4), the operation type (not 24-hour or 24-hour) and the coefficient a (see adjacent table) can be also defined. If F11 or the apppropriate button into the field is pressed in each one of the 4 last fields, an auxiliary table appears containing a list of relevant values from which the user may choose the appropriate one for the space under study.


The sensible load part of all the above additional loads is added to the total load of the structural elements and the final sum corresponds to the total room sensible load. If the latent loads due to people and equipment are summed up, the total space latent load results. The total sensible plus the total latent load comprise the total space load. These per hour values are shown in the calculation sheet mentioned above. In order to insert data faster, in case they have to be analytically typed (that is, if they are not automatically updated from drawings through FINE), the program enables the user to copy a typical floor (extremely usual in practice) and a typical space: Typical Level (Floor): If you enter a blank level, where no space has been defined, a query window automatically appears asking whether that is a typical floor. Then you should answer clicking "Yes" or "No". In the first case, a list will appear containing the building floors from which you can select an already completed floor to update the space load sheets of the blank level. Typical Space: The program enables the user to copy any space and paste it to any other (typical space) on the same floor or on a different one (e.g. the user might want to copy space 1 on floor 1 and paste it to space 5 on floor 3). This can be done as follows:

• First enter the floor and the space you want to copy.

• Press either the keys <Ctrl>&<Ins> simultaneously or click the "Copy" icon in the menu.

• Then enter the floor and the space where you want to paste the data. Naturally, this room must have been previously defined (as described above, by pressing <Ins> and inserting its name). However, if it is not defined, define it now.

• Press either the keys <Shift>&<Ins> simultaneously or click the "Paste" icon in the menu and the data from the initial space sheet will be pasted to the active one.

- 308 - FINE - HVAC

Note: The above calculation sheet results are printed only if “Calculation Sheets” have been selected in the Printing Contents (Print menu). However, due to the variety of results, the user may exclude some of them from printing, by modifying the selections within the window "Printing Contents". This window is selected from the menu shown right next to "Windows", when the calculation sheet window is active. At the bottom, there is a field with the name "Page Break", which the user should check if he wants each results section printed on a different page.


3.1.4.2 Temperature Differences The results of this window are directly linked to the applied methodology, which means that some intermediate results-admissions of the method are shown. Therefore: Ι. If the Carrier method is selected, the temperature correction coefficients are calculated and shown on the screen. These coefficients are summarised in the following table, which appears (regarding the values corresponding to the reference month) automatically on top of the general data screen, simply for supervision reasons.

The values of these coefficients refer to the following items:

• D.B. Correction: These coefficients are obtained from table 1 (Carrier) and refer to the ambient temperature fluctuations per hour to 3 p.m., regarding the specific daily fluctuation (vertical axis in table 1).

• Corrected ambient temperature: It results from the sum of the above D.B. coefficient values for each hour with the maximum daily temperature of the month.

• Window conductivity: It results from the difference of the indoor temperature of the air-conditioned spaces from the ambient temperature for each hour.

- 310 - FINE - HVAC

• Non air-conditioned space temperature difference Dt: It results from the difference between the window conductivity coefficients and the temperature difference value between air-conditioned and non air-conditioned spaces for each hour.

All the above values shown on the screen correspond to the reference month and refer to the period from 8 a.m. to 6 p.m. Finally, the Wall correction coefficient is calculated at the bottom: This is a number resulting from table 4 of section 5, if the daily temperature fluctuation and the difference between ambient and indoor temperature at 3 pm are known. ΙΙ. If the Ashrae method is selected, the following items are calculated and shown on the screen:

• Ambient temperatures: These are the same ambient temperature values

taken into account in the Carrier method (so that a comparative assessment of the two methodologies is possible).

• Indoor and ambient temperature differences: It results from the difference between the indoor temperature of the air-conditioned spaces and the ambient temperature for each hour.

• Average ambient temperature: It is the average ambient temperature of the reference month which is calculated using the average temperature (1).


• Correction DT: It is the Ashrae correction coefficient regarding the month as well as the wall and roof exposure.

The first two values correspond to the reference month and refer to the period from 8 a.m. to 6 p.m.

3.1.4.3 Building Loads Rundown The total building loads are shown for each month and hour without including ventilation.

3.1.4.4 Building Loads Analysis All loads and their sum are shown per month and hour and they are described in detail (including the unit ventilation loads).

3.1.4.5 Systems Loads Analysis All loads and their sum are shown per month and hour and they are described in detail for each System (including the unit ventilation loads).

- 312 - FINE - HVAC

3.1.4.6 Diagram: Total Loads Without Ventilation The following chart appears, displaying the load variation per hour and calculation month regarding the building total loads without Ventilation.

3.1.4.7 Diagram: Total Loads With Ventilation The above chart appears, displaying the load variation per hour and calculation month regarding the building total loads with Ventilation.

3.1.4.8 Systems Diagram The following chart appears, displaying the load variation per hour and calculation month regarding the total loads for each system.


3.1.4.9 Assumptions The text of the project general Assumptions, which may be included in the printed project as long as it is selected in "Printing Contents", is stated. If “Assumptions” is selected, the option "Assumptions" with the secondary option "Select Prototype" appear in the menu. If a specific admission prototype is selected, the respective text appears in a window (see Chapter 1).

Note: The Assumption prototype files are in the directory 4M\CALC\KLIM\ with the names KLIMPR01.RTF, KLIMPR02.RTF and so on. The prototype descriptions, which are listed on the screen if "Select prototype" is selected, are in the file KLIMPR.LST.

3.1.4.10 Cover (of the project issue) The “Cover” window is the first printed page of the project and the program enables the user to select among different types of cover pages, or even create his own cover page, exactly as he wants it, according to section 1.3.

Note: The cover page prototype files are in the directory 4M\CALC\ΚLΙΜ\ with the names KLIMCP01.RTF, KLIMCP02.RTF and so on. The prototype descriptions are in the file KLIMCP.LST.

3.1.5 Libraries Libraries refer to structural element types as well as temperature data. They can be updated by the user, who can insert his own data, exactly as he wants. The library categories of the "Cooling Loads" application are described in the following sections.

3.1.5.1 Openings This library contains various opening types which are characterised by particular values for thermal conductivity coefficient, glass coefficient and cost.

- 314 - FINE - HVAC

3.1.5.2 External Walls It contains a variety of external wall types which are charecterised by a specific thermal conductivity coefficient, weight, colour, type by Ashrae etc.

3.1.5.3 Inner Walls It contains internal wall types with similar characteristics to those of the external ones.

3.1.5.4 Floors It contains a variety of floor types which are charecterised by a specific thermal conductivity coefficient, weight, type by Ashrae etc.


3.1.5.5 Ceilings (or Roofs) It contains a variety of roof types which are charecterised by a specific thermal conductivity coefficient, weight, colour, type by Ashrae etc.

3.1.5.6 Summer Climatologic Data A list containing the more significant cities followed by their average maximum temperatures, fluctuations and summer relative humidity values, according to the existing meteorological data, is available.

- 316 - FINE - HVAC

If you click a specific City of the City list and then click the key "Temperatures" on the right, a small window appears with the values for the above mentioned items for this particular City. Apparently, the user can modify these values or even add more Cities to this Library list inserting the proper values required for the period April-September.

3.1.5.7 Recommended Indoor Temperatures Here indoor temperatures are recommended for various space categories depending on their use.

3.1.5.8 Recommended Indoor Humidity Values Here an indoor humidity value is recommended for various room categories depending on their use.


3.1.6 Help This option describes the program instructions, according to section 1.3.

- 318 - FINE - HVAC


3.2 Fan Coils If the Fan Coils application is selected, the following menu is displayed with the groups of options "Files”, “Options”, “View”, “Windows”, “Libraries” and “Help”. These options and their secondary options are analytically described in the following sections:

3.2.1 Files The option "Files" contains secondary options which apply to each application (see section 1.3.1). Summarising, the options in brief are: New project: Type a name for the new project to save it in a file. Project Selection: A window appears where you can select the desired (existing) project file and load it.

Attention! Provided that you select neither a new nor an already existing Project, the program automatically considers that the project named UNNAMED is active. If you add new data to the UNNAMED project and you want to save it with a different name, select “Save as” and type the new project name.

Update from Drawing: In the case of co-operation with the FINE package, the project calculation sheets are updated with the drawing data.

- 320 - FINE - HVAC

Attention! If the option "Update from Drawing" is selected, without previously grill a project and inserting rooms in the ground plans using the FINE package, any existing data in the calculation sheets will be replaced with blanks.

Save: The project you are currently working on is saved on the hard disc (with the previously given name). Save as...: The project you are currently working on is saved in a different file with a new name. Load Prototype: The saved prototype appears on the screen. Save as Prototype: The form, which has been created by the user and is displayed on the screen when this option is selected, is saved as a Prototype. Printing Prototypes: The printing prototype management window is activated. Printing: The project issue is printed according to the previously selected options in "Printing Contents" and "Printing Parameters", following the print preview output. Printing Contents: From the list of the project’s results, select the contents of the project you want printed: Printing Parameters: The desired printing parameters can be selected in this window according to the procedure already mentioned in section 1.3.1. Print Preview: The complete project issue appears on the screen, exactly as it will be printed, page to page. Link to MS-Word: A RTF file containing the project items is created (within the project directory, with the name FANC.RTF). Παράλληλα, ενεργοποιείται το MS-Word (εφόσον είναι εγκατεστηµένο στον υπολογιστή σας). Link to 4M Editor: A RTF file containing the project items is created (within the project directory, with the name FANC.RTF). Παράλληλα, ενεργοποιείται o 4M Editor. Export to RTF: A RTF file, containing the project items, is created (within the project directory, named after FANC.RTF). Exit: Exit from the "Fan Coils" application.

3.2.2 Options This pertains to the project basic data, which are divided into general data (project headings) and network data.

3.2.2.1 Project Options Project Options refer to titles and headings pertaining to the project identity, as in any other application.

3.2.2.2 Network Options Network options refer to the following network parameters, as shown in the corresponding window:

• Water temperature

• Fan Coil Units (Water) temperature difference.


• Dry Bulb Temperature).

• Wet Bulb temperature (related to the previous dry bulb temperature).

• Main Pipe Type

• Main Pipe Roughness Factor.

• Secondary Pipe Type.

• Secondary Pipe Roughness Factor.

• Maximum water velocity (upper limit for pipe diameter selection)

• Friction Limit per meter Length of Piping (upper limit for pipe diameter selection) The recommended maximum pressure drop in water supply systems is 30 kPa per 30 m of equivalent pipe length, i.e. 10% approximately, or 10 m of water column per 100 m of equivalent pipe length.

• Number of pumps (1-5).

• Unit system (Kcal/h or Watt or ΒTU/h).

• Type of cooling engine (air- or water-cooled).

• FCU Type: Category of the fan coil units manufacturer (e.g. FYROGENIS).

3.2.3 View This set of options includes the secondary option "Toolbars" which are described in chapter 1 in detail.

3.2.4 Windows The option “Windows” includes a series of calculation and result windows, in which the analytical project calculations are presented. The main window which comprises the core of the application calculations is the Fan Coil Network Calculation Sheet, which is decribed in the following section.

- 322 - FINE - HVAC


As shown in the figure, each row of this sheet corresponds to a different network section while each column refers to data that will be inserted or will result automatically during the procedure of data insertion. Instructions regarding data insertion appear in the status bar. In each row, first fill in the fields of the first column which refer to section designations. Network standardization is based on the familiar principles explained in section 1.3.1. Suppose the simple network shown in the adjacent figure is under study. In this figure, junction points (1,2,3) and Fan Coil units (4,5,6) have been numbered. Each junction point may be assigned a number (from 1 to 99) or a letter (e.g. Α) or a combination of letters and numbers (e.g. A2, AB, 3C etc.). The only limitation in numbering is that number 1 should be assigned to the point where the pump is located. In addition, for obvious reasons each number should not appear twice in the same network. It should be noted that all calculation sheets refer to the same network and that they can be accessed either through the menu or through sheets using the keys <PgUp> and <PgDn>.


After numbering the network, enter each section in the project calculation sheet separately (the succession order is not important) by typing in the first column the two junction points of each section (putting a dot in between) in such order that matches the direction of water flow in the pipe section. In the above example sections 1.2, 2.3, 2.6, 3.4 and 3.5 (order is arbitrary) should be filled. For each section between two junction points (for example, section 1.2, or 2.3 in the above figure), the following data should be available:

• Pipe length (including return pipe) and

• Local accessory resistance (inserted in detail after F11 or the appropriate button into the field is pressed in the corresponding column).

In addition to the pipe length and local accessory resistance, the fan coil flow rate should be inserted in each row, between a junction point and a fan coil unit (e.g. section 2.6 in the figure). This can be inserted directly (after the corresponding temperature difference in column 4 is deleted) or can be automatically calculated if the temperature difference and the space cooling load are known. In the last and more common case, it is necessary to press F12 or select ''Additional Data'' from the list that appears when we press the right button of the mouse , in any column. Then the following window appears on the screen:

Provided a link to the Cooling loads program has been established, space load, sensible and latent, is automatically inserted (if floor and space number, e.g. 1.2, is inserted) and the resulting flow corresponds to the total flow required for the space. If there are more than one Fan Coil units in the same space, the designer should intervene by allocating the load accordingly. In the above window, the network polar co-ordinates should be provided (regarding the above example, angles of 0 degrees should be assigned to sections 1.2, 2.6 and 3.5, 90 degrees to section 2.3 and 180 degrees to section 3.4) so that the drawing and the vertical chart are designed correctly. It is emphasised that, in this manner, any type of network can be accurately and scale designed. Finally, the respective fan coil is calculated in the above window, with inlet temperature defined in the project options (which may be altered by the designer). Calculation of the fan coil unit is performed automatically by the fan coil units file defined in the network data and displayed in the above window.

- 324 - FINE - HVAC

If cooling loads are known, then flow rates in sections where no fan coils exist (e.g. 2.3) are summed up and displayed automatically in the flow rate column. Based on the flow rate in each network section and the maximum velocity corresponding to this section, the cross-section of the section pipe is specified. Despite all this, the designer may insert another standard diameter, by pressing F11 or the appropriate button into the field in the 6th column and selecting one of the standard diameters of the library list, which appears on the screen. Regardless of the way the section has been defined, the effective water velocity and the pressure drops (see respective columns) are accurately calculated, provided the accessories in the respective network section are known. Accessories are inserted in each section separately, activating the relevant accessory window by pressing F11 or the appropriate button into the field in the respective column.

At this point, the accessory numbers for each accessory type or even their combination should be entered (up to 5 different accessory types per section). There is also the ability to assign a serial number to accessory systems (on the top) so as to avoid the repeated filling of the same accessories and enter the system directly from the calculation sheet (by simply inserting the system serial number). Note that, in order to balance the various branches, inserting special accessories can restrict the network. The option “Section Friction Drop” shows how well balanced the system is and indirectly indicates which branches need restriction. In the case of typical (similar) sections it is possible to recall them (with their name from the first column) in order to automatically transfer them.


Reverse-Return Network Calculations (Tichelmann or Triple Pipe): In addition to the classic (twin pipe) network described above, there is also the possibility to define a network with reverse return, where induction and return are not absolutely parallel networks but follow different routes. Such a network can be easily defined, by simply supposing a second network, similar to the one described above, with differently numbered junction points.

Attention! FCU units do not need numbering because they are already numbered.

After numbers (or letters and numbers) are assigned to the junction points and FCU units, fill the first column of the calculation sheet with the return sections using “-” instead of “.” and in reverse direction to the water flow (e.g. 13-5 if in the above example return to radiator 5 is not carried out according to the induction route (1:3:5) but through another one). It should be noted that point 1 is the return point of the return network as well (e.g. section 1-13 could be the terminal point of the return network). However, this standardisation is the simplest possible as the user will find out by working out a simple example, simulating induction and return simultaneously. For example, if a radiator load changes, then both the induction and return supply will change which will, in turn, influence the pipe cross-sections etc.

3.2.4.2 Cooling System In this window a Cooling System is selected (from Libraries, if F11 or the appropriate button into the field is pressed) and its operation features are inserted. Note that detailed calculations for the cooling system are performed within the Psychrometry application.

- 326 - FINE - HVAC

3.2.4.3 Pump The program allows use of one up to five pumps. For the selected pump, total flow rate in the network and total friction losses for the most mailing network branch are automatically displayed. Note that the pump, which covers the requirements of each network branch, should be set in the starting section of the network (e.g. 1.2) by typing the Pump serial number. Regarding the selected pump serial number (1, if only one pump exists), the following data appear:

• The calculated water Supply in m3/h, according to the calculation sheet data.

• The Most mailing network branch, that is the branch presenting the higher friction losses.

• The Total Network (pipes and accessories) Friction Value, which corresponds to the above Most Mailing Section, in mwg.

• The Boiler, 3-way Valve, Check Valve Friction as well as Other Friction (for safety reasons, further friction losses are supposed, that is the theoretically calculated are increased by approximately 20-30%), in mwg.

If the above friction values are added together, the result will be the installation total head (in mwg). In order to select a circulator type from the program libraries, press F11 in the field or the appropriate button into the field. "Type of Selected Circulator". Then the features (Supply, Head and other features) of the selected circulator are presented. Apparently, the selected circulator(s) should satisfy the supply and head requirements of the installation.

3.2.4.4 Expansion Tank For Expansion Tank selection, fill the static and final pressure of the installation (in bar). It should be noted that the installation Static Pressure (in bar) corresponds to the distance between the installation expansion tank and the FCU unit higher placed.


Knowing that 10 mwg correspond to 1 bar (to be accurate, 9.81 mwg = 1 bar), the Static Pressure can be calculated in bar. Regarding the installation Final Pressure, the Static Pressure should be increased by a safety factor (of 0.7 bar), in the case the above Fan Coils contain air.

Water expansion and the minimum volume of the expansion tank are calculated and the only thing left is to select an expansion tank from the libraries (pressing F11 or the appropriate button into the field) so that the required minimum volume is exceeded.

3.2.4.5 Network Drawing The (numbered) network drawing is shown on the screen, provided that polar co-ordinates have been inserted in every network branch (see calculation sheet).

3.2.4.6 Vertical Diagram If the user wants to create a vertical Diagram using the calculation sheet (and not automatically, using FINE package), the above option creates the vertical chart provided that polar co-ordinates have been inserted in every network branch. The Engine-room, with its specific features having been transferred from the calculation sheet, is at the bottom side. See chapter 1 for more information regarding creation and printing of the vertical chart.

3.2.4.7 Section friction Drop This option shows the total friction in every terminal route so that the designer can see if the network is balanced. If the user thinks that there are great friction differences among specific branches, he can modify the calculation sheets (by changing the pipe diameter or inserting a restrictive accessory) and return to "Section Friction Drop" to see the result of his modifications. The most mailing network branch, which is one of the criteria for the pump selection, is shown on the screen bottom side.

- 328 - FINE - HVAC

Finally, it should be noted that, in the case of a reverse-return system, all branches (both induction and return branches) as well as their most mailing combination are estimated.


The user can edit the bill of materials-costing sheet by modifying costs or quantities, inserting discounts, adding jobs or materials followed by their costs and quantities.

3.2.4.9 Technical Description The window “Technical Description” supports the creation of the project technical description, enabling the user to select among various technical description prototypes and text editing styles, according to section 1.3.

Note: The technical description prototype files are in the directory 4M\CALC\FANC\ with the names FANCTP01.RTF, FANCTP02.RTF and so on. The prototype descriptions are in the file FANCTP.LST.

3.2.4.10 Assumptions The text of the general Assumptions, which may be included in the printed project issue as long as it is selected in the "Printing Contents", is stated. If “Assumptions” is selected, the option “Assumptions” with the secondary option “Select Prototype” appear in the menu. If you select a specific admission prototype, the respective text appears in a window (see Chapter 1).

Note: The Assumption prototype files are in the directory 4M\CALC\FANC\ with the names FANCPR01.RTF, FANCPR02.RTF and so on. The prototype descriptions are in the file FANCPR.LST.



Note: The cover page prototype files are in the directory 4M\CALC\FANC\ with the names FANCCP01.RTF, FANCCP02.RTF etc. The prototype descriptions are in the file FANCCP.LST.

3.2.5 Libraries The "Fan Coils" application libraries contain pipes, FCU units and accessories as well as equipment for the engine-room (Cooling Systems, Pumps, Expansion Tanks etc). Each library category contains various material types, which exist in the market, but naturally it can be updated with the material types the user desires. Material libraries containing the characteristic data of each material type are described in the following sections.

3.2.5.1 Fittings Fittings libraries contain the various tubing accessories in lists, while the main features of each fitting (Z resistance and cost) are also mentioned.

3.2.5.2 Pipes “Pipes” library contains various types of heating pipes with their description and roughness (e.g. Copper pipe, Plastic pipe etc). If you have selected a specific pipe type and press the key "Size", a small table appears listing the available pipe cross-sections followed by all necessary data (nominal diameter, inner diameter, cost and code).

- 330 - FINE - HVAC

3.2.5.3 Fan Coil Units "Fan Coils" library contains various unit types with all the features needed for the calculations. Specifically, for each manufacturer a tab is displayed with fan coil sizes (200, 400 etc.), Z coefficients, codes and costs.

If the key “Loads” is pressed, the corresponding outputs for the various temperatures (dry bulb, wet bulb and water inlet temperature) are displayed.

Note: Calculation of Fan-Coil Z coefficient: Coefficient Z characterizes the pressure drop in the Fan-Coil and is calculated from the formula: Z = Dp / Q 1.747

where: Dp is the pressure drop in the Fan-Coil (in mH2O) Q is the water supply in the Fan-Coil (in m3/h)

3.2.5.4 Cooling Engines Various types of Cooling Systems with their features are included.


3.2.5.5 Pumps Various Pump types with their main technical features (Size, Supply, Head, Motor Power, Electrical Data, Cost, Code) as well as their characteristic curves simulated with 4 pairs of values for Q, H, like the case of the Twin Pipes Heating System. The existing libraries can be updated by the user, who is free to modify them or enter new data.

3.2.5.6 Expansion Tanks

This library contains various Expansion Tank types with their Capacity, Valve Size, Cost and Code.

- 332 - FINE - HVAC

Note: All libraries can be updated simply either by accessing the card of the material you want to modify or by adding the new material and inserting the relevant required data. If you click "OK", the modifications are saved while if you click "Cancel" any modifications are cancelled.

3.2.6 Help This option leads to the other user support options, according to section 1.3.


3.3 Air-Ducts If you double-click the Air-duct icon, the following menu appears on the screen displaying various groups of options under "Files", "Options", "View", “Windows”, "Libraries" and "Help".

These options and their secondary options are described in detail in the following sections.

3.3.1 Files The option "Files" contains secondary options which apply to every application and have already been described in detail in section 1.3.1. Summarising, the options in brief are: New project: Type a name for the new project to save it in a file. Project Selection: A window appears where you can select the desired (existing) project file and load it.


Update from Drawing: In the case of co-operation with the FINE package, the project calculation sheets are updated with the drawing data.

- 334 - FINE - HVAC

Attention! If the option "Update from Drawing" is selected, without previously grill a project and inserting rooms in the ground plans using the FINE package, any existing data in the calculation sheets will be replaced with blanks.

Save: The project you are currently working on is saved on the hard disc (with the previously given name). Save as...: The project you are currently working on is saved in a different file with a new name. Load Prototype: The saved prototype appears on the screen. Save as Prototype: The form, which has been created by the user and is displayed on the screen when this option is selected, is saved as a Prototype. Printing Prototypes: The printing prototype management window is activated. Printing: The project issue is printed according to the previously selected options in "Printing Contents" and "Printing Parameters", following the print preview output. Printing Contents: From the result list of the project, the contents we want printed are selected: Printing Parameters: The desired printing parameters can be selected in this window according to the procedure already mentioned in section 1.3.1. Print Preview: The complete project issue appears on the screen, exactly as it will be printed, page to page. Link to MS-Word: A RTF file containing the project items is created (within the project directory, with the name AERA.RTF). Παράλληλα, ενεργοποιείται το MS-Word (εφόσον είναι εγκατεστηµένο στον υπολογιστή σας). Link to 4M Editor: A RTF file containing the project items is created (within the project directory, with the name AERA.RTF). Παράλληλα, ενεργοποιείται o 4M Editor. Export to RTF: A Rtf file, containing the project items, is created (within the project directory, named after AERA.RTF). Exit: Exit from the Air-Duct application.

3.3.2 Options These are the basic project data, which are divided into general data (project headings) and network data.

3.3.2.1 Project Options Project Options refer to titles and headings related to the project identity, as in any other application.


3.3.2.2 Network Options

As shown in the corresponding screen, the network data refer to the following parameters:

• Air Supply temperature: This is the temperature of the air entering the space from the induction grills (15-16°C).

• Desired Spaces temperature: This is the desired temperature in the air-conditioned spaces (significant only if Psychrometry has not been preceded).

• Air-duct material: The Air-duct material to be used is selected (if <F11> or the appropriate button into the field is pressed, the respective library is displayed).

• Air-Ducts Roughness Factor: Air-duct roughness coefficient, which depends on the duct material, is inserted. If the duct material has been selected from the libraries, roughness is automatically updated.

• Maximum air velocity: It concerns the upper air velocity limit in the air ducts. This value is used as an upper limit if the method of equal pressure drops is applied or it is taken as the value of the air velocity when the method of equal velocities is applied instead.

• Pressure drop per meter: Pressure drop per m is the value of the corresponding network pressure drop per m when the equal pressure drops method is applied, while it is of no significance if the method of equal velocities is applied instead.

• Type of Cross Section (circular, square or rectangular): Cross section type in the longest part of the network is inserted.

- 336 - FINE - HVAC

• Desired Air-duct dimensions (width and height): The desired air duct dimensions should be determined only if rectangular air ducts are selected (which is, of course, the most common selection), where the designer is able to define a fixed value for width or height. Note that, when both dimensions of the air-duct rectangular cross section are determined (or one dimension for circular or square cross sections), then the velocity and pressure drop in each network branch are determined without following the principles of any of the available methods. On the contrary, if only one dimension is inserted, either height or width, then the other dimension results automatically by the calculation method. Of course, the fixed value for height or width determined here, does not constrain the designer because there is always the possibility to modify it in a specific section of the network.

• Rounding step of Air-duct dimensions: In case that accuracy to mm is not needed, the air-duct cross section value is calculated approximately in increments (e.g. 50 mm).

• Grilles Sound Level: It concerns the upper limit of the noise level (in db) at grills which should not be exceeded. This limit can also be selectively modified in a specific room grill.

• Desired grilles dimensions: Similar instructions to those given above for the desired air duct dimensions are applied.

• Number of Fans: It concerns the number of the installation Fans (1-5).

• Unit system (Κcal/h, Watt or Btu/h): • Calculation Methodology: The program enables selection among the 3

available air-duct calculation methods a) Method of Equal Velocities b) Method of Equal Friction Losses and c) Method of Static Pressure Recovery.

• Minimum Air velocity: This concerns the minimum air velocity in case the Recovery method is selected. The designer should keep in mind that he is allowed to insert a minimum velocity limit value, if the velocity at the air outlets is considered very low.

Note: The designer should keep in mind that if the Recovery method is selected, it would be useful to postpone inserting the network section starting at the fan until all other sections are inserted, so that pressure recovery calculations are not repeated each time a new section is inserted (see calculations).

3.3.3 View This set of options includes the secondary option "Toolbars".

3.3.4 Windows The option “Windows” includes a series of calculation and result windows, in which the analytical project calculations are presented. The main window which comprises the core of the application calculations is the Air-duct Calculation Sheet, which is decribed in the following section.



As shown in the figure, each row of this sheet corresponds to a different network section while each column refers to data that are inserted or result automatically during the procedure of data insertion. Instructions regarding data insertion are displayed in the status bar. In each row, first fill the fields of the first column which refer to section designations. The network standardisation method is based on the principles, which are explained later on. Suppose that the simple network shown in the adjacent figure is under study. In this figure numbers have been assigned to junction points (1,2,3) and grilles (4,5,6). The unique restriction in numbering is that number 1 should be assigned to the point where the fan is located (if there are more than one fans (air-conditioning or ventilation units) number 1 should also be assigned to each one of them). Furthermore, it is obvious that each number may not appear twice in the same network (note that all calculation sheets refer to the same network). After numbering the network, enter each section in the project calculation sheet separately (the succession order is not important) by typing in the first column the two junction points of each section (putting a dot in between) so that the sequence of junction points matches the direction of water flow in the pipe.

- 338 - FINE - HVAC

In the above example sections 1.2, 2.3, 2.6, 3.4 and 3.5 should be entered. If method (c), i.e. pressure recovery method, has been selected, it is recommended to insert section 1.2 last, in order to save time during calculations. For each section between two junction points (e.g. section 1.2 or 2.3 in the above figure), it is necessary to enter a) the duct length and b) the local accessory resistance. In addition to the pipe length and local accessory resistance, the air flow rate should also be inserted in each row, between a junction point and a grill (e.g. section 2.6 in the figure). The flow rate can be either inserted directly (after the temperature difference in column 4 is deleted) or calculated automatically if the temperature difference and the space load are known. Provided a link to the Cooling loads program has been established, the space load is automatically taken (if the floor and space number, e.g. 1.2, is inserted) and the resulting flow rate corresponds to the total flow required for the space. If there are more than one grilles for the ventilation of the space, the designer should intervene by distributing the flow rate accordingly. It is not necessary to determine flow rate for the intermediate network sections as it is calculated based on the flow rate through the grilles belonging to this section (e.g. section 1.2 or 2.3 in the above figure). If the user tries to type a figure for the flow rate in the above sections, it will be automatically deleted since flow rate is a calculated quantity for these sections. In general, flow rates should be inserted only for sections with grilles while it is calculated by the program for the intermediate sections.

Note: The total air flow rate in each space can be calculated either approximately based on the sensible space load and the temperature difference between induced and return air or accurately if Psychrometric Calculations have been previously performed (see Psychrometry).

If all the above data are known, then flow rate values in sections without grilles (e.g. 2.3) are summed up and automatically displayed in the flow rate column. Based on these flow rates in each network section and the calculation method (equal pressure or velocity), air-duct dimensions as well as standard sizes for the grilles, where they exist, are determined in each section. The designer can access all these data by pressing F12 or by selecting ''Additional Data'' from the list that appears when we press the right button of the mouse in any column of the row corresponding to the section in question.


Then, the adjacent window appears on the screen. Air-duct cross section (circular, rectangle etc.) and its desired dimensions are those entered in the general data, but the designer is allowed to modify or insert any other desired dimension. Based on the above dimensions, effective air velocity and pressure drop can be calculated in the calculation sheet. On the top of the window, the network polar coordinates should be provided (regarding the above example, angles of 0 degrees should be assigned to sections 1.2, 2.6 and 3.5, of 90 degrees to section 2.3 and of 180 degrees to section 3.4) so that the drawing and the vertical chart are designed correctly. It is emphasised that, in this manner, any type of network can be accurately and scale designed. Finally, in the above window, the respective grill dimensions are also determined so that the noise level, specified in general data, is not exceeded. The grill dimensions are automatically calculated after a grill type has been selected from the respective library by pressing F11 or the appropriate button into the field.

The grill width, height and existing noise level are displayed at the bottom of the window. Note that in the middle of the window, it is possible to insert the desired dimensions (usually one of them is inserted in the general data and the other one is automatically calculated).

Note: Range is the horizontal distance from the grill to the point where the velocity of the air stream is reduced to 0.25 m/s. Grill ranges are determined using the formula:

σ = L x √ F/Q= L/(u x √ F) = L/(√ Q√ u) where: L: grill range

- 340 - FINE - HVAC

F: grill area in m2

u: air velocity in m/s Q: Flow rate σ: grill coefficient

Accessories of the air-duct network (e.g. elbows, T-junctions etc.) are entered for each section by activating the corresponding window with F11 or the appropriate button into the field in column 10, as described above for piping. Here, the accessory serial number for each type of accessory or the total Z coefficient (at the bottom of the window) or a combination of the two should be inserted. There is also the possibility to enter a serial number for accessory systems (on the top) so as to avoid inserting the same accessories repeatedly and enter the system directly from the calculation sheet (by directly typing the system serial number in the accessory column). Note that, in case the equal pressure drops method is used and you want to balance the network, dampers can be adjusted accordingly (keep in mind that the equal pressure drops method ensures well "balanced" networks only if the network has been symmetrically designed). The option “Section Friction Drop” shows how well balanced the network is and indirectly indicates which branches need restriction using dampers. If the method of static pressure recovery is applied instead, then friction losses in each network section are balanced by the recovered static pressure which in turn depends on the velocity in the previous and next section. So, nothing appears in the last column (zero friction losses), except for the first network section that starts at the fan (section 1.2 in the above example) and, of course, the sections where the user has specified both dimensions of the air-duct cross section. Consequently, total friction losses in this case are equal to the friction losses in the first section which starts at the fan. All the above apply to the air induction network. The outlet network is standardised similarly by determing again junction points and (outlet) grills and assigning a slightly lower flow rate, compared to the induction grills, to each grill (i.e. 70-80% of the air inlet flow rate so that room is slightly over-pressurised). Apparently, the outlet network is completely independant and has not grills in all rooms. Since the fan has to overcome friction losses for the most mailing induction and outlet branch, the corresponding friction losses are added and displayed in the calculation sheet (see below). In the case of typical (similar) air-duct network sections, it is possible to recall them (with their name from the first column) in order to automatically transfer them.

Note: The Air-duct program is also suitable for any other ventilation project. In order to calculate a ventilation network, it should be first standardized as previously explained with the only difference that the load and temperature differences should be deleted (from the corresponding column) and flow rates for all sections terminated in grills should be inserted. Furthermore, sections should be inserted with “.” and not with “-“, as there is not a secondary network.


3.3.4.2 Fans The program allows use of one to five Fans. For the selected Fan the total network flow rate and the total friction losses of the most mailing branch are displayed in the window.

Note that the Fan which covers the requirements of each network branch should be set in the starting section of the network (e.g. 1.2) by entering its serial number (either selecting it after having pressed F12 or select ''Additional Data'' from the list that appears when we press the right button of the mouse in the “Network Section” or typing it directly in the last column of the calculation sheet). Regarding the selected Fan serial number (1, if only one fan exists), the following data appear:

• The calculated air Supply in m3/h, according to the calculation sheet data.

• The Most mailing network SECTION (branch), that is the branch presenting the higher friction losses.

• The Total Network (pipes and accessories) Friction, which corresponds to the above Most Mailing Branch, in mwg, and has been calculated in calculation sheet.

• The Filter, Air-Air Heat Exchanger, Air-conditioning Unit Friction values as well as Other Friction values (for safety reasons, some further friction losses are supposed, that is the theoretically calculated friction values are usually increased by approximately 20-30%, in mwg.

If the above friction values are added together, the result will be the installation total head (in mwg). In order to select a fan type from the program libraries, press F11 or the appropriate button into the field "Type of Selected Fan".

- 342 - FINE - HVAC

Then the features (Supply, Head and other features) of the selected fan are presented.

3.3.4.3 Network Drawing The (numbered) network drawing is shown on the screen, as in any other network application, provided that polar coordinates have been inserted in every network branch (see calculation sheet).

3.3.4.4 Vertical Diagram If the user wants to create a vertical diagram using the calculation sheet (and not automatically, using FINE package), the above option creates the vertical chart provided that polar coordinates have been inserted in every network branch. The Fan, with its specific features having been transferred from the calculation sheet, is found at the bottom. Further details concerning the creation and printing of the vertical diagram are described in section 1.3.4.

3.3.4.5 Section Friction Drop This option shows the total friction in every terminal route so that the designer can see if the network is balanced. If the user thinks that there are significant friction differences among specific branches, he can modify the calculation sheets (by changing the pipe diameter or inserting dampers) and return to "Section Friction Drop" to see the result of his modifications. The most mailing network branch, which is one of the criteria for the fan selection, is shown at the bottom of the screen.


The user can edit the bill of materials-costing sheet, modifying costs or quantities, inserting discounts, adding jobs or materials followed by their costs and quantities.

3.3.4.7 Technical Description The window “Technical Description” supports the creation of the project technical description, enabling the user to select among various technical description prototypes and text editing styles, according to section 1.3.4.


Note: The technical description prototype files are in the directory 4M\CALC\AERA\ with the names AERATP01.RTF, AERATP02.RTF and so on. The prototype descriptions are in the file AERATP.LST.

3.3.4.8 Assumptions The text of the general Assumptions, which may be included in the printed project issue as long as it is selected in the "Printing Contents", is stated. If “Assumptions” is selected, the option "Assumptions" with the secondary option "Select Prototype" appear in the menu. If you select a specific admission prototype, the respective text appears in a window (see section 1.3.4).

Note: The Assumption prototype files are in the directory 4M\CALC\AERA\ with the names AERAPR01.RTF, AERAPR02.RTF and so on. The prototype descriptions are in the file FANCPR.LST.


Note: The cover page prototype files are in the directory 4M\CALC\AERA\ with the names AERACP01.RTF, AERACP02.RTF etc. The prototype descriptions are in the file AERACP.LST.

3.3.5 Libraries The "Air-ducts" application libraries include duct materials, grills, accessories and fans as well as the common Offer libraries. As in any other application, each library category contains various material types, which exist in the market, but naturally it can be updated with the material types the user desires. In the following sections the libraries are described per category.

3.3.5.1 Fittings Fittings libraries contain the various air-duct accessories in list form, while the main features of each fiiting [Z coefficient (resistance) and cost] are also mentioned.

- 344 - FINE - HVAC

3.3.5.2 Duct Materials This library contains various material types with their description (e.g. from Tin Plate, Plastic, etc), their roughness, their specific gravity and code.

If you have selected a particular type and click the key «Thickness» a table-list appears with the thickness used for each width and the respective costs.

3.3.5.3 Grilles The "Grilles" library contains various grill types with their standard dimensions and all other features needed for the calculations. If the user wants to insert his own grills in the library, he should fill the grill description as well as the numerical data that characterize it.

Notes: • Coefficient Z Calculation: The coefficient Z indicates the pressure drop in the

grill and is calculated using the formula: Z = 2.11637 x 10-4 x ( Dp x A2 x B2 / Q2 ) where: Dp the pressure drop in the grill (in mmH2O) A and B the grill dimensions (in mm)


Q the air flow rate in the grill (in m3/h.)

• Range Coefficient Calculation: The range coefficient is calculated using the formula:

s = L x √ F/Q= L/(u x √ F) = L/(√ Q√ u) where: L: grill range (in m) F: grill area (in m2)

u: air velocity (in m/s) Q: air flow rate in the grill (in m3/s)

• Calculation of the flow ratio coefficient: If the grill is not symmetrical (e.g. Κ104 Β), the flow rate in the grill large side is different from that in the small side. The user provides the ratio of the flow rate in side A to the flow rate in side B. In the companies technical bulletins side A usually refers to the smaller side and B to the larger one. The Ranges LA and LB result according to sides A and B. If the grill is symmetrical there is no need to fill this field.

- 346 - FINE - HVAC

3.3.5.4 Fans The Fans library includes various types with their features.

3.3.6 Help This option leads to the user support options, according to section 1.3.6.


3.4 Psychrometry Based on the analytical psychrometry equations, this program carries out the air-conditioning unit selection and the air distribution in the air-conditioned spaces while it also provides the user with the psychrometric variation on the psychrometric chart as a result. When this program is loaded, the following first screen appears with the option groups “Files”, “Options”, “View", “Windows” and “Help”.

3.4.1 Files The option "Files" contains secondary options which apply to each application and have already been described in detail in section 1.3.1. Summarising, the options in brief are: New project: Type a name for the new project to save it in a file. Project Selection: A window appears where you can select the desired (existing) project file and load it.


Update from Drawing: In the case of co-operation with the FINE package, the project calculation sheets are updated with the drawing data. Update from Cooling Loads: Provided a study of the loads has been carried out, the Psychrometry calculation sheets can be updated through this option. Export: After the designer has completed a Psychrometry study and the calculation of the air required for each space, he may continue to calculate the Air-ducts which will supply air to spaces. With the present option the required air quantities for cooling and heating can be transferred to "Air-ducts". Save: The project you are currently working on is saved on the hard disc (with the previously given name). Save as...: The project you are currently working on is saved in a different file with a new name. Load Prototype: The saved prototype appears on the screen. Save as Prototype: The form, which has been created by the user and is displayed on the screen when this option is selected, is saved as a Prototype. Printing Prototypes: The printing prototype management window is activated.

- 348 - FINE - HVAC

Printing: The project issue is printed according to the previously selected options in "Printing Contents" and "Printing Parameters", following the print preview output. Printing Contents: The project contents to be printed are selected: Printing Parameters: The desired printing parameters can be selected in this window according to Chapter 1. Print Preview: The complete project issue appears on the screen, exactly as it will be printed, page to page. Link to MS-Word: A RTF file containing the project items is created (within the project directory, with the name PSYC.RTF). Παράλληλα, ενεργοποιείται το MS-Word (εφόσον είναι εγκατεστηµένο στον υπολογιστή σας). Link to 4M Editor: A RTF file containing the project items is created (within the project directory, with the name PSYC.RTF). Παράλληλα, ενεργοποιείται o 4M Editor. Export to RTF: A Rtf file, containing the project items, is created (within the project directory, under PSYC.RTF). Exit: Exit from the "Psychrometry" application.

3.4.2 Options These are the basic data of the installation. They are divided into general data (headings of the project), calculation parameters, indoor and outdoor conditions and, finally, space data.

3.4.2.1 Project Options This option leads to a respective screen, where the user can type titles and headings concerning the project identity.

3.4.2.2 Calculation Parameters When the option "Calculation Parameters" is selected, the psychrometric calculation parameters, which should be typed according to the characteristics of the particular project, appear on the screen. These parameters are listed below:

• Minimum temperature of the psychrometric chart: This concerns the minimum temperature used for the graphic representation of the psychrometric chart and varies from -20° C to 20° C.

• Maximum temperature of the psychrometric chart: This concerns the maximum temperature used for the graphic representation of the psychrometric chart and varies from 35° C to 65° C.

• Unit System: Kcal/h or Watt or Btu/h

• Fresh air: The required fresh air can be inserted either as a quantity in m3/h or as a percentage.


• Air-duct losses: The air-duct losses can be assigned either check the box if they are to be ignored, or let the box unchecked if they are to be taken into account in the calculations.

• Fan losses: The Fan losses can be assigned either value ''No'' if they are to be ignored, or value ''Before'' if the fan is located upstream of the air-conditioning unit, or value ''After'' if the fan is located downstream of the air-conditioning unit.

• By-pass factor: This concerns the air-conditioning unit by-pass factor and varies between 0 - 1 (see hereunder for the analytical values).

• Coolant temperature difference:

• Heating medium temperature difference:

3.4.2.3 Indoor Conditions The desired indoor conditions are provided in this window.

More specifically, the following items should be inserted:

• Desired indoor temperature in summer: This concerns the desired temperature (in °C) of the cooled rooms.

• Desired indoor relative humidity in summer: This concerns the desired relative humidity (%) of the cooled rooms.

• Desired indoor temperature in winter: This concerns the desired temperature (in °C) of the heated rooms.

• Desired indoor relative humidity in winter: This concerns the desired relative humidity (%) of the heated rooms.

3.4.2.4 Outdoor Conditions These concern the outdoor temperature and relative humidity values during the day in summer as well as in winter.

- 350 - FINE - HVAC

3.4.2.5 Spaces The data that will be used for the calculation of the air-conditioning units for each space should be typed in this window.

More specifically, for each space the following data should be typed:

• The level where the space is.

• The serial number of the space.

• The name of the space.

• The system where the space belongs.


• The hour when the maximum load appears, regarding the system where the space belongs.

• The sensible cooling load of the space.

• The latent cooling load of the space.

• The thermal losses of the space.

• The required fresh air quantity of the space. The space data can result automatically, only if a link to Cooling Loads and Heating Losses has been established.

3.4.3 View This set of options includes the secondary option "Toolbars" which are described in chapter 1 in detail.

3.4.4 Windows The option “Windows” includes a series of calculation and result windows, in which the analytical project calculations are presented.

3.4.4.1 Psychrometric Point Calculations If this option is selected, the basic psychrometric calculations are performed. If two of the six basic psychrometric quantities are provided and F8 or the button from the toolbar is pressed, the remaining four quantities can be calculated.

3.4.4.2 Systems If this option, which is the main window of the Psychrometry application, is selected, the air-conditioning unit calculation is carried out for each one of the Systems, in which the rooms have been grouped.

- 352 - FINE - HVAC

The systems window provides the systems list on the left side (System 1, System 2 etc) while the Cooling and Heating tabs appear on the upper side. In this way the user can access any system, either Cooling or Heating, and follow the instructions given in the next section. Note that, for better monitoring of the results, the user can have on screen either the above window with all the information at the same time or just the psychrometric chart or just the results. Switching between the above 3 monitoring ways is enabled through the 3 relative icons (see adjacent image) of the toolbar when the window “Systems” is active. As far as data, applicable methods and calculation results are concerned, a detailed description follows for both the cooling and the heating application. 3.4.4.2.1 Cooling

In order to calculate a Cooling System the following data should be typed:

• Desired temperature in summer: This concerns the desired temperature (in °C) in the cooled rooms.

• Desired relative humidity in summer: This concerns the desired relative humidity (%) in the cooled rooms.

• Outdoor temperature in summer: This concerns the outdoor temperature at the peak hour of the System.

• Outdoor relative humidity in summer: This concerns the relative humidity (%) at the peak hour of the System.


• System Sensible Heat: This is the sensible cooling load of the System at its peak hour. It results from the sum of the sensible cooling loads of the rooms, which are included in the System, at the System peak hour and cannot be modified in the option "Systems".

• System Latent Heat: This concerns the latent cooling load of the System at its peak hour. It results from the sum of the latent cooling loads of the rooms, which are included in the System, at the System peak hour and cannot be modified in the option "Systems".

• Fresh air: The required fresh air can be provided either as quantity in m3/h or as percentage.

• Fresh air as quantity (m3/h) or percentage: This concerns the total fresh air of the System in m3/h or the respective percentage. In case the fresh air of the System is provided as quantity, it results from the sum of the fresh air quantities of the rooms, which are included in the System, and it cannot be modified in the option "Systems".

• Air-duct losses: The air-duct losses can be assigned either value ''No'' if they are to be ignored, or value ''Yes'' if they are to be taken into account in the calculations.

• Percentage of load loss in the air-ducts: To be inserted only if the possible load losses in the air-ducts are to be taken into account in the calculations. It is provided as a percentage of the total load.

• Fan losses: Fan losses can be assigned either value ''No'' if they are not to be taken into consideration in the calculations, or value ''Before'' if the fan is located upstream of the cooling element, or value ''After'' if the fan is located downstream of the cooling element.

• Total fan load: To be inserted only if the fan load is to be taken into account in the calculations.

• By-pass factor: This concerns the air-conditioning unit by-pass factor which varies between 0 - 1.

Attention! The by-pass factor characterises the unit cooling element and, therefore, stands for much more than the air percentage transacting with the cooling element.

Depending on the use, the by-pass factor has the values which appear in the following table:

- 354 - FINE - HVAC

By-pass Factor

Application Type Examples

0.30 to 0.50 Low total Load

or high latent Load

Houses

0.20 to 0.30 Relatively low total load or of low sensible heat coefficient

Houses

Small stores

Factories

0.10 to 0.20 Typical Application for Comfort Stores

Banks

Factories

0.05 to 0.10 High indoor sensible loads or high outdoor air flow for ventilation

Big Stores

Restaurants

Factories

0 to 0.10 Applications with 100% outdoor air

Surgeries

Factories

The air temperature at the air-conditioning unit outlet depends highly on the by-pass factor. For the same system and the same operating conditions, if the by-pass factor is increased, the air outlet temperature will increase too while if the by-pass factor is decreased, the air outlet temperature will decrease too.

• Coolant temperature difference: Based on the coolant temperature difference after it passes through the cooling element, the required quantity of the coolant can be calculated.

After the values of all the above items have been specified, the designer should follow the steps I and ΙΙ which are described hereunder: I. Method Selection: If the arrow in the first field is pressed, a window will appear listing the six methods included in the program:

1. Cooling with Drying, without Reheating: This is the most common method. 2. Cooling with Drying, with Reheating: It is usually used when the latent load is

high in comparison to the total loads (e.g. ball rooms). 3. Cooling with Drying, with return air by-pass: Part of the return air is by-

passed through the unit cooling element.


4. Cooling with Drying, 100% fresh air: In applications where it is necessary to have induction air coming totally from outdoors (e.g. surgeries).

5. Cooling without Drying, Pre-cooled Air: This method should be selected if the air-conditioning unit is to undertake only the fresh air load while the room loads are covered by Fan Coils or another unit.

6. Cooling with Drying, Pre-cooled air: As in the previous method but with drying.

ΙΙ. Calculation Activation: Pressing F8 ή the button from the toolbar while in the Systems screen activates the calculations of the air-conditioning unit of each System. The results of the solution appear at the bottom straight away while the psychrometric chart showing the respective psychrometric variation is displayed on the right. More specifically, the appearing results are:

• The air mixture conditions (Temperature of dry and wet bulb thermometer, absolute and relative humidity)

• The air inlet conditions in the air-conditioning unit (Temperature of dry and wet bulb thermometer, absolute and relative humidity)

• The air outlet conditions from the air-conditioning unit (Temperature of dry and wet bulb thermometer, absolute and relative humidity)

• The air inlet conditions in the air-conditioned rooms (Temperature of dry and wet bulb thermometer, absolute and relative humidity). Note that there are 2 ways to alter the air induction temperature in the spaces:

• Modifying the by-pass factor of the air-conditioning unit

• Modifying the calculation method and using the "Air Induction By-pass" method.

• The effective coefficient of sensible heat

• The coefficient of the system sensible heat

• The coefficient of the air-conditioning unit sensible heat

• The quantity of the air delivered by the air-conditioning unit, the fresh air, the induced air and the return air

• The fresh air loads

• The air-conditioning unit loads and finally

• The cooling element supply 3.4.4.2.2 Heating

For the calculation of a Heating System, the following data should be inserted:

• Outdoor temperature in winter • Outdoor relative humidity in winter • System sensible load: This is the sensible thermal load of the System. It

results from the sum of the sensible thermal loads of the rooms, which are included in the System, and it cannot be modified in the option "Systems".

- 356 - FINE - HVAC

• System latent load: This is the latent thermal load of the System. It results from the sum of the latent thermal loads of the rooms, which are included in the System, and it cannot be modified in the option "Systems ".

• Fresh air: The required fresh air can be provided either as a quantity in m3/h or as a percentage.

• Fresh air as quantity (m3/h) or percentage: This is the total fresh air of the System in m3/h or the respective percentage. In case the fresh air of the System is provided as a quantity, then it results from the sum of the fresh air quantities of the rooms, which are included in the System, and it cannot be modified in the option "Systems".

• Air-duct losses: The air-duct losses can be assigned either value ''No'' if they are to be ignored, or value ''Yes'' if they are to be taken into consideration in the calculations.

• Load loss percentage in air-ducts: To be inserted only in case the possible load losses in the air-ducts are to be taken into consideration in the calculations.

• Fan losses: The fan losses can be assigned either value ''No'' if they are to be ignored in calculations, or value ''Before'' if the fan is located upstream of the cooling element or value ''After'' if the fan is located downstream of the cooling element.

• Fan total load: To be inserted only in case the fan load is to be taken into consideration in the calculations.

• By-pass factor: This concerns the by-pass factor of the air-conditioning unit, which was mentioned before, with values between 0-1.

• Heating medium temperature difference: The temperature difference of the coolant (usually 5 degrees) is typed so that the water supply can be calculated.

• Desired temperature in winter: This is the desired temperature in the heated spaces.

• Desired relative humidity in winter: This is the desired relative humidity (%) in the heated spaces.

After having set values on the above, the steps I and II that are described below should be followed at this point as well: I. Method Selection: If the arrow in the first field is pressed, one of the nine methods included in the program can be selected: 1. Heating with Humidification - Steam (cooling has preceded): This method

involves air heating and humidification with a steam humidifier. The air inlet quantities will be those already calculated in the cooling calculations.

2. Heating with Humidification - Steam (cooling has not preceded) 3. Heating without Humidification (cooling has preceded) 4. Heating without Humidification (cooling has not preceded) 5. Heating without Humidification, Pre-cooled air 6. Heating with Humidification - Steam, Pre-cooled air


7. Heating with Humidification - Spraying (cooling has preceded) 8. Heating with Humidification - Spraying (cooling has not preceded) 9. Heating with Humidification - Spraying, Pre-cooled air

ΙΙ. Calculation Activation: Pressing F8 or the button from the toolbar while in the Systems screen activates the calculations of the air-conditioning unit of each System. Then the solution results and the respective psychrometric variation of the chart appear. More specifically, the results are:

• The air mixture conditions (Temperature of dry and wet bulb thermometer, absolute and relative humidity)

• The air inlet conditions in the air-conditioning unit (Temperature of dry and wet bulb thermometer, absolute and relative humidity)

• The air outlet conditions from the air-conditioning unit (Temperature of dry and wet bulb thermometer, absolute and relative humidity)

• The air inlet conditions in the air-conditioned rooms (Temperature of dry and wet bulb thermometer, absolute and relative humidity)

• The effective coefficient of sensible heat

• The coefficient of the system sensible heat

• The coefficient of the unit sensible heat

• The quantity of the air delivered by the air-conditioning unit, the fresh air, the induced air and the return air

• The fresh air loads

• The air-conditioning unit loads

• The cooling element supply and finally

• The humidification water quantity

3.4.4.3 Space Conditions - Cooling The induction and return air as well as the prevailing conditions in the space after the air induction (temperature of dry and wet bulb thermometer, absolute and relative humidity) are displayed for all space.

- 358 - FINE - HVAC

3.4.4.4 Space Conditions - Heating The induction and return air as well as the prevailing conditions in the space after the air induction (temperature of dry and wet bulb thermometer, absolute and relative humidity) are displayed for all spaces.

3.4.4.5 Systems Conditions - Cooling The induction and return air as well as the prevailing conditions in the space after the air induction (temperature of dry and wet bulb thermometer, absolute and relative humidity) are displayed for the spaces of each system.

3.4.4.6 Systems Conditions - Heating The induction and return air as well as the prevailing conditions in the space after the air induction (temperature of dry and wet bulb thermometer, absolute and relative humidity) are displayed for the spaces of each system.

3.4.4.7 Air-conditioning units The complete data for the selection of the Air-conditioning Units appear.

3.4.4.8 Assumptions The text of the general Assumptions, which may be included in the printed project issue as long as it is selected in the "Printing Contents", is stated. If “Assumptions” is selected, the option “Assumptions” with the secondary option “Select Prototype” appear in the menu. If you select a specific admission prototype, the respective text appears in a window (see Chapter 1).

Note: The Assumption prototype files are in the directory 4M\CALC\PSYC\ with the names PSYCPR01.RTF, PSYCPR02.RTF and so on. The prototype descriptions are in the file PSYCPR.LST.

3.4.4.9 Cover The “Cover” window is the first printed page of the project and the program enables the user to select among different types of cover pages, or even create his own cover page, exactly as he wants it.

Note: The cover page prototype files are in the directory 4M\CALC\PSYC\ with the names PSYCCP01.RTF, PSYCCP02.RTF etc. The prototype descriptions are in the file PSYCCP.LST.


3.4.5 Help This option leads to the user support options, according to section 1.3.

Note: For the user’s convenience the Abbreviations and the Notations of the parameters used in the program are listed below. Ι. ABBREVIATIONS adp unit dew-point

BF by-pass factor (BF)(OALH) latent heat of the outdoor by-passed air (BF)(OASH) sensible heat of the outdoor by-passed air

(BF)(OATH) total heat of the outdoor by-passed air db dry bulb

dp dew-point ΕRLH effective room latent heat ΕRSH effective room sensible heat

ERTH effective room total heat ESHF effective coefficient of sensible heat

GSHF unit effective coefficient of sensible heat GTH unit total heat GTHS unit total supplementary heat

OALH outdoor air latent heat OASH outdoor air sensible heat

OATH outdoor air total heat rh relative humidity

RLH room latent heat RLHS room supplementary latent heat RSH room sensible heat

RSHF factor of room sensible heat RSHS supplementary room sensible heat

RTH room total heat SHF total latent heat TLH total sensible heat

ΙΙ. NOTATIONS Vba by-passed air supply per air-conditioning unit

Vda flow rate of dry air Voa flow rate of outdoor air Vra flow rate of return air

Vsa flow rate of induced air

- 360 - FINE - HVAC

h special enthalpy

hadp unit dew-point enthalpy hes enthalpy at the effective surface temperature

hea inlet air enthalpy hla outlet air enthalpy

hm enthalpy of the outdoor air - return air mixture hoa outdoor air enthalpy hrm room air enthalpy

hsa induced air enthalpy t temperature

tadp unit dew-point temperature tedp inlet dry bulb temperature tes effective surface temperature

tew water inlet temperature tewb inlet wet bulb temperature

tldb oulet dry bulb temperature tlw water outlet temperature tlwb outlet wet bulb temperature

tm dry bulb temperature of the outdoor air – return air mixture toa dry bulb temperature of the outdoor air

trm room dry bulb temperature tsa dry bulb temperature of the induced air W humidity content or special humidity

Wadp humidity content at the unit dew-point Wea inlet air humidity content

Wes humidity content at the effective surface temperature Wla outlet air humidity content

Wm humidity content of the outdoor air - return air mixture Woa outdoor air humidity content Wrm room air humidity content

Wsa induced air humidity content

Documents

Fine Hvac En